Home

CBT SHB - Rohde & Schwarz

image

Contents

1. 4 49 Selecting Linear or Logarithmic Sweep Spacing Lin Log 4 50 Operating Modes Mode ANNER 4 50 o ca PER 4 51 SR 4 51 Ki EE 4 51 Boecl m 4 53 Ree EE 4 54 Uns 4 55 q cer 4 55 e ario M E 4 56 Internal External Reference Frequency er ec eene nnns 4 59 Phase or tne IPUR ee a ea 4 60 Passwords for Accessing Protected Functions Protect ccooooncncoccccccncnccnncnnoncncnnnanononcnnos 4 61 H ele le ag E 4 62 Display of Module Versions Diag Config cccocccccccncocnccccnnoncnonocnconoconaconannnonnnnnnnnonanonnnannns 4 63 Display of Voltages of Test Points Diag Tbomt ec ecceecceceeeceeeeeeeeeeae esse eeeseeeeeeeeeaes 4 64 1090 3123 12 4 E 6 R SOSML R amp S SMVO3 Contents Display of Service Data Diag Param ocoocccccnncccncccccncocncnnnnnonnnonncnnnnnnonanonnnnnonnnnnnnnonanenaninnns 4 65 EK PROA e O TR 4 66 Assigning Modulations to the MOD ON OFF Key Modbkey eese 4 67 Setting the Sweep Blank Time nennen nnne nenn nennen anne namen nnne anna nnns 4 68 Cl E 4 69 5 Remote Control Basic Information eee eee eee eee nennen 5 1 et KEISER 5 1 EC IEEE BUS iif inen A Ee ael MA Lr DECOR E 5 1 Ro 23920 INlef
2. ER 4 4 URIECHONGO nenne nes erg 3 5 Level sweep 1090 3123 12 Index awel IIO Lace cat boot bei etas 4 53 6 40 EE ee eeh 4 53 6 29 SOI ehe 4 53 6 41 10 A 4 53 6 29 Sweep MOOG ne anne 4 53 6 28 6 40 ER GONGIAIOR een 4 46 6 42 A A 1 8 4 46 Mol a EEE 4 46 EF SWCD se REM 4 54 6 43 TR 4 54 6 44 A siete tis wae haatana nesta uel 4 54 6 44 Sn 4 54 6 43 SIOD SIZO nee Ute rc 4 54 6 45 STOP ITEQUODOy 2 iia aeta a 4 54 6 43 ENEE 4 54 6 44 List ec NM se 3 8 510 da 3 9 EE 9 2 level correction Ueorl ernennen nenn 4 9 6 15 EEN 3 8 List entry Dici cm AA 3 13 el PE 3 12 A see seele 3 11 ISR o da 3 9 E A A RM 4 61 Long form commande of Lower case notation commande 9 7 Eer Ter 8 1 MENUS 5 10 Manual control SWILCIIDVOT aca fe Manual operation FOIUITI O ai 5 4 Eeer Ae 5 19 Maximum value commands suus 5 9 5 10 Measurement eil 10 48 Measuring equipment and accessories performance test 10 2 10 38 Memory CMOS RAI EE 1 4 ENEE ee ee 3 14 6 11 Menu e 3 2 CAN Pn 3 4 ERROR nu seele 9 1 LEE ET E EA A E E quand eaeuckeucaaseveserest 3 1 FICQUCIICY Era nenne ee 4 1 EVO SA IO ana Nasen 4 7 Level U COn aa ld 4 9 4 10 LEE eeh PE 4 46 Modulation AM ssec edet ene roro rue 3 2 MOQUIGUON EEN 4 15 Modulation Pulse eee 4 17 4 20 EEN 4 47 GUICK SO
3. 4 15 6 17 6 19 Frequency sweep E RTT MU NE ER 4 54 6 44 EEN 4 52 6 22 Frequenz OMS uas ee 4 2 FON pano uu te cte a e dtd e iets Lo eieiei ER EE 1 4 FUSE NOI ne en DEE 1 11 1090 3123 12 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 G Gate signal let 4 18 4 22 4 48 GET Group Execute Tnoger nennen 5 14 H Handshake RS 232 C suus 4 57 5 30 6 48 Header commands ENNEN ENNEN ENER 5 6 Header field display sss 3 1 I Q terea 9 rz ee 4 43 LO Imbalance ee 10 47 IEC IEEE bus QUUIGSS 2 cui Se 4 56 6 47 DIIGT IN SUUCTONS EEN 5 1 ee 5 25 IDIOT Osce is te seta em eeu pee E 1 11 5 25 ENEE MNT einlassen 4 58 el 7 1 setting of address 0 9 MODA ANC A Gas 4 44 A edd 4 44 4 45 Indication CHOOSE eege 6 46 ele e 6 8 operating time counter esses 6 8 remote CODITOL uso ines isos 5 3 5 4 SE ETIN A RON ERN 4 10 Sofware Version gee oio testor eot out eevee Een 6 9 SUPPTESSION OT une ine 4 58 Jf ER 5 10 elt 1 3 Initialization a eet tse a a ae ea as as 1 1 lee TEE 6l Input COMOCUO En 3 6 external modulation sonal 1 8 freu 3 5 intemal AM as aote e tide te le 4 14 6 14 menal d EE 4 15 6 20 Mema PM saec ep I anten 4 16 6 25 EAE E EEEN AE E EE E E 3 5 MOD meea m EM 1 8 PES Bates oett e 1 10 6 52 EE 1 10 4 59 TRIGGER yri a egest dst matte ua due that edits videa te 1 10 A EN 5 13 leier ll 5 13 Insert H
4. 1090 3123 12 6 56 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Programming Examples 7 Remote Control Programming Examples The examples explain the programming of the instrument and can serve as a basis to solve more complex programming tasks QuickBASIC has been used as programming language However the programs can be translated into other languages Including IEC Bus Library for QuickBasic REM 2 3 Include dJdECObus Library Tor QuULCkKbBas e gt SINCLUDE ocrNgbasicNqbpadeocl4 bas Initialization and Default Status The IEC bus as well as the settings of the instrument are brought into a defined default status at the beginning of every program Subroutines InitController and InitDevice are used to this effect Initiate Controller REM Initiate Instrument REM InitController iecaddress 28 IEC bus address of the instrument CALL IBFIND DEV1 generators Open port to the instrument CALL IBPAD generator iecaddress Inform controller on instrument address CALL IBTMO generator 11 Response time to 1 sec REM KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Initiate Instrument The IEC bus status registers and instrument settings of the R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 are brought into the default status REM SS ea TMitilete Instriment Keen REM InitDevice CALL IBWRT generators CLS Reset status register CALL IBWRT generators RST Reset instr
5. Corriente Corriente protegido en su potencia EN indicaci n continua en continua alterna totalidad por un MARCHA PARADA Stand by DC alterna AC DC AC aislamiento de doble refuerzo 1171 0000 42 03 00 sheet 5 Informaciones de seguridad Tener en cuenta las informaciones de seguridad sirve para tratar de evitar da os y peligros de toda clase Es necesario de que se lean las siguientes informaciones de seguridad concienzudamente y se tengan en cuenta debidamente antes de la puesta en funcionamiento del producto Tambi n deber n ser tenidas en cuenta las informaciones para la protecci n de personas que encontrar n en el cap tulo correspondiente de la documentaci n de producto y que tambi n son obligatorias de seguir En las informaciones de seguridad actuales hemos juntado todos los objetos vendidos por el grupo de empresas Rohde amp Schwarz bajo la denominaci n de producto entre ellos tambi n aparatos instalaciones as como toda clase de accesorios Palabras de se al y su significado PELIGRO Identifica un peligro directo con riesgo elevado de provocar muerte o lesiones de gravedad si no se toman las medidas oportunas ADVERTENCIA Identifica un posible peligro con riesgo medio de provocar muerte o lesiones de gravedad si no se toman las medidas oportunas ATENCI N Identifica un peligro con riesgo reducido de provocar lesiones de gravedad media o leve si no se toman las medidas oportunas CUIDADO Indica
6. RxD TxD 3 2 RxD TxD 2 3 TxD RxD 2 3 TxD RxD 3 4 DTR DSR 6 4 DTR DSR 6 5 GND GND 5 5 GND GND 7 6 DSR DTR 4 6 DSR DTR 20 7 E RTS TO IO een 8 ra eem RTS ICTO 5 8 CTS RTS 7 8 CTS RTS 4 9 mm 9 9 m 22 Fig 5 7 Wiring of data control and signalling lines for hardware handshake 1090 3123 12 9 30 E 6 R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Description of Commands 6 Remote Control Description of Commands In the following sections all commands implemented in the instrument are first listed in tables and then described in detail separated according to the command system The notation corresponds to the one of the SCPI standards to a large extent The SCPI conformity information can be taken from the list of commands at the end of this chapter The description of manual operation Chapter 4 indicates the corresponding IEC IEEE bus command for each manual setting A general introduction to remote control and a description of the status registers are to be found in Chapter 5 Detailed program examples of the main functions are to be found in Chapter 7 Note In contrast to manual
7. Example for a device response B1 B3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 B19 0 0 0 PRE 0 to 255 PARALLEL POLL REGISTER ENABLE sets the parallel poll enable register to the value indicated Query PRE returns the contents of the parallel poll enable register in decimal form PSC 0 1 POWER ON STATUS CLEAR determines whether the contents of the ENABle registers is maintained or reset in switching on PSC 0 causes the contents of the status registers to be maintained Thus a service request can be triggered in switching on in the case of a corresponding configuration of status registers ESE and SRE PSC 0 resets the registers Query PSC reads out the contents of the power on status clear flag The response can be 0 or 1 1090 3123 12 6 4 E 6 R SOSML R amp S SMVO3 Common Commands RCL 1 to 50 RECALL calls the instrument state which was stored under the number supplied using command SAV 50 instrument states can be stored RST RESET sets the instrument to a defined default status The command essentially corresponds to pressing the PRESET key The state of the RF output is an exception The RF output is deactivated after RST however it is activated after the PRESET key has been pressed The default setting is indicated in the description of the commands SAV 1 to 50 SAVE stores the current instrument state under the number indicated cf RCL as well SRE 0 to 255 SERVICE REQUEST ENABLE sets the service request enable
8. Queue overflow 350 This error code is entered into the error queue instead of the actual error code when the error queue is full The code indicates that an error has occurred but has not been accepted The error queue can accept 5 entries Communication error 360 An error has occurred during the transmission or reception of data on the IEC IEEE bus or via the RS 232 C interface Query Error error in data request sets bit 2 in the ESR register Error code Error text with queue poll Explanation of error Query INTERRUPTED 410 The query was interrupted Example After a query the instrument receives new data before the response has been sent completely Query UNTERMINATED 420 The query is incomplete Example The instrument is addressed as a talker and receives incomplete data Query DEADLOCKED 430 The query cannot be processed Example The input and output buffers are full the instrument cannot continue operating 1090 3123 12 9 5 E 6 List of Error Messages R amp S SML R amp S SMVO03 R amp S SML R amp S SMV03 Specific Error Messages Device dependent Error device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Error code 110 115 116 117 135 140 161 171 174 175 180 181 200 201 202 203 ok e co oO oO k N oO N Error text in the case of queue poll Error explanation Output unleveled The level control loop is deactivated Level overr
9. The SELECT key acknowledges the selection marked by means of the menu cursor Depending on the position the next lower menu level or the the respective setting is called The BACK key returns the menu cursor to the next higher menu level the menu cursor is shifted to the left into the preceding column of the menu structure resets the menu cursor from frequency or level value indication in the header field into the menu field to the menu called last closes the display pages called using keys STATUS HELP and ERROR again Settings are accessed in the setting menus ending with the right hand display margin 100 000 0000 mz 10 0 dem Modulation JAN Ron iM Depth AM Source Ext Coupling LFisen Freq Back 4 EE CEN Off AC 1 00000 kHz Fig 3 2 Modulation AM Menu 1090 3123 12 3 2 E 6 R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Basic Operating Steps Selection and Change of Parameters Select parameter Change setting value Via value inputs Using rotary knob 1090 3123 12 gt Set the menu cursor to the name of the parameter desired using the rotary knob e g to AM Depth in the AM menu cf Fig 3 2 Select parameter Press SELECT key or rotary knob The menu cursor changes from the parameter selected in the left hand column of the setting menu to the setting value on the right e g from AM Depth to 15 cf Fig 3 2 Press the first digit of the new value or mi
10. 25 26 2f oafety Instructions If a product is to be permanently installed the connection between the PE terminal on site and the product s PE conductor must be made first before any other connection is made The product may be installed and connected only by a license electrician For permanently installed equipment without built in fuses circuit breakers or similar protective devices the supply circuit must be fused in such a way that suitable protection is provided for users and products Do not insert any objects into the openings in the housing that are not designed for this purpose Never pour any liquids onto or into the housing This can cause short circuits inside the product and or electric shocks fire or injuries Use suitable overvoltage protection to ensure that no overvoltage such as that caused by a thunderstorm can reach the product Otherwise the operating personnel will be endangered by electric shocks Rohde amp Schwarz products are not protected against penetration of water unless otherwise specified see also safety instruction 1 If this is not taken into account there exists the danger of electric shock for the user or damage to the product which can also lead to personal injury Never use the product under conditions in which condensation has formed or can form in or on the product e g if the product was moved from a cold to a warm environment Do not close any slots or openi
11. 6 Remote Control Description of Commands eene 6 1 e PA 6 1 COMMON GOMIMANGS acia 6 3 Le En EE 6 6 GCALiIbration System ee Eee ea 6 6 DIAGNOSTICO SO EE 6 8 DISPLAY System nase 6 10 MEMO SYSTEM nice 6 11 OUTPUCSYyS eg 6 11 SOURCE SD VSCOM EE 6 13 SE EE 6 13 SOURCE CORRECION SU SYySTE asera a di dl 6 15 SOURcE DM Subsystem R amp S SMV03 nina 6 17 SOURGEIFM SUIS St Ma 6 19 SOURCE PREQUENCY SUD SM EE 6 21 SOURCE PHASE SUDSYSICIN EE 6 24 SOURCE PM SHUDSVSUO E 6 25 SOURCE TEE 6 27 SOURCE EE 6 30 SOURCE PULSE SUBS SIM eine 6 31 SOURCE ROSCIlalOr SUDSYySUSITI EE 6 33 SOURCESTEREOSUBSYSIEN isn ee e dl 6 34 SOURCE SVV ECD SUDSVSIGlT ae ER Nessie 6 38 SOURCE2 ET E 6 41 SOURce2 FREQuency Subsystem eren nnne rna rn a la 6 41 SOURce2 SW Eep Subsystem nee en 6 43 STATUS System EE 6 45 SS LOMO Ezine 6 46 TESTO VS E 6 49 TRIGO System un TI CITUR 6 50 A a E emyneuet natant 6 52 BR un e E 6 53 1090 3123 12 6 E 6 R SOSML R amp S SMVO3 Contents 7 Remote Control Programming Examples esses 7 1 Including IEC Bus Library for QuickBAasSiC occooncccnnccccociconocccononaconnnnonanonnnanonnronnnnonanrnnanrenanennns 7 1 Initialization and Default Status case AEE eara AEAEE AASENS 7 1 JE edel ET EEN 7 1 MLAS CNS EE 7 1 Transmission of Instrument Setting Commands 0cco
12. Error code 203 211 221 222 223 224 225 226 230 240 241 255 1090 3123 12 Error text with queue poll Explanation of error Command protected The desired command could not be executed as it is protected by a password Use the command SYSTem PROTect OFF password to enable the desired command Example The command CALibrate PULSe MEASure is password protected Trigger ignored The trigger GET TRG or trigger signal was ignored because of the instrument timing control Example The instrument was not ready to answer Settings conflict The settings of two parameters are conflicting Example FM and PM cannot be switched on at the same time Data out of range The parameter value is out of the permissible range of the instrument Example The command RCL only permits entries between 0 and 50 Too much data The command contains too many data Example The instrument does not have sufficient memory space Illegal parameter value The parameter value is invalid Example An invalid text parameter is entered eg TRIGger SWEep SOURce TASTe Out of memory The available instrument memory space is exhausted Example An attempt was made to create more than 10 lists Lists not of same length The parts of a list have different lengths This error message is also displayed if only part of a list has been transmitted via the IEC IEEE bus All parts of a list have to be transmitted
13. Ext Ref 1147 7621 12 10 40 E 6 R amp S SML R S amp GSMV03 Test sequence Test sequence Settig time Test setup gt Test setup 2 performance test R amp S SML03 R amp S SMVO3 Test method See Performance test R amp S SML03 R amp S SMVO3 Vorbereiten der Messung See Performance test R amp S SML03 R amp S SMVO3 Settings on LEVEL 0 dBm R amp S SMVOS ALC TABLE VECTORMOD STATE IQCW UTILITIES REF OSC SOURCE EXTERNAL Measurement See Performance test R amp S SML03 R amp S SMVO3 The following settings are to be measured in both directions Start frequencies Target frequencies 100 MHz 250 0000001 MHz 250 MHz 1170 MHz 1900 MHz 3300 MHz Spectral purity Harmonic suppression Test setup Testsetup 1 with spectrum analyzer see Performance test R amp S SML03 R amp S SMV03 Settings on SMV VECTORMOD STATE IQCW LEVEL 8 dBm or max level according to datasheet FREQ test frequency of harmonics Test frequency of harmonics 5 MHz 76 MHz 100 MHz 151 MHz 200 MHz 255 MHz 400 MHz 605 MHz 700 MHz 900 MHz fmax 1211 MHz 1500 MHz 1700 MHz 2200 MHz 3000 MHz 3300 MHz Settings with option B3 Test frequencies harmonics gt 20 MHz Setting on spectrum analyzer Reference level pegel test level 10 dB 10 dB div Span 300 kHz resolution 30 kHz Measurement See Performance test R amp S SMLO3 R amp S SMVO3 Evaluation See Performance test R amp S SMLO3 R amp S SMVO3 1147 7621 12 1
14. R amp S SML RESOSMVO3 Level ALC Ucor AM FM OM Pulse Option SML B3 Stereo Option SML B5 Option SML B3 Freq Level LFGen System RS232 Ref Osc Security Phase Language Protect Ref Osc Calib Config Level Diag TPoint Attenuator Test Param All Mod Key Debug IF Filter Aus I O Main Loop ng STATUS e am Piar Level Preset LFGen Level FM Offset ALC Table 3 16 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 RF Frequency 4 Instrument Functions This chapter describes the functions of the instrument and its options which can be activated manually via menus or by remote control frequency and level settings analog modulations sweep and general functions not directly related to signal generation RF Frequency The RF frequency can be set directly using the FREQ key or via the Frequency menu In the Frequency menu the frequency of the RF output signal is entered and indicated under Frequency In frequency settings made with the FREQ key an arithmetic offset is taken into account Such settings are indicated in the header line of the display This makes it possible to enter the desired output frequency of subsequent units if any eg mixers The offset can also be entered in the Frequency menu see next section Frequency Offset Note Further settings Frequency sweep Sweep menu LE frequency Modulation menu LFOutput menu Int ext reference frequency
15. RF ON OFF key Press RF ON OFF key The RF output signal is switched on off IEC IEEE bus short command OUTP STAT ON MOD ON OFF key Press MOD ON OFF key Previous modulation s is switched off on The modulations have to be switched on or off in the respective modulation submenus IEC IEEE bus short command MOD STAT OFF Changing Unit of Level For the level the unit of the value set can be changed without a new value input Change level unit Activate Level parameter Press LEVEL key or set menu cursor in the level menu to the setting value of the Amplitude parameter Press the unit key with with the desired level unit The level is indicated in the desired unit 1090 3123 12 3 5 E 6 Basic Operating Steps R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Correction of Input Digits can be corrected by one of the following keys before the input is confirmed by the Enter key Key The backspace key deletes the value entered digit by digit BACK key Pressing the BACK key deletes the entire entry and results in the previous value being indicated again For a subsequent new input in the setting menu the menu cursor is to be set to the setting value again using the SELECT key For a subsequent new input via the FREQ or LEVEL keys the respective key has to be pressed again FREQ LEVEL keys In the case of a frequency or level input by means of the FREQ or LEVEL keys pressing the FREQ a
16. STANdard WIDE sz sz opor sz SOURce POWerf LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude OFFSet 100 to 100dB 628 OTE sz EECH sm ON OFF sam HsoumepusebEly Ton fen 1090 3123 12 6 54 E 6 R SOSML R amp S SMVO3 List of Commands ON OFF pen ON OFF LSOURceISTERenARIBKECODEE AIBICIDIEIF ON OFF OK BK BKK ON OFF SOURce STEReo AUDio MODE EFT RIGHt RELeft REMLeft not SCPI RNELeft ON OFF SOURce STEReo RDS TRAFfic PROGram STATe SOURce STEReo RDS TRAFfic ANNouncement STATe Fi SouRce SEL FRE Quen RUNNOg TRES Jan EIC nasser es EsoUmezrREQeno CW RT Te EE AN To Tea EsOUmezrREQenyMODE OWIFKMISWEg aa ESOURSZFREQenySTME O otro rae ir EE CTI CI 1090 3123 12 6 55 E 6 List of Commands R amp S SML R amp S SMVO03 EsoumezSWEepFREQwnogmUN nasser es EZ EN ETE A A 48 p EN preme a 38400 57600 115200 USvSTemCOMWmemeSERME S Tea SvSTemCOmMunicateSERaseiTe pe e LSvSTemCOMMacaeSERCONTGRTS ONIBFMIRER Jas USvsTemcOMWmcmeSERePACE xonon To EREECHEN SvSTemDISPlayUPDae STATe CUE fear ETE O S ESvSmmpREg ll lee System SEC ON e sems E 646 ESvsmmwERSag ll CC estoa o s ao OOO Soo restas o e ress peta ting 49 esem BEE LT Emsmow A O CCC essare OOOO A i EXCESOS EEN E UmmGpePusqwwedag JI E 8
17. 1998 A2 2001 For the assessment of electromagnetic compatibility the limits of radio interference for Class B equipment as well as the immunity to interference for operation in industry have been used as a basis Affixing the EC conformity mark as from 2001 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 D 81671 M nchen Munich 2002 05 23 Central Quality Management FS QZ Becker 1147 7509 13 CE ES Customer Support Technical support where and when you need it For quick expert help with any Rohde amp Schwarz equipment contact one of our Customer Support Centers A team of highly qualified engineers provides telephone support and will work with you to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the operation programming or applications of Rohde amp Schwarz equipment Up to date information and upgrades To keep your Rohde amp Schwarz equipment always up to date please subscribe to our electronic newsletter at http www rohde schwarz com www response nsf newsletterpreselection or request the desired information and upgrades via email from your Customer Support Center addresses see below Feedback We want to know if we are meeting your support needs If you have any comments please email us and let us know CustomerSupport Feedback rohde schwarz com USA amp Canada Monday to Friday except US public holidays 8 00 AM 8 00 PM Eastern Standard Time EST Tel from USA 888 test rsa 888
18. AND 64 gt 0 THEN PRINT User request IF VAL Esr AND 128 gt O THEN PRINT Power on RETURN REM KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK CK kk kk kk AAA AAA AAA I KH KK REM ee Error Fontaine Far brror handling PRINT ERROR Output error message STOP Stop software 1090 3123 12 1 3 E 6 R SOSML R amp S SMVO3 Maintenance 8 Maintenance The present chapter describes the measures that are necessary for maintaining storing and packing the instrument The instrument does not need a periodic maintenance What is necessary is essentially the cleaning of the outside of the instrument However it is recommended to check the rated data from time to time Storing and Packing The instrument can be stored at a temperature of 40 C to 70 C When stored for an extended period of time the instrument should be protected against dust The original packing should be used particularly the protective covers at the front and rear when the instrument is to be transported or dispatched If the original packing is no longer available use a sturdy cardboard box of suitable size and carefully wrap the instrument to protect it against mechanical damage Exchanging the Lithium Battery A lithium battery with a service life of approx 5 years serves to supply the RAM with power When the battery is discharged the data stored will be lost Exchanging the battery is described in the Service Manual 1090 3123 12 8 1 E 6
19. General R amp S SML R amp S SMVO03 Extrenal modulation sources for vector modulation For external vector modulation input connectors and Q are available at the rear panel of the SMV03 input impedances 50 Q To avoid the l Q modulator being overdriven the input voltage should never exceed d Q 0 5 V Simultaneous Modulation If vector modulation is deactivated then basically any combination of AM FM M stereo and pulse modulation is possible There are restrictions only for FM M and stereo The same is true for activated vector modulation Though then there is an additional restriction for AM Two tone AM and two tone FM M can be selected via menu Modulation AM FM M AM FM M oource Two Tone Mutual Switch Off of Modulation Types As EM OM and stereo use the same modulator they cannot be activated simultaneously They deactivate one another In a similar way the same is true for AM and vector modulation For AM the level control has to be activated while vector modulation requires the level control being deactivated Note IEC IEEE bus control according to SCPI does not allow the selection of the incompatible modulation types FM DM and stereo With remote control an error message is output when an attempt is made to activate these types of modulation see Chapter 9 MOD ON OFF Key The various types of modulation can be switched on and off directly using the MOD ON OFF key or via the Modulation
20. Note An optional key word must not be omitted if its effect is specified in greater detail by means of a numerical suffix Key words have a long form and a short form Either the long form or the short form may be entered other abbreviations are not permissible Example STATus QUEStionable ENABle 1 STAT QUES ENAB 1 Note The short form is characterized by upper case letters the long form corresponds to the complete word Upper case and lower case notation only serve the above purpose the device itself does not make any difference between upper case and lower case letters 5 7 E 6 Structure and Syntax of Device Messages R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Parameters Numerical suffix 1090 3123 12 A parameter must be separated from the header by a white space If a command includes several parameters they are separated by a comma Some queries permit the parameters MlNimum MAXimum and DEFault to be entered For a description of these parameter types see section Parameters Example SOURce POWer ATTenuation MAXimum Response 60 This query requests the maximum value for the attenuation If a device has several functions or features of the same kind eg inputs the desired function can be selected by appending a suffix to the command Entries without suffix are interpreted like entries with the suffix 1 Example SOURce2 FREQuency MODE CW This command determines the operating mode for the Frequency Subsystem
21. Press the SELECT key or the rotary knob The menu cursor is on the value for Start Frequency Vary the start value for the frequency by means of the rotary knob or enter a value using the numerical keys and the ENTER key Press the SELECT key or the rotary knob The menu cursor is on the value for Increment Frequency Vary the value of the increment by means of the rotary knob or enter a value using the numerical keys and the ENTER key Press the SELECT key or the rotary knob The menu cursor is on the value for Power Vary the start value for the power by means of the rotary knob or enter a value using the numerical keys and the ENTER key Press the SELECT key or the rotary knob The menu cursor is on the value for Increment Power Vary the value of the increment by means of the rotary knob or enter a value using the numerical keys and the ENTER key gt The cursor is on Execute Press the SELECT key or the rotary knob to execute the insertion The menu cursor goes back to Edit List Upon pressing the BACK key the editing window is exited without any change being made The menu cursor goes back to Edit List 1090 3123 12 3 9 E 6 List Editor R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Selection Insert 100 000 0000 mhz Insert At NN y 0001 Range DOCT start Frequency 100 000 0000 MHz Increment Frequency 0 1 Hz Power 0 0 de Increment Power 0 0 de Execute Back 4 Fig 3 6 Edit functio
22. R amp S SMVO3 Interfaces Interfaces IEC IEEE Bus Interface The instrument is equipped with an IEC IEEE bus interface as standard The connector to IEEE 488 is provided at the rear of the instrument A controller for remote control can be connected via the interface Connection is made using a shielded cable Characteristics of Interface e 8 bit parallel data transmission Bidirectional data transmission hree wire handshake e High data transmission rate max 350 kbyte s Upto 15 devices can be connected e Maximum length of connecting cables 15 m single connection 2 m Wired OR if several instruments are connected in parallel ATN IFC NRFD EOl DIO3 DIO1 shield SRQ NDAC DA DIO4 DIO2 NAS 7 NON logic GND GND 10 GND 8 GND 6 REN DIO7 GND 11 GND 9 GND 7 DIO8 DIO6 DIO5 Fig 5 5 Pin assignment of IEC IEEE bus interface Bus Lines 1 Data bus with 8 lines DIO 1 to DIO 8 Transmission is bit parallel and byte serial in ASCII ISO code DIO1 is the least significant bit DIO8 the most significant 1090 3123 12 9 20 E 6 Interfaces R amp S SML R amp S SMVO03 2 Control bus with 5 lines IFC Interface Clear Active LOW resets the interfaces of the instruments connected to the default setting ATN Attention Active LOW signals the transmission of interface messages Inactive HIGH signals the transmission of device messages SRQ Service Request Active LOW enables the instrument
23. 1090 3123 12 10 28 E 6 R amp S SML R S amp GSMV03 Test sequence Dynamic characteristics Rise fall time Test setup gt Test setup 5 Settings on R amp S SML LEVEL 10 dBm R amp S SMV03 FREQ 53 MHz MODULATION gt PULSE gt PULSE SOURCE PULSE GEN PULSE PERIOD 0 100 us PULSE WIDTH 0 060 us PULSE OUTPUT gt PULSE SOURCE VIDEO Settings on the oscilloscope Trigger EXT Probe 1x AC 5ns div Y 5 V div Persistence approx 1 s when possible Measurement Measure rise fall time in 10 9o 90 9o of pulse packets Video crosstalk Test setup gt Test setup 5 Settings on R amp S SML LEVEL 10 dBm R amp S SMVOS FREQ 1000 MHz ATT FIXED LEVEL 100 dBm MODULATION gt PULSE gt PULSE SOURCE PULSE GEN PULSE PERIOD 0 100 us PULSE WIDTH 0 060 us PULSE OUTPUT gt PULSE SOURCE VIDEO Settings on the oscilloscope Trigger EXT Probe 1x AC 10 ns div Y 10 mV div Persistence approx 1 s when possible Measurement Measure video Uss 1090 3123 12 10 29 E 6 Test sequence R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Stereo modulation option R amp S SML B5 Frequency response Test setup gt Settings on R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 i Setting on UPL Setting on FMB Measurement gt Test setup 6 PRESET FREQ 100MHz LEVEL 0 dBm MODULATION STEREO SOURCE LFGEN or EXT L R MODE L or MODE R GEN INSTRUMENT ANALOG Channel s 1 or 2 FUNCTION
24. 9 8 E 6 R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Structure and Syntax of Device Messages Structure of Command Lines A command line may contain one or several commands It is terminated by New Line New Line with EOI or EOI together with the last data byte QuickBASIC automatically produces EOI together with the last data byte Several commands in a command line are separated by a semicolon If the next command belongs to a different command system the semicolon is followed by a colon Example CALL IBWRT generator SOURce POWer CENTer MINimum OUTPut ATTenuation 10 This command line contains two commands The first command belongs to the SOURce system and defines the center frequency of the output signal The second command belongs to the OUTPut system and sets the attenuation of the output signal If successive commands belong to the same system and thus have one or several levels in common the command line can be abbreviated To this end the second command after the semicolon is started with the level that lies below the common levels see also Fig 5 1 The colon following the semicolon must be omitted in this case Example CALL IBWRT generators SOURCe FM MODE LOCKeg SOURCe FM INTernal FREQuency 1kHz This command line is represented in its full length and contains two commands separated from each other by the semicolon The two commands belong to the SOURce command system subsystem FM ie they have two common lev
25. Example SOUR DM IQS ON RST value is OFF SOURce DM LEAKage MAGNitude 0 to 50 0 PCT The command adjusts the residual carrier amplitude for vector modulation Example SOUR DM LEAK MAGN 5 PCT RST value is O SOURce DM QUADrature ANGLe The command changes the quadrature offset for vector modulation Example SOUR DM QUAD ANGL 4 DEG RST value is O 1090 3123 12 6 18 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 SOURce FM SOURce FM Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to control the frequency modulation and to set the parameters of the modulation signal nu M aj SOURce FM DEViation 0 kHz to 20 40 MHz Hz EXTernal COUPling AC DC INTernal FREQuency 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz Hz SOURce EXTernal INTernal DOUBle STATe ON OFF BANDwidth STANdard WIDE SOURce FM DEViation 0 kHz to 20 40 MHz The command specifies the frequency variation caused by the FM The maximum possible deviation depends on the selected frequency see Data Sheet Example SOUR FM DEV 5kHz RST value is 10 kHz SOURce FM EXTernal The commands to set the external FM input are under this node The settings under EXTernal for modulations AM and FM are independent of each other SOURce FM EXTernal COUPling AC DC The command selects the type of coupling for the external FM input AC The d c voltage content is separated from the modulation signal DC The modulation signal is not altered Example SOUR FM EXT COUP A
26. PRESET FREQ Measurement frequency LEVEL 0 dBm MODULATION STEREO Source LFGEN AF 1kHz ARI State ON ARI Identification OFF Measurement frequency 10 7MHz 66MHz 76MHz 87MHz 98MHz 110MHz DEMODULATOR FM STEREO ABSOLUTE DETECTOR PEAK 2 CHANNEL L PILOT MORE CARR 57kHz Read off the respective deviation from the FMB Check to tol 2 596 for ARI 696 Test setup 6 PRESET FREQ 98MHz LEVEL 0 dBm MODULATION STEREO Source intern LFGEN MODE L R MPX Hub 10 kHz PREEMPHASE OFF 50 us 75 us DEMODULATOR FM STEREO RELATIVE UNIT dBm DETECTOR PEAK 2 CHANNEL L Note the reference level at preemphasis OFF AF 100 Hz AF 15 kHz Preemphasis 50us Target level 13 66dB Preemphasis 75us Target level 17 07dB Check manufacture tol lt 0 5dB 10 32 E 6 R amp S SML RESOSMVOS3 Digital S P Dif interface Test setup Settings on R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Setting on FMB Setting on UPL Measurement RDS function Test setup Settings on R amp S SML R amp S SMVO03 oetting on FMB Setting on DMDC Measurement 1090 3123 12 Test sequence Test setup 6 PRESET FREQ 98MHz LEVEL 0 dBm MODULATION STEREO Source S P DIF MODE L R DEMODULATOR FM STEREO ABSOLUTE DETECTOR PEAK 2 CHANNEL L R GEN INSTRUMENT DIGITAL Channel 122 Unbal Out AUDIO OUT Sample Frequency 32kHz 44 1kHz 48kHz FUNCTION STEREO SINE Freq Mode FREQ CH1 amp 2 Volt Mode VOLT CH1 amp 2
27. RAMOS ante eun add d E LL e E 4 66 accade 1 10 Recall instrument settings scii eee ai 3 14 REF INPUIO rel PP ECT 1 10 4 59 Reference TAU OUND Ul EE 6 33 ELSIE E 4 59 Reference oscillator OCXO eese 4 59 6 33 ROmole CODltTOLs EE 6 1 basic Information Ade 5 1 1100110721110 EE 5 3 Switchover to remote control esee 5 3 REMOTE St le Eege acm e eed etes 5 3 REMOTE SYNTAX ERRORS eese enne 4 55 Reset instrument SettilTigs EE 1 4 status reporting system seen 5 24 Response ee 5 9 RF EE 4 1 EE 4 4 erte 6 28 mol me n 1 8 E EE 4 51 6 39 dQWell EE 4 52 6 39 slep WIU ee 4 52 6 40 SCHEER 1 7 3 2 3 3 RS 232 C tee 1 10 5 28 DERECHOS UCUON Stata ads 5 2 SONAS idas 5 28 transmission parameters eese 4 57 1090 3123 12 Index Sample Eco e 2 1 Sample and Hold mode 4 7 Save InstF mentselulQgs sues ect a utn eet 3 14 SCPI A AA N aa 5 6 SGOD ida 3 2 Select tee 3 8 Selection A geg 3 4 quick selection of menu 3 4 A E 4 66 6 50 SEINICOION ER 5 12 Serial number display 4 65 E ee 5 22 Service data Als DI AV see en 4 65 Service request SRQ ocooccccccccconococonononononononononononnnononos 5 22 Service request enable register SRE 5 19 Sehvice TEQUESE SRO Ense 7 4 Short form commande 5 7 wr P 5 10 Single pulse delay eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeennee 4 17 4 47
28. Span 1 MHz Reference level test level 3 dB Scale 1 dB div First measure the undistorted level as a reference To this end apply a DC voltage of 0 500 V to the and then to the Q and note down the corresponding RF levels as reference levels In the menu Vector Mod Impairment State select On and Imbalance 10 repeat the Level measurement The level should increase by the set imbalance the Q level decrease by the inverse ratio With 10 the level should increase to 1 1 times the Q level should be reduced to 0 909 times the original value corresponding to 0 83 dB 1147 7621 12 10 47 E 6 R amp S SML RESEOSMVOS Test sequence Measurement quadrature Test setup Measurement 1147 7621 12 Test setup 6 vector modulation gt Settings on R amp S SMV03 Level 0 dBm Test frequence see measurement of imbalance In the menu Vector Mod select State IQ Impairment State Off Quadrature Error 10 Generate a modulation signal using the controller and the simulation program Modulation 16QAM No coding SQR COS Filter with a 0 5 PRBSO9 data sequence Pulse width and oversampling 32 Length 100 symbols oymbolclock 10 kHz Make the corresponding settings on the demodulator Synchronize to a bit sequence satrting with the o symbol 12 bits long result lenght 80 symbols Attention The mappings of the DUT and the demodulator have to correspond Select the vector representation on the demodulator The
29. The instrument first has to be set for parallel polling by means of the QuickBASIC command IBPPC This command allocates a data line to the instrument and determines whether the response is to be inverted The parallel poll itself is executed using IBRPP The parallel poll method is mainly used in order to find out quickly after an SRQ which instrument has sent the service request if there are many instruments connected to the IEC IEEE bus To this effect the SRE and the PPE must be set to the same value A detailed example on parallel polling will be found in chapter 7 Programming Examples Query by Means of Commands Each part of every status register can be read by means of a query The queries to be used are included with the detailed description of the registers In response to a query a number is always returned which represents the bit pattern of the register queried The number is evaluated by the controller program Queries are normally used after an SRQ to obtain more detailed information on the cause of the SRQ Error Queue Query Each error state in the instrument leads to an entry in the error queue The entries to the error queue are detailed plain text error messages which can be displayed in the Error menu by manual control or queried via the IEC IEEE bus with the command SYSTem ERRor Each call of SYSTem ERRor provides one entry from the error queue If no more error messages are stored there the instrument respond
30. This operating manual provides you with all the information necessary for putting into operation manual and remote control as well as maintaining of Signal Generator R amp S SML R amp S SMVO03 and also contains specifications of the instrument and available options The following models are described in this manual R amp S SMLO1 R amp S SMLO2 R amp S SMLO3 R amp S SMVO3 9 kHz to 1 1 GHz 9 kHz to 2 2 GHz 9 kHz to 3 3 GHz 9 kHz to 3 3 GHz The contents of the chapters are as follows Data sheet Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 1090 3123 12 informs you about specifications relating to functions and characteristics of the instrument and its options contains all information about putting into operation unpacking connection to AC supply switching on and off functional testing and installation of the instrument preset settings and views of the front and rear panel showing the controls and connectors needed for operation presents a brief introduction and typical settings to users working with the R amp S SML R amp S SMVOS for the first time describes manual control of the signal generator for example calling up of menus selection and editing of parameters use of the list editor and the SAVE RECALL function This chapter also contains an overview of menus showing the functions available for the instruments and its options
31. Value range Example RDS DEV Note Description Command Query Response Value range Example R amp S SML RESOSMVOS RSwitches RDS on or off RDS x RDS X x 0l Command STEReo DIRect RDS 1 RDS is switched on Query STEReo DIRect RDS Response 1 Sets the RDS phase RDS PH xxx RDS PH XXX 000 to 359 ASCII coded decimal numbers Command STEReo DlIRect RDS PH 100 RThe RDS phase is set to 100 Query STEReo DIRect RDS PH Response 1 00 Sets the RDS frequency deviation max deviation RDS DEV xxxx RDS DEV XXXX 0000 to 1000 ASCII coded decimal numbers corresponding to O Hz to 10 00 kHz Command STEReo DIRect RDS DEV 0201 The RDS frequency deviation is set to 2 01 kHz Query STEReo DIRect RDS DEV Response 0201 A four digit value must always be set Leading zeros if any must also be specified 1090 3123 12 4 36 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Stereo Modulation Option R amp S SML B5 RT Description Command Query Response Value range Example SPS Description Command Value range Example Radio text RT XX y CCCCC CCCC RT XX Y CCCCC CCCCC xx 00 to 15 ASCII coded decimal numbers number of retransmissions of radio text message y 0 1 A B flag If the A B flag is set the A B bit in group 2A is toggled to signal that a new radio text message will be
32. a disconnecting device must be provided at the system level Never use the product if the power cable is damaged Check the power cable on a regular basis to ensure that it is in proper operating condition By taking appropriate safety measures and carefully laying the power cable ensure that the cable cannot be damaged and that no one can be hurt by e g tripping over the cable or suffering an electric shock The product may be operated only from TN TT supply networks fused with max 16 A higher fuse only after consulting with the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies Do not insert the plug into sockets that are dusty or dirty Insert the plug firmly and all the way into the socket Otherwise this can result in sparks fire and or injuries Do not overload any sockets extension cords or connector strips doing so can cause fire or electric shocks For measurements in circuits with voltages V ms gt 30 V suitable measures e g appropriate measuring equipment fusing current limiting electrical separation insulation should be taken to avoid any hazards Ensure that the connections with information technology equipment comply with IEC 950 EN 60950 Unless expressly permitted never remove the cover or any part of the housing while the product is in operation Doing so will expose circuits and components and can lead to injuries fire or damage to the product Sheet 3 19 20 21 22 23 24
33. aa S e l Q Input of external modulation signal for UO modulation Input impedance 50 Input voltage for full scale I Q 0 5V gt Cf Chapter 4 Section Vektormodulation QUICK SELECT 10 amp ROHDE amp SCHWARZ VECTOR SIGNAL GENERATOR 9 kHz 3 3 GHz SMV 03 Fig 1 1 Front panel view 1090 3123 12 1 9 E 6 Rear Panel R amp S SML R amp S SMVO03 Elements of the Rear Panel MOD lt LF lt ORE 50 00 VW MOD Relocation of MOD input for external modulation NT signals Only with option R amp S SML B19 M s LF Relocation of LF output for signals of internal LF u Fo generator Only with option R amp S SML B19 THEM RF 50 Q Relocation of output for RF signals Only with S option R amp S SML B19 e B 2 10 MHz REF 6 10 MHz REF PULSE dur GR 10 MHz REF Output of the internal 10 MHz reference signal with reference internal Input for external reference frequency 10 MHz with reference external PULSE Input for triggering the pulse generator or for direct control of the pulse modulation Only with option 2 R amp S SML B3 ae PULSE VIDEO Output of pulse generator or video output only with option R amp S SML B3 9 gt Cf Chapter 4 Section Pulse Generator 1 KO EE De 2 3 N b s MA TRIGGER T TRIGGER Input to trigger the sweep gt Cf Chapter 4 Sections Sweep Inputs 4 MEN HH ttt tit
34. e 168 Haus 28 D 12557 Berlin ROHDE amp SCHWARZ SIT GmbH Am Studio 3 D 12489 Berlin R amp S Systems GmbH Graf Zeppelin Stra e 18 D 51147 K ln GEDIS GmbH Sophienblatt 100 D 24114 Kiel HAMEG Instruments GmbH Industriestra e 6 D 63533 Mainhausen 1171 0200 42 02 00 Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 121 64 info rs rohde schwarz com Phone 49 83 31 1 08 0 49 83 31 1 08 1124 info rsmb rohde schwarz com Phone 49 99 23 8 50 0 Fax 49 99 23 8 50 174 info rsdts rohde schwarz com Phone 420 388 45 21 09 Fax 420 388 45 21 13 Phone 49 22 03 49 0 Fax 49 22 03 49 51 229 info rsdc rohde schwarz com service rsdc rohde schwarz com Phone 49 50 42 9 98 0 Fax 49 50 42 9 98 105 info bick rohde schwarz com Phone 49 30 658 91 122 Fax 49 30 655 50 221 info ftk rohde schwarz com Phone 49 30 658 84 0 Fax 49 30 658 84 183 info sit rohde schwarz com Phone 49 22 03 49 5 23 25 Fax 49 22 03 49 5 23 36 info rssys rohde schwarz com Phone 49 431 600 51 0 Fax 49 431 600 51 11 sales gedis online de Phone 49 61 82 800 0 Fax 49 61 82 800 100 info hameg de Locations Worldwide Please refer to our homepage www rohde schwarz com Sales Locations Service Locations National Websites R SOSML RESOSMVO3 General Overview of Manuals General Overview of Manuals Operating Manual for Signal Generator R amp S SML R amp S SMV03
35. n en o dentro del producto como por ejemplo cuando se desplaza el producto de un lugar fr o a un lugar caliente Por favor no cierre ninguna ranura u orificio del producto ya que estas son necesarias para la ventilaci n e impiden que el producto se caliente demasiado No pongan el producto encima de materiales blandos como por ejemplo sof s o alfombras o dentro de una caja cerrada si esta no est suficientemente ventilada No ponga el producto sobre aparatos que produzcan calor como por ejemplo radiadores o calentadores La temperatura ambiental no debe superar la temperatura m xima especificada en la hoja de datos Sheet 8 2f 28 29 30 Informaciones de seguridad Bater as y acumuladores no deben de ser expuestos a temperaturas altas o al fuego Guardar bater as y acumuladores fuera del alcance de los ni os No cortocircuitar bater as ni acumuladores Si las bater as o los acumuladores no son cambiados con la debida atenci n existir peligro de explosi n atenci n celulas de Litio Cambiar las bater as o los acumuladores solamente por los del tipo R amp S correspondiente ver lista de piezas de recambio Las bater as y acumuladores deben reutilizarse y no deben acceder a los vertederos Las bater as y acumuladores que contienen plomo mercurio o cadmio deben tratarse como residuos especiales Respete en esta relaci n las normas nacionales de evacuaci n y reciclaje Por favor tengan en cue
36. phase offset phase quadrature The RF carrier is suppressed by mixing at O Hz and the mixer makes use of the phase quadrature in order to deliver a voltage corresponding to the phase difference between the input signals This voltage is measured by the spectrum analyzer and can be converted into SSB phase noise gt Set the level of each test transmitter according to the specifications of 10 10 E 6 R amp S SML RES SMVO3 Test sequence Analysis Wideband noise Test setup Settings on R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Settings on the test receiver Measurement principle 1090 3123 12 the mixer being used gt For calibration purposes lower the level of the DUT by 40 dB and detune one test transmitter by 20 kHz Check the signal for harmonics the second and third harmonics must be more than 30 dB below the fundamental Use the analyzer to measure the reference value at 20 kHz and make a note of this value gt Cancel the detuning and set the phase quadrature Restore the level of the DUT and detune the phase offset at the auxiliary transmitter Observe the output voltage from the mixer on the oscilloscope until the voltage reaches 0 Read off the noise voltage from the analyzer normalized to 1 Hz bandwidth noise level Note the difference compared to the reference level and increase the offset found by a further 6 dB for the second sideband measured at the same time correlated and 40 dB for the level switch
37. your eyes Never try to take such products apart and never look into the laser beam Sheet 4 Informaciones de seguridad Por favor lea imprescindiblemente antes de la primera puesta en funcionamiento las siguientes Informaciones de seguridad El principio del grupo de empresas Rohde amp Schwarz consiste en tener nuestros productos siempre al d a con los estandards de seguridad y de ofrecer a nuestros clientes el m ximo grado de seguridad Nuestros productos y todos los equipos adicionales son siempre fabricados y examinados seg n las normas de seguridad vigentes Nuestra secci n de gesti n de la seguridad de calidad controla constantemente que sean cumplidas estas normas El presente producto ha sido fabricado y examinado seg n el comprobante de conformidad adjunto seg n las normas de la CE y ha salido de nuestra planta en estado impecable seg n los estandards t cnicos de seguridad Para poder preservar este estado y garantizar un funcionamiento libre de peligros el usuario deber atenerse a todas las informaciones informaciones de seguridad y notas de alerta El grupo de empresas Rohde amp Schwarz est siempre a su disposici n en caso de que tengan preguntas referentes a estas informaciones de seguridad Adem s queda en la responsabilidad del usuario utilizar el producto en la forma debida Este producto solamente fue elaborado para ser utilizado en la industria y el laboratorio o para fines de campo y de ninguna manera
38. 12 5 13 E 6 Instrument Model and Command Processing R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Command Recognition The command recognition analyzes the data from the input unit in the order the data are received Only DCL commands are serviced with priority whereas GET commands Group Execute Trigger for example are processed only after the previously received commands Each recognized command is immediately transferred to the data set but without being executed there at once oyntactic errors in commands are detected here and transferred to the status reporting system The rest of a command line following a syntax error is further analyzed and processed as far as possible If the command recognition recognizes a terminator or a DCL command it requests the data set to set the commands now also in the instrument hardware After this it is immediately ready to continue processing commands This means that new commands can be processed while the hardware is being set overlapping execution Data Set and Instrument Hardware The term instrument hardware is used here to designate the part of the instrument which actually performs the instrument functions signal generation measurement etc The controller is not included The data set is a detailed reproduction of the instrument hardware in the software IEC IEEE bus setting commands cause an alteration of the data set The data set management enters the new values eg frequency into the data s
39. 837 8772 opt 2 From outside USA 1 410 910 7800 opt 2 Fax 1 410 910 7801 E mail Customer Support rsa rohde schwarz com East Asia Monday to Friday except Singaporean public holidays 8 30 AM 6 00 PM Singapore Time SGT Tel 65 6 513 0488 Fax 65 6 846 1090 E mail Customersupport asia rohde schwarz com Rest of the World Monday to Friday except German public holidays 08 00 17 00 Central European Time CET Tel from Europe 49 0 180 512 42 42 From outside Europe 49 89 4129 13776 Fax 49 0 89 41 29 637 78 E mail CustomerSupport rohde schwarz com gt ROHDE amp SCHWARZ 1171 0200 29 01 00 Address List Headquarters Plants and Subsidiaries Headquarters ROHDE amp SCHWARZ GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstra e 15 D 81671 M nchen P 0 Box 80 14 69 D 81614 M nchen Plants ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Messger tebau GmbH Riedbachstra e 58 D 87700 Memmingen DU Box 16 52 D 87686 Memmingen ROHDE amp SCHWARZ GmbH amp Co KG Werk Teisnach Kaikenrieder Stra e 27 D 94244 Teisnach P O Box 11 49 D 94240 Teisnach ROHDE amp SCHWARZ z vod Vimperk s r o Location Spidrova 49 CZ 38501 Vimperk ROHDE amp SCHWARZ GmbH A Co KG Dienstleistungszentrum Koln Graf Zeppelin Stra e 18 D 51147 K ln P 0 Box 98 02 60 D 51130 K ln Subsidiaries R amp S BICK Mobilfunk GmbH Fritz Hahne Str 7 D 31848 Bad M nder P 0 Box 20 02 D 31844 Bad M nder ROHDE amp SCHWARZ FTK GmbH Wendenschlo stra
40. ANN AMPL ON Clear Memory Clearing of all stored data such as stored settings and user correction settings IEC IEEE bus command SYSTESEC OFF Indication of IEC IEEE Bus Language System Language The Utilities System Language submenu indicates the IEC IEEE bus language and the current SCPI version 1090 3123 12 4 58 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Utilities Internal External Reference Frequency RefOsc In the internal reference mode the internal reference signal with a frequency of 10 MHz is available at the 10 MHz REF socket on the rear of the instrument Signal level Vrms sine gt 0 5 V at 50 Q In the external reference mode an external signal with a frequency of 10 MHz to 50 Hz is to be fed to the 10 MHz socket The external reference mode can be selected in the Utilities RefOsc menu Signal level Vrms 0 5 V to 2 V Settings for the reference frequency can be made in the RefOsc menu Menu selection Utilities RefOsc 100 0000000 10 0 dem AF On Source Internal Frequency Adjustment Adjustment State Frequency Adjustment Calibration Data Back 4 Fig 4 28 Utilities RefOsc menu preset setting Source Selection of operating mode Int Internal reference mode Ext External reference mode IEC IEEE bus command SOUR ROSC SOUR INT Adjustment State Off Tuning value of internal reference frequency as calibrated see Utilities Calib menu On Tuning value corre
41. An eight digit value must always be set Blank spaces if any must also be entered otherwise the value will not be accepted 1090 3123 12 4 34 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 PTY Note PTYN Note Description Command Query Response Value range Example Stereo Modulation Option R amp S SML B5 Sets or reads the program type PTY PTY xx PTY XX 00 to 31 ASCII coded decimal numbers Command STEReo DlRect PTY 08 Sets the program type to be transmitted to 08 Query STEReo DlRect PTY Response 08 A two digit value must always be set A leading zero if any must also be specified Description Command Query Response Value range Example Sets or reads the program type PTY name PT YN XXXXXXXX PTYN XXXXXXXX 8 ASCII Zeichen Command STEReo DIRect PTYN Football Sets the program type name to be transmitted to Football STEReo DIRect GS 0A 10A Group 10A is activated in addition to group OA The program type name Football is now transmitted Query STEReo DlRect PTYN Response Football An eight digit value must always be set Blank spaces if any must also be entered otherwise the value will not be accepted 1090 3123 12 4 35 E 6 Stereo Modulation Option R amp S SML B5 RDS Description Command Query Response Value range Example RDS PH Description Command Query Response
42. As to specified range cf POW Example SOUR POW STAR 20 RST value is 30 dBm SOURce POWer STOP 140 dBm to Pmax 29 dBm with R amp S SML B10 The command sets the final value for a level sweep STOP may be smaller than STARt As to specified range cf POW Example SOUR POW STOP 3 RST value is 10dBm SOURce POWer STEP INCRement 0 1 to 10 dB The command sets the step width with the level setting if UP and DOWN are used as level values The command is coupled to Knob Step in the manual control i e it also specifies the step width of the shaft encoder Only dB is permissible as a unit here the linear units V W etc are not permitted Example SOUR POW STEP INCR 2 RST value is 1dB 1090 3123 12 6 29 E 6 SOURce PULM R amp S SML RESOSMVOS SOURce PULM Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to control the pulse modulation Option R amp S SML B3 and to set the parameters of the modulation signal The internal pulse generator is set in the SOURce PULSe subsystem nu M Meme SOURce PULM Option R amp S SML B3 EXTernal POLarity NORMal INVerse SOURce INTernal EXTernal STATe ON OFF SOURce PULM EXTernal The commands to control the input socket for the external pulse generator are under this node SOURce PULM POLarity NORMal INVerse The command specifies the polarity between modulating and modulated signal NORMal The RF signal is suppressed during th
43. E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Stereo Modulation Option R amp S SML B5 gt Set the group sequence e g STEReo DlRect GS 0A 14A Group 14A with variants O to 3 is now transmitted gt Create a new AF list for the EON using method A STEReo DIRect eon afaz1234 N 87 6 87 7 87 8 Create further AF lists for the EON using method A STEReo DIRect EON AFA 1234 88 6 88 7 88 8 Read the first AF list of the EON with STEReo DIRect eon afa 1234 1 Note Do not combine methods A and B for generating EON alternative frequency lists Create a new AF list for the EON using method B STEReo DIRect EON AFB 1234 N 87 6 87 7 87 8 87 6 tuned frequency 87 7 mapped frequency 1 variant 5 87 8 mapped frequency 2 variant 6 A maximum of five AF lists can be generated For type A lists max 25 frequencies per list can be specified for type B lists max five frequencies per list Free Format Groups FFGs In the user definable groups 1A 3A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A and 13A any desired data can be transmitted Five bits of this data are transmitted in block B and 16 bits each in blocks C and D of the specified group 1 Define the data to be transmitted in group 1A STEReo DIRect 1A 05 0000000000 1FFFFFFFFF Group 1A is now transmitted first with 0000000000 and then with 1FFFFFFFFF Each of the two data sequences is retransmitted five times which is indicated by the information 05 2 Se
44. FREQ ON can only be executed if SYST SEC is set to OFF Example DISP ANN FREQ ON With SYST SEC OFF RST value is ON 1090 3123 12 6 10 E 6 R amp S SML RESOSMVOS MEMory OUTPut MEMory System This system contains the commands for the memory management of the R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 M inii ae wm MEMory NSTates Query only MEMory NSTates The command returns the number of SAV RCL memories available The R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 has 50 SAV RCL memories in total Example MEM NST Response 50 OUTPut System This system contains the commands specifying the characteristics of the RF LF and Pulse output sockets The following numbers are assigned to these outputs OUTPut1 RF output OUTPut2 LF output OUTPut3 PULSE VIDEO output ee TT Me we OUTPut1 2 3 AFIXed RANGe LOW AMODe AUTO FlXed POLarity PULSe NORMal INVerted SOURce OFF PULSegen VIDeo STATe OFF ON PON OFF UNCHanged VOLTage 0 V 4 V V OUTPut1 AFIXed RANGe LOW The command returns the only querable lower value of the non interrupting level range in Attenuator Mode Fixed Example OUTP AFIX RANG LOW OUTPut1 AMODe AUTO FlXed The command switches over the operating mode of the attenuator Attenuator MODe at the RF output output AUTO Normal setting The electronically switched attenuator switches in steps of 5 dB at fixed points Fixed Level settings are made witho
45. Freq Ch 1 1kHz Freq Ch 2 0 5kHz Volt Ch 1 0 707 FS Volt Ch 2 0 707 FS On the FMB check the set AF and read off the MPX deviation for the audio signal Check the tol 2 5 Test setup 6 PRESET FREQ 98MHz LEVEL 0 dBm MODULATION STEREO Source LFGEN AF 1kHz ARI State ON RDS State ON DEMODULATOR FM STEREO CHANNEL MPX RDS Inf1 PI PS RDS Inf1 CT PIN Use the process controller to write data for Pl PS TP TA PTY DI MS CT to data sets DS1 to DS5 One at a time set ARI identification OFF DK BK DK BK ranges A to F and check them on the RDS decoder One at a time select RDS dataset 1 to 5 and check the output on the RDS decoder Check the time output CT on the RDS decoder 10 33 E 6 Performance test R amp S SML R amp S SMVO03 Performance test report Table 10 4 Performance test report ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Performance Test Report Signal Generator R amp S SML R amp S SMV03 Stock number 1090 3000 Model R amp S SMLO1 Serial number Tested by Date Signature Cross Min value Actual value Max value Measurement reference tolerance Display and keyboard Page 10 6 Frequency Frequency setting Page 10 6 Tested Setting time Page 10 6 10 Reference frequency Page 10 8 internal deviation External deviation Page 10 8 Spectral purity Harmonics at level Page 10 9 As data sheet lt 10dBm Spurious suppression Page 10 9 ratio CW df gt 10 kHz SSB phase noise Page 1 GHz in
46. IEEE bus command SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 28 1090 3123 12 4 56 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Utilities Parameters of RS 232 C Interface System RS232 Settings for the configuration of the RS 232 C interface can be made in the Utilities System RS232 submenu The pin assignment of the interface corresponds to that of a PC Menu selection Utilities System RS232 100 000 0000 10 0 dem Utilities System ASZ232 RFOn 3600 bps Data Format amp bit Parity None Stop Bit 1 Bit Handshake RtsiCts Back 4 Fig 4 26 Utilities System RS232 menu Baud Rate Selection of transmission rate IEC IEEE bus command SYST COMM SER BAUD 9600 Data Format Indication of number of data bits This value can be set to 7 or 8 Parity oetting of parity This setting defines the transmission mode for the parity bit for error protection The following modes are available Odd odd parity Even even parity None no parity IEC IEEE bus command SYST COMM SER PAR ODD Stop Bit Indication of number of stop bits This value can be set to 1 or 2 Handshake Selection of handshake None No handshake IEC IEEE bus command SYST COMM SER PACE NONE SrolsGOMMSeSERSCONTSRTS ON RTS CTS Hardware handshake via interface lines RTS and CTS This setting is to be preferred to the XON XOFF setting if the host computer permits it IEC IEEE bus command SYST COMM SER CONT RTS RFR XON XOFF Software handshake via ASCII codes 11h
47. IF Filter Main Loop Mult Filter Harm Filter Level Preset LFGen Level FM Offset ALC Table Back y Fig 4 31 Utilities Calib menu preset setting seven internal calibration routines are run on the main board The evaluated calibration values are stored on the module and if secured by Lock Level must be measured only when the unit is put into operation for the first time or circuit components are to be repaired To enable the calibrations switch off Lock Level 1 in the Utilities Protect menu see section Passwords for Accessing Protected Functions Protect and enter password 123456 If calibrations are to be performed the unit is to be warmed up to its normal operating temperature If a cold unit is calibrated when putting the unit into operation the calibration has to be repeated with the unit at operating temperature Calibrations should be performed in the order indicated in Table 4 1 This is done automatically by the All function in the Calibrate menu Table 4 1 Overview of internal calibration routines Calibration Lock Module Level component All All internal calibrations are performed one after the other in the given order IF Filter Calibration of IF bandpass filter 1 Mainboard Calibration of IF gain synthesizer Main Loop Calibration of VCO preset voltage Calibration of main loop gain Mainboard synthesizer Mainboard output section Level Preset Calibration of operating point of AM modulator Mainboard output
48. In the case of a query the short form of the text is returned Example Setting command OUTPut FILTer TYPE EXTernal Query QUTPUtiFILTer TYPE Response EXT 9 10 E 6 R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Structure and Syntax of Device Messages Strings Strings must always be entered in inverted commas or Example SYSTem LANGuage SCPI or SYSTem LANGuage SCPI Block data Block data are a transmission format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data A command with a block data parameter has the following structure Example HEADer HEADer 45168xxxxxxxx The data block is preceded by the ASCII character The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the four following digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes This is followed by the data bytes During the transmission of the data bytes all End or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted Data elements comprising more than one byte are transmitted with the byte being the first which was specified by the SCPI command FoRMat BORDer The format of the binary data within a block depends on the IEC IEEE bus command The commands SOURCe CORRection CSET DATA FREQuency gt SOURce CORRection CSET DATA POWer SYSTem MSEQuence DWEL1 SYSTem MSEQuence RCL use the IEEE 754 format for double precision floating point numbers Each number is represented by
49. Lin or Step Log is displayed IEC IEEE bus command SOUR SWE STEP LIN 1MHz Input value of dwell time per step IEC IEEE bus command SOUR SWE DWEL 15ms Selection of sweep mode See section Operating Modes IEC IEEE bus commands SOUR FREQ MODE SWE SOUR SWE MODE AUTO TRIG SOUR SING Resets the start frequency IEC IEEE bus command ABOR otarts a single sweep This function is displayed and is effective only if Single Mode is selected IEC IEEE bus command TRIG 4 52 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Sweep Level Sweep Settings for level sweeps can be made in the Sweep Level menu Menu selection Sweep Level 100 000 0000 mhz 10 0 dem Sweep Level Start Level 30 0 dBm Stop Level 10 0 dBm Curent Level 10 0 dBm 1 0 dB 19 0 ms Off Reset Sweep Back A Fig 4 20 Sweep Level menu Start Level Input value of start level IEC IEEE bus command SOUR POW STAR 30dBm Stop Level Input value of stop level IEC IEEE bus command SOUR POW STOP 10dBm Current Level Display of current level In Step mode Input value of level Step Input value of step width IEC IEEE bus command SOUR SWE POW STEP 1dB Dwell Input value of dwell time per step IEC IEEE bus command SOUR SWE POW DWEL 15ms Mode Selection of sweep mode see Operating Modes IEC IEEE bus command SOUR POW MODE SWE SOUR SWE POW MODE AUTO TRIG SOUR SING Reset Sweep Sets the start level IEC IEE
50. MOD ON OFF key if effective for only one type of modulation gt The status on off of the selected modulation type will change at each keypress Function of MOD ON OFF key if effective for all types of modulation All gt If atleast one type of modulation is switched on pressing of the MOD ON OFF key will switch off the modulation s The modulation types previously active are stored If switch on is made with the MOD ON OFF key the modulation sources set in the modulation menus are used The modulation types to be switched on or off with the MOD ON OFF key can be selected in the Utilities ModKey menu Menu selection Utilities ModKey Fig 4 36 Utilities ModKey menu preset setting Modulation oelection of modulation type s for which the MOD ON OFF key is to be effective Note Preset switches off all modulations sets this parameter to All and stores AM 30 as default setting 1090 3123 12 4 67 E 6 Utilities R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Setting the Sweep Blank Time Settings for the Sweep Blank Time can be made in the Utilities AuxIO menu Menu selection Utilities AuxlO 100 000 0000 MHz 1 0 0 dem Utilities Aus l Sweep Blank Time p form Back 4 ie Fig 4 37 X Utilities AuxlO menu Sweep Blank Time Selection of blank duration Norm The blank duration is set to the shortest possible time Long The blank duration is set to approx 500 ms IEC IEEE bus command SOUR
51. No error is returned The command is identical to STAT QUE NEXT Example SYST ERR Answer 221 Settings conflict 1090 3123 12 6 47 E 6 SYSTem R amp S SML RESOSMVOS SYSTem PRESet The command triggers an instrument reset It has the same effect as the PRESET key of the manual control or as command RST This command triggers an event and hence has no RST value Note By means of the Preset RF State item in the Level Level menu it is possible to determine the switching state of the RF connector The selected state is activated when the SYST PRES command is sent If Preset RF State OFF the command has the same effect as RST Example SYST PRES SYSTem PROTect 1 2 3 4 The command to disable certain instrument functions is under this node A list of the functions concerned can be found in the manual control Chapter 4 Section Password Input With Protected Functions There are four protection levels which are distinguished by means of a suffix after PROT RST has no effects on the disabling enabling of the instrument functions SYSTem PROTect 1 2 3 4 STATe ON OFF Password The command switches a protection level on or off The passwords are 6 digit numbers They are fixedly stored in the firmware The password for the first level is 123456 ON disables the functions belonging to this protection level A password doesn t have to be entered OFF deactivates the disabling again if the correct passwor
52. PI 1000 Creates a new EON with PI 1000 Query STEReo DIRect EON PI Response 1000 A four digit value must always be set Leading zeros if any must also be specified A maximum of eight EONS can be created EON PS Description Command Query Response Value range Example Enhanced Other Networks sets the program service PS name for the EON with Pl yyyy EON PSzyyyy XXXXXXXX EON PS yyyy XXXXXXXX xxxxxxxx 7 8 ASCII characters yyyy 0000 to FFFF ASCII coded hexadecimal numbers Command STEReo DIRect EON PS 1000 Test 123 Sets the program service name for the EON with PI 1000 to Test 123 Query STEReo DIRect EON PS 1000 Reads the program service name of the EON with PI 1000 Response Test 123 An eight digit value must always be set Blank spaces if any must also be entered otherwise the value will not be accepted 1090 3123 12 4 27 E 6 Stereo Modulation Option R amp S SML B5 EON PTY Description Command Query Response Value range Example EON TA Description Command Query Response Value range yyyy Example 1090 3123 12 R amp S SML RESOSMVOS Enhanced Other Networks sets the program type PTY for the EON with Pl yyyy EON PT Y yyyy xx EON PTY yyyy XX 00 to 31 ASCII coded decimal numbers yyyy 0000 to FFFF ASCII coded hexadecimal numbers Command STEReo DIRect EON PTY 1000 10 Set
53. Protect Calibration and service functions are password protected To access these functions passwords 6 digit numbers have to be entered and confirmed with the ENTER key These functions are automatically locked out on power up of the instrument Password 1 deactivates the lock for the calibration of Main Loop Level Preset LFGen Level Leve IF Filter Harm Filter Mult Filterl Password 2 deactivates the lock for the calibration of RefOsc Password 3 factory internal Password 4 factory internal Access to protected functions is possible in the Utilities Protect menu Menu selection Utilities Protect 100 000 000 0 mHz Utilities Protect rFFOn Lock Level Z Lock Level 3 Lock Level 4 Back d Fig 4 30 X Utilities Protect menu preset setting Lock Level x Activation deactivation of lock On The lock is active IEC IEEE bus command SYST PROT1 ON Off The entry of the password is enabled automatically After entering the password a pop up menu is displayed The lock can be deactivated by selection Off IEC IEEE bus command SYST PROT1 OFF 123456 1090 3123 12 4 61 E 6 Utilities R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Calibration Calib The Utilities Calib menu offers access to calibration routines and correction values for the purpose of servicing Menu selection Utilities Calib 100 0000000 10 0 dem Utilities Calib RFO Ref Use Level Attenuator Internal Calibrations All
54. R amp S Order No 1065 6000 30 Suitable unit Contained in item 2 or 10 R amp S FSEA30 R amp S SME03 SMHU R amp S NRVS with 1020 1809 02 R amp S NRV Z51 0857 9004 02 R amp S RSP 0831 3515 02 1038 6002 03 0835 0011 52 10 38 Use measurement Frequency accuracy Settling time level accuracy Output reflection coefficient Harmonics Spurious Pulse modulation output reflection coefficient SSB phase noise Broadband noise SSB phase noise Pulse modulation SSB phase noise Level accuracy Non interrupting level setting Level accuracy Controller IEC 625 1 interface p Settling time E 6 R SOSML R amp S SMVO03 Performance test Instrument type Recommended Suitable unit R amp S Order Use measurement characteristics No SWR bridge 1 MHz to 3300 MHz R amp S ZRC 1039 9492 55 1 Output reflection Directivity gt 40 dB 039 9492 52 coefficient Modulation analyzer 100 kHz to 3300 MHz AM FM R amp S FMB with 856 5005 52 Residual FM PhiM stereo coder stereo option Residual AM decoder distortion meter R amp S FMA B1 855 2002 52 AM FM PhiM modulation weighting filter ITU R ITU T R amp S FMA B2 855 0000 52 LF generator R amp S FMA B3 856 0003 52 Stereo modulation R amp S FMA B4 855 6008 52 Sinewave generator 10 Hz to 500 kHz R amp S ADS 1012 4002 02 AM FM PhiM modulation 8 V Voeak R amp S AFG 0377 2100 02 Overvoltage protection ul AC DC voltmeter DC to 1 MHz R amp S URE3 350 53
55. R amp S SMVO3 100 MHz LEVEL 140 dBm Settings on the sinewave FREQ generator 20 kHz Output impedance 50 Ohm Level 1V Level offset 5 V Measurement Increase the output level of the sinewave generator to a maximum of 10 V EMF gt The overvoltage protection must respond to a voltage offset EMF 2 3 7 V and 7 5 V for both polarities Internal modulation generator Note The setting time refers purely to computer time and therefore does not need to be measured Level accuracy Measuring equipment AC voltmeter table Measuring Equipment and Accessories item 10 Test setup gt Connect AC voltmeter to LF connector of R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Settings on R amp S SML LF OUTPUT STATE ON R amp S SMVOS LF OUTPUT LFGen 1 kHz LF OUTPUT VOLTAGE 1 mV 10 mV 100 mV 1V 4V Measurement Measure output level Frequency response Measuring equipment AC voltmeter table Measuring Equipment and Accessories item 10 Test setup gt Connect AC voltmeter to LF connector of R amp S SML R amp S SMVO03 Settings on R amp S SML LF OUTPUT STATE ON R amp S SMV03 LF OUTPUT VOLTAGE 1V 4V LF OUTPUT LFGen 10 Hz to 500 kHz 5 reference values decade Measurement gt Measure the frequency response The frequency response is the difference between the highest and lowest level 1090 3123 12 10 18 E 6 R amp S SML RESOSMVOS3 Test sequence Frequency accuracy and total harmonic
56. RDS DAT DS5 RST value is DS1 SOURce STEReo RDS DEViation Oto 10 KHz Setting value of the frequency deviation of the RDS subcarrier Example SOURSSTER RDS 5 kHz RST value is 2 kHz SOURce STEReo RDS STATe ON OFF Switching on off RDS function Example SOUR STER RDS STAT ON RST value is OFF SOURce STEReo RDS TRAFfic PROGram STATe ON OFF owitchung on ofF traffic program Example SOUR STER RDS TRAF PROG STAT ON RST value is OFF SOURce STEReo RDS TRAFfic ANNouncement STATe ON OFF Switching on off traffic announcement Example SOUR STER RDS TRAF ANN ON RST value is OFF SOURce STEReo SOURce LREXt SPEXt LFGen Selection of the modulation sources for stereo modulation the modulation sources cannot be used simultaneously LREXt Activates the L and R inputs for external analog modulation signals SPEXt Activates the S P DIF input for the external digital modulation signal LFGen The modulation signal is generated by the internal LF generator Example SOUR STER SOUR LFGEN RST value is LREX SOURce STEReo STATe ON OFF owitching on off stereo modulation Example SOUR STER STAT ON RST value is OFF 1090 3123 12 6 37 E 6 SOURce SWEep R amp S SML RESOSMVOS SOURce SWEep Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to control the RF sweep e sweeps of the RF generators Sweeps are triggered on principle The frequency sweep is activated by command SOUR FREQ MODE SWE the
57. S SMLO1 Settings on the R amp S SML02 03 R amp S SMVO3 S oettings on the test receiver Measurement R amp S SML RESEOSMVOS Test setup 1 demodulator mode LEVEL 0 dBm FREQ 10 MHz 75 MHz 100 MHz 300 MHz 500 MHz 800 MHz 1100 MHz MODULATION gt FM gt FM DEVIATION 40 kHz FM SOURCE LFGen LFGenFreq 1 kHz LEVEL 0 dBm FREQ in addition to R amp S SMLO1 test frequencies 1211 MHz 1500 MHz 1818 MHz 2200 MHz 3300 MHz MODULATION gt FM gt FM DEVIATION 40 kHz FM SOURCE LFGen LFGenFreq 1 kHz Demodulation AM Detector RMS Filter 20 Hz to 23 kHz for the moment measurement must still be carried out with 50 Hz 100 kHz since filters are not yet implemented Set test frequencies on the R amp S SML R amp S SMVO03 and read off the AM spurious deviation from the test receiver Carrier frequency deviation in FMDC Test setup oettings on R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Settings on the test receiver Measurement gt Test setup 1 spectrum analyzer mode UTILITIES CALIB gt FM OFFSET UTILITIES REF OSC SOURCE EXTERN LEVEL 0 dBm FREQ 1000 MHz MODULATION MODE FM int FM ext AC FM ext DC FM two tone FM SOURCE LFGen LFGenFreq 1 kHz FM DEVIATION 500 kHz Center frequency FREQ R amp S SML Span 1kHz Set the specified FM modes one by one and use Marker Peak to determine the frequency The difference compared to the set RF frequency
58. S SML RESEOSMVOS Performance test extension for R amp S SMV03 Preliminary remark e The rated characteristics of the signal generator are checked after a warm up time of at least 30 minutes A recalibration of the unit is not required FM offset calibration is an exception however e A defined default state is set prior to each measurement by pressing the PRESET key e he values stated hereafter are not guaranteed values Only the data sheet specifications shall be binding e he values specified in the data sheet are guaranteed limits The tolerances of the instruments used in the performance test must be added to the limits because of their measurement uncertainty Measuring equipment and accessorie Table 10 5 Measuring equipment and accessories Instrument type Frequency counter RF spectrum analyzer Signal generator with high spectral purity Storage oscilloscope Phase noise test set RF power meter Precision attenuators 1147 7621 12 Recommended characteristics Frequency range up to 3300 MHz Internal reference 10 MHz Frequency range up to 3300 MHz Phase noise at 1 GHz typ lt 128 dBc Hz at 20 kHz DC 100 MHz 0 1V div Mixer 10 MHz to 3300 MHz Lowpass filter approx 500 kHz Preamplifier with gain of approx 30 dB input noise 2 nV 1 Hz DC decoupling after mixer for oscilloscope 9 kHz to 3300 MHz Frequency range 9 kHz to 3300 MHz Attenuation O to 125 dB 12500
59. S SML R amp S SMVO3 To calculate the VSWR use the formula VSWR Umax Umin containing the maximum and minimum voltages Passive measurement of the VSWR for R amp S SML R amp S SMV03 output levels below 25 dBm oettings on R amp S SML FREQ far from the measurement frequency gt 10 MHz R amp S SMVO3 9 MHz 50 MHz 200 MHz 350 MHz every 20 MHz to 1100 MHz or 2200 MHz 3300 MHz R amp S SML02 03 LEVEL 30 dBm Settings on the second test Frequency FREQ R amp S SML transmitter Level 10 dBm Measurement gt Unscrew the VSWR bridge from the DUT and note the level measured on the analyzer as the reference value gt Screw the bridge or directional coupler back on again and determine the new level on the analyzer The voltage ratio test level reference level is the output reflection coefficient r of the DUT gt Use the formula VSWR 1 r 1 r to determine the standing wave ratio VSWR 1090 3123 12 10 15 E 6 Test sequence R amp S SML RESOSMVOS Setting time Test setup gt Test setup 2 spectrum analyzer mode Measurement principle The test receiver is operated in spectrum analyzer mode as a fast level measuring instrument with a O Hz span process controller transmits the start level and target level via the IEC IEEE bus The spectrum analyzer is triggered by the positive edge on the EOI line of the IEC IEEE bus If the process controller then switches from the start level to the
60. SOUR2 FREQ MAN 1kHz RST value is 1 kHz 1090 3123 12 6 41 E 6 SOURce2 FREQuency R amp S SML RESOSMVOS SOURce2 FREQuency MODE CW FlXed SWEep The command specifies the operating mode and hence by means of which commands the FREQuency subsystem is controlled The following allocations are valid CW FlXed CW and FlXed are synonyms The output frequency is specified by means of SOUR2 FREQ CW FIX SWEep The generator operates in the SWEep mode The frequency is specified by means of commands SOUR2 FREO STAR STOP MAN Example SOUR2 FREQ MODE CW RST value is FIX SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency RUNNing The command set a queries whether a sweep is being performed Example SOUR SWE FREQ BUNN Note This query may cause distortions in the course of the sweep depending on the frequency of checkimng and dwell time SOURce2 FREQuency STARt 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz This command defines the starting value of the frequency for the sweep Example SOUR2 FREQ STAR 1kHz RST value is 1 kHz SOURce2 FREQuency STOP 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz This command defines the end value of the frequency for the sweep Example SOUR2 FREQ STOP 200kHz RST value is 100 kHz 1090 3123 12 6 42 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 SOURce2 SWEep SOURce2 SWEep Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to control the LF sweep of SOURce2 LF Sweeps are activated by command SOUR2 MODE SWE Sweeps are triggered on principle nu m Zi SOURc
61. Software version ee 4 65 6 9 Source impedance RF output sss 4 10 Span FRE el Nm 4 52 6 22 ER Ee 6 2 et DracKels E 34 SRE service request enable register 5 19 SRQ Service request sees 5 22 Start frequency EF SWOOD 4 54 6 43 RF SWOOD Seeerei 4 52 6 22 Status REMOTE isa tas oe 5 3 Status line display saseta n ae 3 1 STATUS Page ta eee 4 69 Status registers a A cue eet eque 5 19 OVEIMIOW I MH 5 18 Status reporting system 5 16 TOSOEVAMMES 2 1 ocu de 5 24 structure of an SCPI status register 5 16 Pile 5 22 SEB SAUS Dy eu see i ore n eed 5 19 Step size TOlaly RHOD ee 4 1 4 5 Step width level sweep esee einen nennen nnne 4 53 6 41 EF SWCD m 4 54 6 45 e WE 6 22 Stop Dit RS 232 C erret dee 4 57 5 29 6 47 Stop frequency ERSWERDE EE 4 54 6 43 ISI SWOOD EE 4 52 6 22 Store instrument Sells sic he OR etu 3 14 Mensa ns een fons Severe eden ce desea 3 4 SION S So Re emer ter tare E Be 8 1 Ue E 5 11 Structure COMMand EE 5 6 CODIGO Eet 5 9 WUDIOULNOS 2 a iii 7 5 A ee 5 17 Summary of ien 3 15 3 16 E 6 Index Suppression INACIO een 4 58 Sweep A 4 51 level Sweep Areale 4 53 6 27 EFSWEED EEN 4 54 6 44 operating gheet EE 4 50 Ee ate 4 51 6 22 6 39 eerst 6 51 Synchronization IEC IEEE bus sss 5
62. Utilities Ref Osc menu Menu selection Frequency 100 0000000 ul 10 0 dem Frequency Frequency 100 0000000 MHz Offset 0 0 Hz Extended Divider Range CO b Step User 1 0000000 MHz b Step Decimal clude from Recall Off k y Fig 4 1 Frequency menu Frequency Input value of RF frequency at RF output connector IEC IEEE bus command SOUR FREQ 100E6 Offset Input value of frequency offset for example of subsequent mixer IEC IEEE bus command SOUR FREQ OFFS 0 Extended Divider Off Normal operation The extended divider range is deactivated Range IEC Bus Befehl SOUR FREQ ERAN OFF On The extended divider range is activated IEC IEEE bus command SOUR FREQ ERAN ON Knob Step User Input value of step size of frequency variation via rotary knob The RF frequency is varied by the entered step size if Knob Step is set to User IEC IEEE bus command SOUR FREQ STEP 1MHz 1090 3123 12 4 1 E 6 RF Frequency R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Knob Step Decimal The variation step size corresponds to the position of the digit cursor User User defined the variation step size is as entered under Knob Step User Exclude from Recall Off Normal setting The stored frequency is loaded too when instrument settings are loaded with the RCL key IEC IEEE bus command SOUR FREO RCL INCL On The stored frequency is not loaded when instrument settings are loaded ie the current frequency setting is maintained IEC IEEE bus com
63. and Accessories item 4 VSWR bridge table Measuring Equipment and Accessories item 6 Test setup 10 MHz reference Test transmitter l Bridge Source Refl Test Test port out receiver Note The test port of the bridge must be screwed directly to the device under test The INPUT of the directional coupler is screwed to the DUT The second test transmitter is connected to the line connector and the analyzer to the coupling output 13 dB of the directional coupler 1090 3123 12 10 4 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Test setup for setting time Test setup for pulse modulator option R amp S SML B3 Test setup 5 Measuring Storage oscilloscope equipment table Measuring Equipment and Accessories item 2 Test setup Ext trigger Oscilloscope Note Since the input of the oscilloscope is high impedance the BNC connection to the oscilloscope must be terminated into 50 Ohm via a T piece Test setup for stereo coder option R amp S SML B5 Test setup 6 Measuring Modulation analyzer equipment table Measuring Equipment and Accessories item 12 Audio analyzer table Measuring Equipment and Accessories item 13 RDS decoder table Measuring Equipment and Accessories item 14 Test setup Process controller EMEEE bus Analog Gen out 1 2 Digital Gen out Audio anal
64. as to whether the RDS data stream is linked to an error mask MODE Description oets one of various transmit modes Command MODE x Query MODE Response X Value range 1 2 3 4 5 1 L signal in left channel only 2 R signal in right channel only 3 7 signal of equal frequency and phase in left and right channel 4 signal of equal frequency and opposite phase in left and right channel 5 different independent signals in left and right channel 5 is not possible if the internal LF generator is selected as source SRC LFGen Example Command STEReo DIRect MODE 1 Only the signal of the left channel is transmitted Query STEReo DIRect MODE Response 1 4 31 E 6 Stereo Modulation Option R amp S SML B5 MS Description Command Query Response Value range Example MPX DEV Note Pl Note Description Command Query Response Value range Example R amp S SML RESOSMVOS Sets or reads the music speech flag The flag signals whether music or speech is being transmitted MS x MS X MIS Command STEReo DIRect MS M The music speech flag is set to M This signals that music is currently transmitted Query STEReo DIRect MS Response M Sets the MPX frequency deviation max deviation MPX DEV xxxxx MPX DEV XXXXX 00000 to 10000 ASCII coded decimal numbers corresponding to O Hz to 100 kHz Command STEReo DIRect MPX DEV 0020
65. assignment of IEC IEEE bus interface cecccceceeseeeceeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeaes 5 25 Pin assignment of RS 232 C Interface eene nnne nnns 5 28 Wiring of data control and signalling lines for hardware handshake 5 30 ERROR De a mt oan 9 1 11 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Index A Abort actions triggered eese 6 6 ae dE e E 4 18 4 48 6 5 Address Te 5 3 6 47 Addressed eeleren e GE 5 27 AM COUPIO A EE 4 14 6 14 ee EEN 4 14 6 14 Amplitude modulation AM suus 4 14 6 13 ASIOHSK een 912 ee ERE 4 5 6 11 B Bandwidth p mL 4 15 6 20 PM ER RETE Em 4 16 6 26 Battery PENGUINS sorres CNN T RR 1 4 8 1 TOS RAM Listes eisen 4 66 Baud rate RS 232 C uss 4 57 5 29 6 48 Blank signal GUFA TO re ea aE me ee 4 68 Block data oin EO RE 5 11 Boolean parameters itle a um xd 5 9 5 10 Brief instructions lECHEBE e e ade 5 1 RS 232 C IO e 5 2 C ele EEN 4 62 6 6 A avast A O menue 6 49 Pass WON EE 4 61 6 49 Call instrument settings Auen 3 14 EE ebe 3 4 Center frequency RE SWOOD statu ba saut dco idt oec 4 52 6 21 Gharacter data EE 5 9 Cleaning WU 8 1 Clear all STOT COANE EE 4 58 SAA A 4 58 eo EE 5 12 COMTI MERE E 5 12 Command addressed Commande sse essere 5 27 common commands eese eene nnn 5 5 5 6 6 3 device specific Commandes 5 5 5
66. death or serious injury if not avoided CAUTION This tag indicates a hazard carrying a low risk of minor or moderate injury if not avoided ATTENTION This tag indicates the possibility of incorrect use that can cause damage to the product NOTE This tag indicates a situation where the user should pay special attention to operating the product but which does not lead to damage These tags are in accordance with the standard definition for civil applications in the European Economic Area Definitions that deviate from the standard definition may also exist in other economic areas or military applications It is therefore essential to make sure that the tags described here are always used only in connection with the related product documentation and the related product The use of tags in connection with unrelated products or documentation can result in misinterpretation and thus contribute to personal injury or material damage Basic safety instructions 1 The product may be operated only under the product or opening the product the the operating conditions and in the product must be disconnected from the positions specified by the manufacturer Its supply network Any adjustments ventilation must not be obstructed during replacements of parts maintenance or operation Unless otherwise specified the repair must be carried out only by technical following requirements apply to personnel authorized by Rohde amp Schwarz Rohde amp Schwarz
67. deber ser utilizado de modo que alguna persona cosa pueda ser dafiada El uso del producto fuera de sus fines definidos o despreciando las informaciones de seguridad del fabricante queda en la responsabilidad del usuario El fabricante no se hace en ninguna forma responsable de consecuencias a causa del mal uso del producto Se parte del uso correcto del producto para los fines definidos si el producto es utilizado dentro de las instrucciones de la correspondiente documentaci n de producto y dentro del margen de rendimiento definido ver hoja de datos documentaci n informaciones de seguridad que siguen El uso del producto hace necesarios conocimientos profundos y conocimientos parciales del idioma ingl s Por eso se deber tener en cuenta de exclusivamente autorizar para el uso del producto a personas peritas o debidamente minuciosamente instruidas con los conocimientos citados Si fuera necesaria indumentaria de seguridad para el uso de productos de R amp S encontrar la informaci n debida en la documentaci n del producto en el cap tulo correspondiente S mbolos y definiciones de seguridad Cuidado Informaciones Elementos de para Peligro de Advertencia Conexi n a Conexi n is Conexi n construcci n maquinaria golpe de Superficie conductor terra amasa con uns peso corriente caliente protector conductora de gt 18kg documen taci n de producto con peligro de carga electroest tica El aparato est
68. disabled ie switchover to manual control can only be made via the IEC IEEE bus If Unlocked is displayed switchover to manual control can be made with the LOCAL key 1090 3123 12 9 3 E 6 Switchover to Remote Control R SOSML R amp S SMVO3 Return to Manual Operation Return to manual operation can be made via the front panel or the IEC IEEE bus Manually Press LOCAL key Note Before switchover command processing must be completed as otherwise switchover to remote control is effected immediately The LOCAL key can be disabled by the universal command LLO in order to prevent unintentional switchover In this case switchover to manual control is only possible via the IEC IEEE bus The LOCAL key can be enabled again by deactivating the REN control line of the IEC IEEE bus Via IEC IEEE bus CALL IBLOC generators Set instrument to manual control Remote Control via RS 232 C Interface Setting the Transmission Parameters To enable error free and correct data transmission the parameters of the instrument and the controller should have the same setting To prevent any problems during binary data transmission the RS 232 C interface should be set to 8 data bits No parity and 1 stop bit This data format corresponds to the IEEE P1174 draft standard The baud rate and handshake can be manually changed in the Utilities System RS232 menu gt Call Utilities System RS232 menu Select de
69. distortion Measuring equipment Test setup Settings on R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Settings on the sinewave generator Measurement Test receiver table Measuring Equipment and Accessories item 1 synchronized with R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Connect the audio input from the receiver to the LF connector of the R amp S SML R amp S SMVOS LF OUTPUT STATE ON LF OUTPUT VOLTAGE 1V 4V LF OUTPUT LFGen for frequency accuracy 100 Hz 1 kHz 33 33 kHz 1 MHz for total harmonic distortion 20 Hz 50 Hz 100 Hz to 100 kHz 3 values decade each FREQ 20 kHz Output impedance 50 Ohm Level 1 V Level offset 5 V Read off actual frequency from test receiver Read off THD value from test receiver Total harmonic distortion is calculated by the formula k e 100 THD 10 2 Amplitude modulation AM deviation setting Test setup Settings on the R amp S SMLO1 oettings on the R amp S SML02 03 R amp S SMVO3 1090 3123 12 Test setup 1 demodulator mode LEVEL 2 1 dBm 5 dBm 8 dBm with R amp S SML B10 15 dBm FREQ 100 kHz 5 1 MHz 1100 MHz MODULATION gt AM gt AM DEPTH 10 to 95 in 20 steps AM SOURCE LFGen LFGenFreq 1 kHz LEVEL 0 1 dBm 5 dBm 8 dBm with R amp S SML B10 15 dBm FREQ in addition to the test frequencies for R amp S SMLO1 1211 MHz 2200 MHz 2800 MHz 3300 MHz MODULATION gt AM gt AM DEPTH 10 to 95 in 20 steps AM SOURCE LFGen LFGenFre
70. double pulse Pulse mode Ext Trig Slope Pos Int SYNC signal PULSE input Int SYNC signal m PERIOD gt PULSE DELAY K WIDTH a PULSE DELAY K WIDTH i VIDEO signal TT u zu Fig 4 15 Signal example 3 single pulse Pulse Mode Ext Gated 1090 3123 12 4 16 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Stereo Modulation Option R amp S SML B5 Stereo Modulation Option R amp S SML B5 For stereo modulation external modulation sources or the internal LF generator can be used For analog modulation signals input connectors R and L are available at the rear panel A digital stereo signal can be attached to the S P DIF input i g the output signal from the Audio Analyzer UPL The above mentioned different modulation sources cannot be used simultaneously In any case standard ARI and RDS signals can be generated too Settings for stereo modulation can be made in the Modulation Stereo menu Menu selection Modulation Stereo 100 000 000 0 mHz Modulation Stereo LBE Deviation 40 00 kHz Off RsL 1 00000 kHz Ext L A Impedances 100 Ks Preemphasis Filot tone Settings Filot Stare Pilot Deviation Filot Phase ARl Settings ARI State ARI Deviation ARI Identification ARI BK HDS Settings RDS State RDS Deviation RDS Data Set 1 Program Service Name RDS12345 Program Identification BEEF Traffic Progra
71. enable register to the value indicated Query ESE returns the contents of the event status enable register in decimal form ESR STANDARD EVENT STATUS QUERY returns the contents of the event status register in decimal form 0 to 255 and subsequently sets the register to zero 1090 3123 12 6 3 E 6 Common Commands R amp S SML R amp S SMVO03 IDN IDENTIFICATION QUERY queries the instrument identification The device response is for example Rohde amp Schwarz R amp S SMLO1 00000001 1 04 01 variant identification 000000017 serial number 1 04 firmware version number IST INDIVIDUAL STATUS QUERY returns the contents of the IST flag in decimal form 0 1 The IST flag is the status bit which is sent during a parallel poll OPC OPERATION COMPLETE sets bit 0 in the event status register when all preceding commands have been executed This bit can be used to initiate a service request OPC OPERATION COMPLETE QUERY returns 1 if all preceding commands have been executed It is necessary to consider a sufficiently long time out for the IEEE IEC bus OPT OPTION IDENTIFICATION QUERY queries the options included in the instrument and returns a list of the options installed The options are separated from each other by means of commas For every option a fixed position is provided in the response Table 6 2 Device Response to OPT B1 Reference oscillator OXCO B3 Pulse modulation and pulse generator ICI EMEN
72. goes beyond their intended use hazardous substances heavy metal dust such as lead beryllium nickel may be released For this reason the product may only be disassembled e g for disposal purposes by specially trained personnel Improper disassembly may be hazardous to your health National waste disposal regulations must be observed If handling the product yields hazardous substances or fuels that must be disposed of in a special way e g coolants or engine oils that must be replenished regularly the safety instructions of the manufacturer of the hazardous substances or fuels and the applicable regional waste disposal regulations must be observed Also observe the relevant safety instructions in the product documentation Depending on the function certain products such as RF radio equipment can produce an elevated level of electromagnetic radiation Considering that unborn life requires increased protection pregnant women should be protected by appropriate measures Persons with pacemakers may also be endangered by electromagnetic radiation The employer operator is required to assess workplaces where there is a special risk of exposure to radiation and if necessary take measures to avert the danger Operating the products requires special training and intense concentration Make certain that persons who use the products are physically mentally and emotionally fit enough to handle operating the products otherwise in
73. header and in most cases one or several parameters The header and the parameters are separated by a white space ASCII code O to 9 11 to 32 decimal eg a blank Headers may consist of several key words Queries are formed by appending a question mark directly to the header Note The commands used in the following examples are not in every case implemented in the instrument Common commands Common device independent commands consist of a header preceded by an asterisk and of one or several parameters if any Examples RST RESET resets the instrument ESE 253 EVENT STATUS ENABLE sets the bits of the event status enable register ESR EVENT STATUS QUERY queries the contents of the event status register Device specific commands The following examples are general they are not necessarly available with R amp S SML R amp S SMVO03 Hierarchy Device specific commands are of a hierarchical structure see Fig 5 1 The different levels are represented by combined headers Headers of the highest level root level have only one key word This key word denotes a complete command system Example SOURce This key word denotes the SOURce command system For commands of lower levels the complete path has to be specified starting on the left with the highest level the individual key words being separated by a colon Example SOURce FM EXTernal COUPling AC This command is at the fourth level of the SOURce system lt s
74. ilil RS 232 RS 232 C interface used for software update and remote control The pin assignment corresponds to the pin assignment of Fig 1 2 Rear panel view ares gt Cf Chapter 5 Section Interface RS 232 C 1090 3123 12 1 10 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 00 lt gt SCH we ie DCH EMIT SE o m o E SE H ia S N e 18 5 gt LE x E LO E st ce EI 5 z N E e m 6 8 a e a vk 5 D e Boxes So MO O O E LLA AO O O O O BE ER BE LI CL lt 10 MHz ED 9 E Hen AJ LI EERE si ITT ke Fig 1 2 Rear panel view 1090 3123 12 Rear Panel 5 IEC 625 IEC bus IEEE 488 IEEE 488 Interface for Remote Control gt Cf Chapter 5 Remote Control Power supply connector and fuse holder gt Cf Chapter 1 Section Power Fuses 7 R amp S SMVO3 only a Q Relocation of the inputs for external modulation signals forl Q modulation gt Cf Chapter 4 Section Vector Modulation SP DIV S P DIV Input only with option R amp S SML B5 gt Cf Chapter 4 Section Stereo Modulation R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Sample Setting for First Users 2 Short Tutorial The present chapter contains a short tutorial with sample settings allowing the users to operate immediately the instrument Sample Setting for First Users Setting frequency and level of the RF output signal First fr
75. in operating mode CW and SWEEP It does not influence the display LEVEL and the answer to query POW Example SOUR POW LIM AMPL 19 not influenced by RST SOURce POWer MANual 140 dBm to Pmax 29 dBm with R amp S SML B10 The command sets the level if SOUR POW MODE Is set to SWE and SOUR SWE MODE to MAN Only level values between STARt and STOP are permitted as to specified range cf POW AMPL Example SOUR POW MAN 1dBm RST value is 30 dBm SOURce POWer MODE CW FlXed SWEep The command specifies the operating mode and thus also by means of which commands the level setting is checked CW Fixed The output level is specified by means of commands under SOUR POW LEV SWEep The instrument operates in the SWEep mode The level is specified by means of SOUR POW STAR STOP CENT SPAN and MAN Example SOUR POW MODE FIX RST value is FIX SOURce POWer RCL INCLude EXCLude INCLude The stored RF level is loaded too when instrument settings are loaded EXCLude The stored RF level is not loaded when instrument settings are loaded ie the current level setting is maintained Example SOUR POW RCL INCL not influenced by RST 1090 3123 12 6 28 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 SOURce POWer SOURce POWer STARt 140 dBm to Pmax 29 dBm with R amp S SML B10 The command sets the staring value for a level sweep STARt may be larger than STOP then the sweep runs from the high to the low level
76. in the table as follows SOURCe first level FM second level MODE third level In the individual description the complete notation of the command is given An example for each command and if it exists the default value RST is written out at the end of the individual description 1090 3123 12 6 1 E 6 Description of Commands R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Upper lower case notation Special characters 1090 3123 12 Upper lower case letters serve to mark the long or short form of the key words of a command in the description The instrument itself does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters A selection of key words with an identical effect exists for several commands These key words are indicated in the same line they are separated by a vertical stroke Only one of these key words has to be indicated in the header of the command The effect of the command is independent of which of the key words is indicated Example SOURce FREQuency CW FIXed The two following commands of identical meaning can be formed They set the frequency of the constantly frequent signal to 9 kHz SOURCe FREQuency CW 9E3 SOURCe FREQuency FIXed 9E3 A vertical stroke in indicating the parameters marks alternative possibilities in the sense of or The effect of the command is different depending on which parameter is entered Example Selection of the parameters for the command SOQURCeSCOUPIIng AC P D
77. is not saved in the SAVE memory It is stored under the respective list name and can be called If instrument settings are called which go back to list data such as level setting using Ucor the current list contents is used If this has been altered it is not identical to the list contents at the point of storing any more 1090 3123 12 3 14 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Menu Summary for R amp S SML Frequency Level Modulation Level Ucor LF Output Pulse Output Sweep Stereo Utilities Freq Level LFGen Display Status 1090 3123 12 System Ref Osc Phase Protect Calib Diag Test Mod Key Aux I O Menu Summary for R amp S SML Option SML B3 Option SML B5 Option SML B3 GPIB RS232 Security Language Config TPoint Param using STATUS key 3 15 Ref Osc Level Attenuator IF Filter Main Loop Mult Filter Harm Filter Level Preset LFGen Level FM Offset All E 6 Menu Summary for R amp S SMVO3 Menu Summary for R amp S SMV03 Frequency Level Analog Mod Vector Mod LF Output Pulse Output Sweep Utilities Status 1090 3123 12
78. is possible to enter an offset for a subsequent attenuator amplifier if any in the Level menu The offset is taken into account in the display in the header line see below which represents the level value of the signal at the output of the subsequent unit see Fig 4 4 The level of the RF output signal is therefore calculated from the amplitude displayed in the header line and the offset entered in the Level Level menu as follows RF output level amplitude displayed in the header line offset The entered offset has no influence on the RF output signal of the R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 the offset is only taken into account in the displayed level value The value with the offset can be directly entered with the LEVEL key The RF output level of the R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 is indicated in the Level Level menu Input value offset Y R amp S SML Attenuator Indicated value R amp S SMV03 amplifier display RF output level Fig 4 4 Typical setup with level offset Non Interrupting Level Setting With Attenuator Mode Fixed non interrupting level setting is performed Level settings are made electronically only in a 20 dB range downwards from switching level with fixed attenuator Full Fix Range 28 30 dB overrange aprox Note Level accuracy and spectral purity are not guaranteed over the full Fix Range If the level falls below the permissible variation range the warning Level underrang
79. logical AND 15 14 tato ENABle part logical OR of all bits Fig 5 3 Status register model 1090 3123 12 5 16 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Status Reporting System CONDition part PTRansition part NTRansition part EVENt part ENABle part Sum bit The CONDition part is directly written to by the hardware or the sum bit of the next lower register Its contents reflects the current instrument status This register part can be read only but not written to or cleared Reading does not affect it contents The Positive Transition part acts as an edge detector If a bit of the CONDition part changes from O to 1 the status of the associated PTR bit determines whether the EVENT bit is set to 1 PTR bit 1 the EVENT bit is set PTR bit 0 the EVENt bit is not set This part can be written to and read Reading does not affect its contents The Negative Transition part likewise acts as an edge detector If a bit of the CONDition part changes from 1 to O the status of the associated NTR bit determines whether the EVEN bit is set to 1 NTR bit 1 the EVENT bit is set NTR bit 0 the EVENt bit is not set This part can be written to and read Reading does not affect its contents With the above two edge register parts the user can define what status transition of the CONDition part none O to 1 1 to O or both is to be stored in the EVEN part The
80. lt XON gt and 13h lt XOFF gt This setting should not be used for binary data transmission and for baud rates higher than 9600 baud IEC IEEE bus command SYST COMM SER PACE XON Note To avoid problems in the binary data tranmission the RS 232 C interface should be set to 8 data bits no parity and 1 stop bit This data format is in line with the provisional IEEE P1174 1090 3123 12 4 57 E 6 Utilities R amp S SML RESEOSMVOS Suppression of Indications and Clearing of Memories System Security For reasons of security indications can be suppressed and memories cleared in the System Security submenu Menu selection Utilities System Security 100 000 0000 10 0 dem Utilities System Security tale OH Annotation Freq Lin Annotation Amplitude On Clear Memory Back 4 Fig 4 27 Utilities System Security menu State Selection of Security status Can be set only via the IEC IEEE bus On Locks the suppression of indications Off Deactivates the interlock of the indication suppression The preset state is set and all data such as stored settings user correction and list settings are reset IEC IEEE bus command SYST SEC OFF Annotation Freq Off All frequency indications are suppressed On The frequency setting is displayed IEC IEEE bus command DISP ANN FREQ ON Annotation Amplitude Off All level indications are suppressed On The level setting is displayed IEC IEEE bus command DISP
81. menu If switch on is made using the MOD ON OFF key the modulation sources which are set in the modulation menus are used The MOD ON OFF key can be effective either for all types of modulation or only for a selected modulation The selection of modulation types for which the MOD ON OFF key is to be effective is made in the Utilities Mod Key menu If only one type of modulation is selected it is switched on or off each time the MOD ON OFF key is pressed If all modulation types are selected the MOD ON OFF key has the following effect e lf at least one modulation type is active Pressing the MOD ON OFF key switches off all active modulation types The modulation types which were active are stored e f no modulation type is active Pressing the MOD ON OFF key switches on the modulation types that were last switched off with this key 1090 3123 12 4 10 E 6 R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Amplitude Modulation Analog Modulations Amplitude Modulation Settings for amplitude modulation can be made in the Modulation AM menu Notes he specified AM data are valid only up to 6 dB below the maximum level in each case For level values exceeding this threshold AM data are guaranteed only with linearly decreasing modulation depth Menu selection Modulation AM 100 000 0000 mz 10 Fee dEm AM Depth pl M Source Off Est Coupling AC LFGen Freq 1 00000 kHz Back A Fig 4 9 Modulation AM menu pre
82. pressing the BACK key the editing window will be exited without any change being made The menu cursor goes back to Edit List Selection Delete 100 000 000 0 mHz LevelllCoriielete RF Of Range Execute Fig 3 9 Delete editing function Delete At Input of first element to be deleted in a list Range Number of elements to be deleted Execute Starts the deletion After the execution of the function the menu cursor goes back to Edit List 1090 3123 12 3 13 E 6 Storing Calling of Instrument Settings R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Storing Calling of Instrument Settings SAVE RECALL 50 complete instrument settings can be stored in memory locations 1 to 50 Operating Steps Explanations DATA INPUT Store current instrument setting in memory location 12 SAVE x i ENTER dB m DATA INPUT Call instrument setting of memory location 12 Ja x1 NTER dB m The digital display during a save or recall entry is faded in a window If an instrument setting is stored in which a sweep was switched on the sweep is started using the recall The parameter Exclude From Recall in the Frequency and Level Level menus determines whether the saved RF frequency and RF level are loaded when an instrument setting is loaded or whether the current settings are maintained Store IEC bus command Me CAV eo Call IEC bus command WER 25 Note The contents of lists as they are used for user correction Ucor
83. previous level STEP LOG Usually STEP LOG is entered in units of dB A change of STARt or STOP does not result in a change of STEP LOG Keyword LOG can be omitted then the command conforms to SCPI regulation see example Example SOUR SWE POW STEP 10dB RST value is 1dB 1090 3123 12 6 40 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 SOURce2 FREQuency SOURce2 System The SOURce2 system contains the commands to configure the LF signal source The LF signal source s designated as INT if it is used as a modulation source if it is used as an LF generator it is designated as SOURce2 The commands to set the output voltage of the LF generator are in the OUTPut2 system SOURce2 FREQuency Frequency with CW and sweep operation SWEep LF sweep SOURce2 FREQuency Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands for the frequency settings including the sweeps nu MA wem SOURce2 FREQuency CW FIXed 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz Hz MANual 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz Hz MODE CW FIXed SWEep STARt 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz Hz STOP 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz Hz SOURce2 FREQuency CW FlXed 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz The command sets the frequency for the CW mode Example SOUR2 FREQ CW 1kHz RST value is 1 kHz SOURce2 FREQuency MANual 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz The command sets the frequency if SOUR2 SWE MODE MAN and SOUR2 FREQ MODE SWE are set In this case only frequency values between the settings SOUR2 FREQ STAR and to STOP are allowed Example
84. products Only original parts may be used for prescribed operating position is always with replacing parts relevant to safety e g the housing floor facing down IP protection power switches power transformers 2X pollution severity 2 overvoltage fuses A safety test must always be category 2 use only in enclosed spaces performed after parts relevant to safety max operation altitude 2000 m above sea have been replaced visual inspection PE level max transport altitude 4500 m above conductor test insulation resistance sea level measurement leakage current Unless specified otherwise in the data measurement functional test sheet a tolerance of 10 shall apply to 3 As with all industrially manufactured goods the nominal voltage and of 5 to the the use of substances that induce an nominal frequency allergic reaction allergens e g nickel 2 Applicable local or national safety such as aluminum cannot be generally regulations and rules for the prevention of excluded If you develop an allergic accidents must be observed in all work reaction such as a skin rash frequent performed The product may be opened sneezing red eyes or respiratory only by authorized specially trained difficulties consult a physician immediately personnel Prior to performing any work on to determine the cause 1171 0000 42 03 00 sheet 2 10 oafety Instructions If products components are mechanically and or thermically processed in a manner that
85. register to the value indicated Bit 6 MSS mask bit remains 0 This command determines under which conditions a service request is triggered Query SRE reads the contents of the service request enable register in decimal form Bit 6 is always O STB READ STATUS BYTE QUERY reads out the contents of the status byte in decimal form TRG TRIGGER triggers all actions waiting for a trigger event Special trigger events can be started by command system TRIGger see section TRIGger System WAI WAIT to CONTINUE only permits the servicing of the subsequent commands after all preceding commands have been executed and all signals have settled cf OPC as well 1090 3123 12 6 5 E 6 ABORt CALibration R amp S SML RE SOSMVO3 ABORt System The ABORt system contains the commands to abort actions triggered After an action has been aborted it can be triggered again at once All commands trigger an event thus they have no RST value Further commands for the trigger system of the R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 can be found in the TRIGger system mE eg Ee p we 7 ABORt SWEep No query ABORt SWEep The command restarts a sweep Example ABOR SWE CALibration System The CALibration System contains the commands for external calibrations For calibration of Ref Osc see Service Manual Md id me ee CALibration ALL ATTenuator STATe numeric ON OFF FMOFfset MEASure HARMfilter MEASure I
86. section LFGen Level Calibration of LF generator level 1 Mainboard LF generator FM Offset Calibration of FMDC offsets none Mainboard synthesizer ALC Table Correction values for the Table mode are regenerated mne f For further information on Calibration of Ref Osc seeR amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 service manual Order No 1090 3123 24 Level and attenuator do not need any settings Mult Filter Calibration of bandpass filters after multiplier 1 Mainboard synthesizer Harm Filter Calibration of harmonics filters 1090 3123 12 4 62 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Utilities Display of Module Versions Diag Config The versions and modification states of the modules installed can be displayed for servicing purposes The modules can be displayed in the Utilities Diag Config submenu Menu selection Utilities Diag Config 100 000 000 0 sel 0d en Var Rev 11 vars Rey 22 Fig 4 32 Utilities Diag Config menu IEC IEEE bus command DIAG INFO MOD For further information see Service Manual 1090 3123 12 4 63 E 6 Utilities R amp S SML RESEOSMVOS Display of Voltages of Test Points Diag TPoint Access to internal test points is offered by the Diag TPoint submenu If a test point is switched on the voltage is displayed in a window in the header field For more detailed information see Service Manual Menu selection Utilities Diag T Point 100 0000000 10 0 dem Utilities D
87. sequence Measurement Analysis Residual FM Test setup oettings on R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 oettings on the test receiver Measurement Residual AM Test setup oettings on R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 oettings on the test receiver Measurement 1090 3123 12 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 determined The result is then referenced to 1 Hz bandwidth The result of this calculation is the value of the broadband noise Measure the carrier power Pr Detune the center frequency by 5 MHz Measure the channel power Px The value of the broadband noise is determined from 1010 BBNoise P 10 log ChBw Hz gt Test setup 1 demodulator mode LEVEL 0 dBm FREQ 1 MHz 20 MHz 76 MHz 100 MHz 300 MHz 605 MHz 750 MHz 900 MHz 1 100 MHz 1 211 MHz 1 700 MHz 2 200 MHz 3 300 MHz Reference level 0 dBm Center frequency FREQ R amp S SML Demodulation FM Detector RMS Filter 20 Hz to 23 kHz for the moment measurement must still be carried out with 50 Hz 100 kHz since filters are not yet implemented Read off the frequency deviation Testsetup 1 demodulator mode LEVEL 0 dBm FREQ 5 MHz 10 MHz 76 MHz 76 MHz 1 Hz 151 3125001 MHz 255 2500001 MHz 605 25 MHz 605 2500001 MHz 700 MHz 807 MHz 807 MHz 1 Hz 960 MHz 1076 MHz 1076 MHz 1 Hz 1250 MHz 1800 MHz 2010 MHz 2200 MHz 2655 MHz 2655 MHz 1 Hz 2800 MHz 28
88. side phase noise see fig Typical SSB phase noise versus carrier frequency in the datasheet When the extended divider range is activated excellent single sideband phase noise values will be obtained in the frequency range from approximately 9 5 MHz to 77 MHz but all other specifications of the R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 cannot be guaranteed for this operation mode 1090 3123 12 4 2 E 6 R amp S SML RESOSMVOS RF Level RF Level The RF level can be set directly using the LEVEL key or via the Level Level menu In the Level Level menu the set RF output level is entered and indicated under Amplitude In level settings made with the LEVEL key the offset of a subsequent attenuator amplifier is taken into account see section Level Offset This makes it possible to enter the desired level at the output of subsequent units The offset can also be entered in the Level Level menu under Offset dBm dBuV mV and uV can be used as level units The four unit keys are labelled with the respective units To change to another level unit simply press the corresponding unit key IEC Bus Befehl UNIT POW DBM VOLT V Using this command the basic unit of the RF level only can be changed and set Simultaneously the displayed unit is changed accordingly Notes The note Unleveled appears in the status line if the displayed level is not attained Further settings Level Sweep Sweep menu Menu selection Level Level
89. sources for the individual signal sources RF LFGen are distinguished by a numerical suffix appended to TRIG The suffix conforms to the numbering of the SOURce system TRIGger1 RF generator TRIGger2 LFGen The trigger system of the R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 consists of a simplified implementation of the SCPI trigger system Compared to SCPI the TRIGger system shows the following differences e No INIT command the instrument behaves as if INIT CONT ON was set e here are several subsystems denoting the different parts of the instrument under TRIGger SWEep PULSe Further commands as to the trigger system of the R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 can be found in the ABORt system Minh UT Ea emne TRIGger1 2 SWEep IMMediate No query SOURce SINGle EXTernal AUTO PULSe EGATed POLarity NORMal INVerted SOURce AUTO SINGIe EXTernal EGATed SLOPe POSitive NEGative IMMediate No query TRIGger1 2 SWEep All commands to trigger a sweep are under this node The settings here act on level and frequency sweeps for RF generator TRIG1 or LF generator TRIG2 TRIGger1 2 SWEep MMediate The command immediately starts a sweep Which sweep is executed depends on the respective Mode setting e g SOUR FREQ MODE SWE The command corresponds to manual control command Execute Single Sweep This command triggers an event and thus has no RST value Example TRIG SWE IMM 1090 3123 12 6 50 E
90. specialized staff or thoroughly trained personnel with the required skills If personal safety gear is required for using Rohde amp Schwarz products this will be indicated at the appropriate place in the product documentation Symbols and safety labels ion Observe Weight Danger of Warning Ground Geer product indication for electric Hot PE terminal Ground ten iva documentation units gt 18 kg shock surface devas Device fully Alternating Direct alternating protected by current AC current DC AC double reinforced insulation Direct voltage aci n current ON OFF DC Supply Standby 1171 0000 42 03 00 Sheet 1 oafety Instructions Observing the safety instructions will help prevent personal injury or damage of any kind caused by dangerous situations Therefore carefully read through and adhere to the following safety instructions before putting the product into operation It is also absolutely essential to observe the additional safety instructions on personal safety that appear in relevant parts of the product documentation In these safety instructions the word product refers to all merchandise sold and distributed by the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies including instruments systems and all accessories Tags and their meaning DANGER This tag indicates a definite hazard carrying a high risk of death or serious injury if not avoided WARNING This tag indicates a possible hazard carrying a medium risk of
91. t redd 4 18 4 48 6 31 Dwell time frequency SWEED nre enne nnns 4 52 6 39 level SWEGO un 4 53 6 40 E 6 Index E Edge extemal Widder asien 6 52 Edit ee 3 9 SEONI Y ansehen 3 12 EE 1 3 ENABIE Dal etuer e tmt dieere deis 5 17 EV CLOG rn ee ee PER 4 17 EOI command me essen 5 9 EE 4 66 Eitor messages ee ea 6 49 9 2 device SpeCifiC ee eese sees nnn nna 9 1 SCRLSDECHE a 9 2 EHOROHBUS Eee 6 46 6 48 MV ads 5 23 Error Queue Not Empty Dit 5 19 Error vector Vector Modulation EE 10 45 Lee EE 5 19 ESE event status enable register 5 20 ESR event status regisierl Rennen 5 20 Eed 5 17 Event status register Eh 5 20 Execution Error E 5 20 EXPONON M EE 5 10 External trigger ACTIVE OOO ia 4 18 4 48 6 52 pulse modulation sess 4 18 4 48 6 52 E Fill A dee Ere bordado gedauert iU e 3 11 FM ele Miete EE 4 15 6 20 COUDIIMIQ cielos pus rt duc dU ibt EU 4 15 6 19 DC offset compensation eeeeesss 4 15 6 7 deviation m 4 15 6 19 WO OUCICY RT 4 15 6 20 ee EE 6 17 6 18 Frequency ee 1 3 el dag 4 59 6 33 AM em 4 14 6 14 correction EH 4 59 6 33 JL DORMIRE RN ee 4 15 6 20 leie le MR DR R 31 EF GON CI ALOR RIDE NR is 6 42 Bal EE 6 43 e ESI EE 4 1 4 2 6 22 BM E 4 16 6 26 ee e 6 21 suppression of Idicaton nennen 4 58 Frequency modulation FM
92. target level the build up process appears on the spectrum analyzer screen Preparing the measurement gt Synchronize reference frequencies on R amp S SML R amp S SMVO03 and test receiver Establish IEC IEEE bus and RF connections gt Connect trigger port to EOI line pin 5 of IEC IEEE bus Settings on spectrum analyzer Center frequency measurement frequency Reference level target level 3 dB Amplitude range logarithmic 10 dB Resolution bandwidth 200 kHz Video bandwidth 2 MHz Span 0 Hz Sweep time 100 ms External triggering on a positive edge with 1 4 V Settings on R amp S SML FREQ R amp S SMVO3 100 MHz or user definable Measurement gt From the process controller send first the start level and then the target level The level characteristic from the trigger time onward appears on the screen of the externally triggered test receiver Measure the following hops CW ATT AUTO 140 dBm 13 dBm With electrical attenuator for target level only CW ATT AUTO 13 dBm 54 9 dBm With electrical attenuator CW ATT FIXED 14 9 dBm 13 dBm Without electrical attenuator 1090 3123 12 10 16 E 6 R amp S SML R S amp GSMV03 Test sequence Non interrupting level setting ATTENUATOR MODE FIXED Test setup Testsetup 1 spectrum analyzer mode Settings on the R amp S FREQ 120 kHz 5 1 MHz 1100 MHz SMLO1 LEVEL 5 1 dBm LEVEL gt ATTENUATOR MODE FIXED oettings on the R a
93. the status byte The status byte is read using the command STB or a serial poll The STB is assigned an SRE The SRE functionally corresponds to the ENABle part of the SCPI registers Each bit of the STB is assigned a bit of the SRE Bit 6 of the SRE is ignored If a bit is set in the SRE and the associated bit in the STB changes from 0 to 1 a service request SRQ is generated on the IEC IEEE bus which triggers an interrupt in the controller if the controller is configured correspondingly and can be further processed there The SRE can be set using the command SRE and read using the command SRE Table 5 2 Meaning of the bits used in the status byte Error Queue Not Empty This bit is set if an entry is made in the error queue If the bit is enabled by the SRE each entry in the error queue generates a service request Thus an error can be recognized and determined in greater detail by polling the error queue The poll provides an informative error message This procedure is recommended since it considerably reduces the problems involved in IEC IEEE bus control QUEStionable Status sum bit This bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the QUEStionable status register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1 If the bit is set this indicates a questionable instrument status which can be determined in greater detail by polling the QUEStionable status register MAV bit Message AVailable This bit is set if a message is available in the
94. to send a service request to the controller REN Remote Enable Active LOW enables switchover to remote control EOI End or Identify This has two functions in conjunction with ATN ATN HIGH Active LOW marks the end of a data transmission ATN LOW Active LOW triggers a parallel poll 3 Handshake bus with 3 lines DAV Data Valid Active LOW signals a valid data byte on the data bus NRFD Not Ready For Data Active LOW signals that one of the devices connected is not ready to accept data NDAC Not Data Accepted Active LOW as long as the instrument is accepting the data present on the data bus Interface Functions Instruments which can be remote controlled via the IEC IEEE bus can be equipped with different interface functions Table 5 5 lists the interface functions relevant for the instrument Table 5 5 Interface functions Control Interface functions character Handshake source function Source Handshake Handshake drain function Acceptor Handshake Listener function 1090 3123 12 5 26 E 6 R SOSML R amp S SMVO3 Interfaces Interface Messages Interface messages are transmitted to the instrument on the data lines with the ATN Attention line being active LOW These messages serve for communication between the controller and the instrument Universal Commands Universal commands are in the code range 10 to 1F hex They act on all instruments connected to the bus without addressing them before
95. transmitted c max 64 characters i e two texts of 64 characters each can be transmitted in a radio text message Command STEReo DIRect RT 02 1 Testnachricht 123 The radio text message Test message 123 is transmitted Query STEReo DIRect RI Reads the current radio text message Response 02 1 Test message 123 Scrolling Programme Service name Der Programmname wechselt automatisch im angegebenen Zeitraster SPS ttyo000000x YY Y Y Y Y y y x y 8 ASCII characters tt 01 to 59 time interval in seconds Max 20 program service names of eight characters each can be entered Command STEReo DIRect SPS 05 TEST0123 TEST4567 The program service names TEST0123 and TEST4567 are alternately transmitted at an interval of 5 seconds Note An eight digit value must be set for each program service name Blank spaces if any must also be entered otherwise the value will not be accepted SRC Description Command Query Response Value range Example 1090 3123 12 Selects the signal source SRC x SRC X 011 2 3 0 OFF 1 external analog via L and R inputs 2 external digital 3 internal with LF generator Command STEReo DIRect SRC 1 The external analog L and R inputs are selected as source Query STEReo DIRect SRC Response 1 4 37 E 6 Stereo Modulation Option R amp S SML B5 STATUS Description Query Response Value range E
96. unequal to 0 All commands of this system do not have an RST value Caution The commands under node TEST DIR directly act on the respective hardware module circumventing any security mechanisms They are provided for service purposes and should not be used by the user Improper use of the commands may damage the module S 2 amt e TEST DIRect Address subaddress hex data string ASSy Module subaddress hex data string RAM Query only ROM Query only BATTery Query only TEST DIRect Address subaddress hex data string This node contains the commands directly acting on the respective hardware module circumventing any security mechanisms The commands under this node have no short form TEST ASSy Module subaddress hex data string This command addresses the ASSy module A subaddress 0 or 1 must be entered as a parameter The data are entered as a lt string gt ie an ASCII character string enclosed in inverted commas representing hexadecimal numbers The string therefore may contain the characters Oto9AtoF TEST RAM The command triggers a test of the RAM TEST ROM The command triggers a test of the main memory EEPROM TEST BATTery The command triggers a test of the battery voltage 1090 3123 12 6 49 E 6 TRIGger R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 TRIGger System The TRIGger system contains the commands to select the trigger source and to configure the external trigger socket The trigger
97. 0 41 E 6 Test sequence Nonharmonic suppression Test setup Settings on R amp S SMVO3 Setting on spectrum analyzer Measurement Evaluation Broadband noise Test setup Settings on R amp S SMVO3 Test method Measurement Evaluation 1147 7621 12 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Test setup 1 with spectrum analyzer see Performance test R amp S SMLO3 R amp S SMVO3 UTILITIES REF OSC SOURCE EXTERNAL LEVEL 10 dBm VECTORMOD STATE IQCW FREQ Test frequecy of nonharmonics Test frequencies of nonharmonics 250 0MHz 250 0000001MHz Reference level test level 3 dB 10 dB div Test frequency 200 MHz 800 MHz 1600 MHz 2400 MHz 3200 MHz Span 1 MHz owitch on average 5 samples See Performance test R amp S SMLO3 R amp S SMVO03 See Performance test R amp S SMLO3 R amp S SMVO03 Test setup 3 see Performance test R amp S SMLO3 R amp S SMVO3 UTILITIES REF OSC SOURCE EXTERNAL VECTORMOD STATE IQCW LEVEL 0 dBm or level according to mixer specification FREQUENCY 1 GHz or any test frequency See Performance test R amp S SMLO3 R amp S SMVO03 See Performance test R amp S SMLO3 R amp S SMVO3 See Performance test R amp S SMLO3 R amp S SMVO3 10 42 E 6 R amp S SML RES SMVO3 Test sequence Level Level frequency response and linearity Test method for level in measurement range of power meter up to approx 22 dBm Test equipment See Performance test R amp S SMLO3 R amp
98. 00 MHz 1 Hz 3300 MHz Reference level 0 dBm Center frequency FREQ R amp S SML Demodulation AM Detector RMS Filter 20 Hz to 23 kHz for the moment measurement must still be carried out with 50 Hz 100 kHz since filters are not yet implemented gt Read off the residual 10 12 E 6 R amp S SML R S amp GSMV03 Test sequence Level Level flatness and level accuracy Measuring equipment Test receiver table Measuring Equipment and Accessories item 1 Power sensor table Measuring Equipment and Accessories item 7 Low noise preamplifier table Measuring Equipment and Accessories item 8 Measurement method for levels in the measurement range of the power sensor 25 dBm to 23 dBm Test setup Testsetup 1 connect a power sensor to the RF output connector Settings on the R amp S FREQ SMLO1 100 kHz 500 kHz 1 MHz 2 MHz 3 MHz 4 MHz 5 MHz 5 MHz 1 Hz 15 MHz 25 MHz every 10 MHz to 1100 MHz LEVEL 13 dBm 0 dBm with R amp S SML B10 also 23 dBm Settings on the R amp S FREQ SML02 03 R amp S SMVO3 to 1100 MHz as R amp S SMLO1 from 1105 MHz every 20 MHz to 2200 MHz or 3300 MHz LEVEL 13 dBm 0 dBm with R amp S SML B10 also 21 dBm Settings on the test receiver Power meter mode gt ZEROING is carried out before level measurements Use RF OFF when turning off the level on the R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Measurement Measure the level at the test frequenc
99. 00 MHz frequency double 1830 MHz 2100 MHz 2199 MHz 2400 MHz frequency triple 2660 MHz 3200 MHz frequency quadruple Reference level test level 3 dB 10 dB div Center frequency test frequency SPAN 100 kHz Resolution bandwidth 1 kHz Switch on average 5 samples Center frequency test frequency 1 2 3 2 frequency double Center frequency test frequency 1 3 2 3 4 3 frequency triple Center frequency test frequency 1 4 1 2 3 4 5 4 frequency quadruple Measurement gt First measure the level of the ground wave as reference then measure the level at any visible subharmonic Analysis The spurious suppression ratio is the difference in level between the detected spurious referenced to the output signal from the R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 in dBc referenced to the carrier Note The spectrum analyzer setting values are reference values and are dependent on the analyzer used The necessary measurement distance must be verified before every measurement SSB phase noise Test setup Settings on R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Measurement principle Measurement 1090 3123 12 gt Test setup 3 spectrum analyzer mode UTILITIES gt REF OSC gt SOURCE EXTERN LEVEL 5 1 dBm or level according to mixer specification FREQ 1 GHz or any measurement frequency gt 200 MHz The two test transmitters are set to the measurement frequency and synchronized with 90
100. 000 A four digit value must always be set Leading zeros if any must also be specified PIL PH Note Description Command Query Response Value range Example Sets the pilot tone phase PIL PH yxx PIL PH yXX 5 0 to 0 to 5 0 ASCII coded decimal numbers corresponding to 5 0 Command ST EReo DIRect PIL PH 33 The pilot tone phase is set to 3 3 Query STEReo DlRect PIL PH Response 33 A two digit value must always be set with a sign or in front of it Leading zeros if any must also be specified 1090 3123 12 4 33 E 6 Stereo Modulation Option R amp S SML B5 PRE Description Command Query Response Value range Example PRESET PS Note Description Command Example Description Command Query Response Value range Example R amp S SML RESOSMVOS Sets one of various preemphasis options PRE x PRE X 01112 O Off 1 50 us 2 75 us Command STEReo DIRect PRE 1 The preemphasis is set to 50 us Query STEReo DIRect PRE Response 1 Sets the default settings in accordance with specifications PRESET STEReo DIRect PRESET Sets or reads the program service PS name PS xxxxxxxx char PS XXXXXXXX 8 ASCII characters Command STEReo DIRect PS RDS Test Sets the program service name to be transmitted to RDS Test Query STEReo DIRect PS Response RDS Test
101. 090 3123 12 5 14 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Instrument Model and Command Processing Output Unit The output unit collects the information requested by the controller and output by the data set management The output unit processes the information in accordance with the SCPI rules and makes it available in the output buffer The output buffer has a size of 256 characters If the requested information exceeds this size it is made available in portions without this being recognized by the controller If the instrument is addressed as a talker without the output buffer containing data or awaiting data from the data set management the output unit returns the error message Query UNTERMINATED to the status reporting system No data are sent on the IEC IEEE bus The controller waits until it has reached its time limit This procedure is specified by SCPI Command Sequence and Command Synchronization As mentioned above overlapping execution is possible for all commands Likewise the setting commands of a command line are not necessarily processed in the order in which they are received To ensure that commands are carried out in a specific order each command must be sent in a separate command line ie with a separate IBWRT call To prevent overlapping execution of commands one of commands OPC OPC or WAI has to be used Each of the three commands causes a certain action to be triggered only after the hardware has been set and has
102. 1 Sets the MPX frequency deviation to 2 01 kHz Query STEReo DIRect MPX DEV Response 00201 A five digit value must always be set Leading zeros if any must also be specified Description Command Query Response Value range Example Sets or reads the program identification PI code Pl xxxx PI XXXX 0000 to FFFF ASCII coded hexadecimal numbers Command STEReo DlIRect Pl 1234 The program identification code to be transmitted is set to 1234 Query STEReo DlRect PI Response 1234 A four digit value must always be set Leading zeros if any must also be specified otherwise the value will not be accepted 1090 3123 12 4 32 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 PIL Description Command Query Response Value range Example PIL DEV Note Description Command Query Response Value range Example Stereo Modulation Option R amp S SML B5 Activates deactivates the pilot tone PIL x PIL X 0 1 O Off 1 On Command STEReo DIRect PIL 1 The pilot tone is activated Query STEReo DIRect PIL Response 4 Sets the pilot tone frequency deviation max deviation PIL DEV xxxx PIL DEV XXXX 0000 to 1000 ASCII coded decimal numbers corresponding to 0 Hz to 10 kHz Command STEReo DlRect PIL DEV 1000 Sets the frequency deviation of the pilot tone to 10 kHz Query STEReo DIRect PIL DE V Response 1
103. 1 ENT Re EE e ge du EE 1 1 UNPACKING TNE Mstrument an RETE 1 1 Seminci ada ceo 1 2 Cleaning the Outside and Storing ccccsccccsscceseecceeeceeeeceueceueeecauecueeceueecuaeecaeessueesseessaeeses 1 2 DUDDIV VON AG eet M ME 1 3 HOW fo Ensure EMO EE 1 3 POWEr RUSOS sn ine ii 1 3 Switching On OIT The INS de dani o 1 3 Mali Status a EE E 1 3 RAM With Battery Back Up ida 1 4 Preset Setting u a 1 4 FUNCHONAL TOS E 1 4 Mounting Into 19 Rack E 1 4 Explanation of Front and Rear Panel 02222 2002n000n00nnunannunnunnnunnnnannnn ann nnnnnnnun nun nnnnnn 1 5 Elements ofthe Front Paella cdo 1 5 El ments or the Rear rai EE 1 10 2 Short Tutor lala 2 1 Sample Setting TOK First E 2 1 3 Manual Oberallolticun ceu eo Ee pede SEV UN A Ou Due gu VOR puede Sov pe EN YOU Du E DU MC ge ated awe 3 1 DESIGN OFtHE DIS UE 3 1 Basic Operating tesi pies 3 2 CANINA he INOS EE 3 2 Selection and Change of Parameters ccoocccccnccncconcnnononoconononnnonnnnonanonannnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnannnannnnnnnnns 3 3 Quick Selection of Menu QUICK GELECT eene nnne 3 4 Use of FRE Orand EE RE 3 5 Use of RF ON OFF and MOD ONIOEE ccc ccccccceccceeeecceeeeeeceeeeceeeceseeceeseeeesseeeeeaeeesaaees 3 5 Changing Wil OL EE EE 3 5 COM CCTON TOU IP UN EE 3 6 Bra TE 3 7 SEIECH LISE na mern nial sonetn 3 8 Delete eege EE Ee 3 8 EA 3 9 Stor
104. 1 demodulator mode Settings on the R amp S LEVEL 2 1 dBm SMLO1 with R amp S SML B10 12 1 dBm FREQ 77 MHz 1100 MHz MODULATION gt AM gt AM DEPTH 30 AM SOURCE LFGen LFGenFreq 1 kHz oettings on the R amp S LEVEL 8 dBm SML02 03 R amp S SMVO3 with R amp S SML B10 18 dBm FREQ in addition to the test frequencies for R amp S SMLO1 2200 MHz 3300 MHz MODULATION gt AM gt AM DEPTH 30 AM SOURCE LFGen LFGenFreq 1 kHz Settings on the test receiver Demodulation PM Detector Peak Measurement Onthe test receiver measure the resulting phase modulation with 100 kHz lowpass filter and peak analysis Frequency modulation FM deviation setting Test setup Testsetup 1 demodulator mode Settings on R amp S SML LEVEL 0 dBm R amp S SMVO3 FREQ 1 GHz MODULATION gt FM gt FM DEVIATION 100 kHz FM SOURCE LFGen LFGenFreq 1 kHz Settings on the test receiver Demodulation FM Detector Peak Filter 20 Hz to 23 kHz for the moment measurement must still be carried out with 50 Hz 100 kHz since filters are not yet implemented Measurement Read off the frequency deviation from the test receiver Note Since the R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 has a purely digital deviation generator it is adequate to test its functionality by taking a measurement at one deviation setting and one frequency only 1090 3123 12 10 22 E 6 R amp S SML R S amp GSMV03 Test sequence FM f
105. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Command STEReo DlRect DS 2 otorage area 2 is activated Query STEReo DIRect DS Response 2 4 25 E 6 Stereo Modulation Option R amp S SML B5 R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 EON AFA Description Command Query Response Value range Example Enhanced Other Networks defines type A alternative frequencies for the EON with Pl yyyy EON AFA yyyy A XXX X XXX X EON AFA yyyy z XXX X XXX X or if list z xxx x 87 6 to 107 9 ASCII coded decimal numbers yyyy 0000 to FFFF ASCII coded hexadecimal numbers A N new AF list or AF list to be added z 1 5 1 to 5 AF list to be read Command STEReo DlRect EON AFA 1000 N 97 4 98 3 Creates a new type A alternative frequency list for the EON with PI 1000 The new list contains the alternative frequencies 97 4 MHz and 98 3 MHz Query SI EReo DlIRect EON AFA 1000 1 Reads the first type A alternative frequency list of the EON with PI 1000 Response 97 4 98 3 is not available Note For each Enhanced Other Network EON a maximum of five type A alternative frequency lists can be created EON AFB Description Command Query Response Value range Example Enhanced Other Networks defines type B alternative frequencies for the EON with Pl yyyy EON AFB yyyy A XXX X XXX X 1 Freq Tuned Frequenz TF 2 bis 5 Freq Mapped Frequenz MF EON AFB yyyy
106. 100 000 000 0 mHz Level Level Amplitude Offset Limit 3 0 dBm Attenuator Mode Auto tten Fired Range 39 0 dBm to unleveled Knob Step Liser 1 0 dE Knob Step Decimal Power Resolution 0 1 dB Power On State Previous Exclude from Recall Off Preset RF State Off Back A Fig 4 3 Level menu Amplitude Input value of RF level at RF output connector IEC IEEE bus command SOUR POW 10 Offset Input value of level offset of a subsequent attenuator amplifier Input value in dB see section Level Offset IEC IEEE bus command SOUR POW OFFS 0 Limit Input value of level limit This value indicates the upper limit of the level at the RF output connector A warning is output in the status line if an attempt is made to set a level above this limit IEC IEEE bus command SOUR POW LIM 19 dBm 1090 3123 12 4 3 E 6 RF Level Attenuator Mode Atten Fixed Range Knob Step User Knob Step Power Resolution Power On State Exclude from Recall Preset RF State 1090 3123 12 R amp S SML RESOSMVOS Auto Normal setting The electronically switched attenuator switches in steps of 5 dB at fixed points IEC IEEE bus command OUTP AMOD AUTO Fixed Level settings are made without switching the attenuator see section Non Interrupting Level Setting IEC IEEE bus command OUTP AMOD FIX Indicates the level range of non interrupting level setting in Attenuator Mode Fixed IEC IEEE bus command OUTP AFIX RANG
107. 15 Syntax elements IEC IEEE bus sss 5 12 T O eatloe a pod eesunreceaniasateaeachueuseraees 5 13 Test Eet 10 43 Special PUN EE 10 41 TOS DOWNS Aa ae Ru io 4 64 6 9 Test sequence ee te 10 47 Vector modulatio a a aa Cote ed 10 44 Test setup Standard RE 10 40 vector modulation oooccccccconncccnoconenenononanocononoss 10 40 Text DIAM a a 5 10 Transmission parameters RS 232 C 5 4 5 29 Transmission rate NET 4 57 Trigger ACUVO CITO irr e medius 4 18 4 48 6 52 Galo Signalen 4 18 4 48 pulse modulation ssesss 4 18 4 48 6 52 SWOOD us t RE LUC LR LEM Du 4 51 6 51 TRIGGER TIBDULU aa dee dE 1 10 A A A 5 9 1090 3123 12 RE SOSML R8E SOSMVO3 Ucor level correction ccccccccccccceccessecsessecsessessessess 4 9 6 15 Universal commands esae in 5 27 Unlock eelere gst sche RN 4 61 o NR 1 1 User correction Leo 4 9 6 15 USOFROQUOSL eege ee dE 5 22 USEFREQUESTDI 2 ocn 5 20 V Value CHANGE D M 3 8 leie 3 3 Vector moqUulatiQDi E 4 43 E 6 Data Sheet Supplement RSSOSML B10 High Power Level Range 140 dBm to 23 dBm overrange typ 28 dBm Level accuracy same as R amp S SMLO1 02 03 R amp S SMVO3 standard specification Level frequency response same as R amp S SML01 02 03 R amp S SMVOS standard specification same as R amp S SMLO1
108. 15 03 LF generator Low noise 5 kHz to 3300 MHz Level accuracy preamplifier Gain gt 20 dB Noise figure lt 10 dB LM DC voltage source Setting range 0 to 10 V NGMD35 0117 7127 02 Vector modulation Demodulator for Error vector measurement contained in Error vectorr digital modulations item 2better 1119 5005 03 Impairments FSIQ 3option Modulation frequency K11 for GSM 1057 3392 02 response Arbitrary waveform two channels R amp S AMIQ 1110 2003 02 Vector modulation generator Program rfor generation of data for ARB WinlQSIM Vector modulation simulation of digital generator contained in modulations item 16 Note For some settings of the R amp S SMVO3 the IQCW mode is mentioned To make this mode available Lock Level 1 has to be released Then IQCW can be enabled by selecting the menu item Utilities Debug Debugpage IQCW can always be selected by the IEC IEEE command SOURce DM IQ STA Te IQCW 1147 7621 12 10 39 E 6 Test setups R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Test setups Standard test setup Test setups 1 to 5 see Performance test for the R amp S SMLO3 R amp S SMVO3 Test setup 6 Test equipment Demodulator for digital modulation Table 10 1 item 15 Arbitrary waveform generator Tablel 10 1 item 16 Program for simulation of digital modulations Table 10 1 item 17 Industry standard controller Table 10 1 item 4 Test setup Steuerrechner ARB Generator IEC Bus Demodulator
109. 2 4 14 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Pulse Modulation Option R amp S SML B3 Double Pulse Delay Delay between the two pulses of a double pulse This value is indicated only if Double Pulse State is set to On IEC IEEE bus command SOUR PULS DOUB DEL lus Double Pulse State owitching on off double pulse On Double pulse is switched on Off Single pulse IEC IEEE bus command SOUR PULS DOUB STAT OFF Trigger Mode Selection of trigger mode Auto The pulse generator is triggered automatically The pulse period is as entered under Pulse Period Single The pulse generator is triggered manually The pulse period is determined by the user Ext Single The pulse generator is externally triggered The pulse period is determined by an external signal at the PULSE input Ext Gated The pulse generator is triggered if the gate signal is active IEC IEEE bus command TRIG PULS SOUR AUTO Execute Single Pulse otarts a single pulse This function is displayed and is effective only if Single Mode is selected IEC Bus Befehl TRIG PULS IMM Ext Trigger Slope Selection of active edge of external trigger signal Pos The pulse generator is triggered on the positive edge of the external signal Neg The pulse generator is triggered on the negative edge of the external signal IEC IEEE bus command TRIG PULS SLOP POS Ext Gated Input Polarity Definition of active level of gate signal HIGH or LOW Normal HIGH and Inverse LOW are avai
110. 2 SWE BTIM NORM 1090 3123 12 4 68 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Status Status The R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 has a STATUS page which provides an overview of all instrument settings The settings are displayed in abbreviated form The STATUS page is called by pressing the STATUS key Return to the previous menu is made with the BACK key 100 000 0000 10 0 dem Status Ro Jj meee GPIBIRS23Z Off Off Off Off OR Off Off Off Blank Time Norm Back 4 Fig 4 38 STATUS menu 1090 3123 12 4 69 E 6 R SOSML R amp S SMVO3 Brief Instructions 5 Remote Control Basic Information This chapter provides basic information on remote control for example on the IEC IEEE bus RS 232 C interface interface and device messages command processing status reporting system etc The instrument is equipped with an IEC IEEE bus interface according to standard IEC 625 1 IEEE 488 1 and a RS 232 C interface The connectors are located at the rear of the instrument and permit to connect a controller for remote control The instrument supports the SCPI version 1994 0 Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488 2 and aims at the standardization of device specific commands error handling and the status registers For this section it is assumed that the user has basic knowledge of IEC IEEE bus programming and operation of the controller A description of the interface comma
111. 20 kHz carrier offset Wideband noise Page 10 11 1 GHz in 2 MHz carrier offset Residual FM r m s Page 10 12 at 1 GHz 0 3 to 3 kHz ITU T 0 02 to 23 kHz Residual AM r m s Page 10 12 1147 7621 12 10 34 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Performance test report Cross Min value Actual value Max value Measurement reference tolerance Frequency response Page 10 13 As data sheet at 0 dBm Level Total error for Page 10 14 As data sheet level 120 dBm temperature range 20 to 30 degrees Celsius Output impedance Page 10 14 As data sheet VSWR Setting time Page 10 16 for f gt 100 kHz Non interrupting Page 10 17 level setting Max level Page 10 17 As data Internal modulation generator Level accuracy Page 10 18 at f 1 kHz 3mV 10 mV 100 mV 1V 4 V Freq response to 500 Page 10 18 kHz level 100 mV Frequency accuracy Page 10 19 Total harmonic Page 10 19 distortion f 100 kHz level 1V 4 V termin imped 600 Q Amplitude modulation Modulation depth Page 10 19 at 1 kHz Modulation depth 1 96 30 80 Frequency response Page 10 20 Tot har dist at 1kHz Page 10 21 Modulation depth 30 Modulation depth 80 Synch spurious PhiM Page 10 22 at AM 30 AF 1 kHz 1147 7621 12 10 35 E 6 Performance test R amp S SML R8ESOSMVO3 Measurement tolerance Cross Min value Actual value Max value reference Frequency modulation Deviation error R
112. 200 and 300 which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue see Chapter 9 Section Error Messages Command Error This bit is set if a command is received which is undefined or syntactically not correct An error message with a number between 100 and 200 which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue see Chapter 9 Section Error Messages User Request This bit is set when the LOCAL key is pressed ie when the instrument is switched over to manual control Power On AC supply voltage On This bit is set on switching on the instrument 1090 3123 12 9 20 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 STATus OPERation Register Not impemented STATus QUEStionable Register Not implemented 1090 3123 12 Status Reporting System E 6 Status Reporting System R amp S SML R8E SOSMVOS Use of Status Reporting System To make effective use of the status reporting system the information collected there must be transferred to the controller and further processed There are several methods to this effect which are described in the following For detailed examples see chapter 7 Programming Examples Service Request Making Use of Hierarchy Structure Under certain conditions the instrument can send a service request SRQ to the controller The service request normally triggers an interrupt at the controller to which the control program can respond with correspon
113. 6 R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 TRIGger TRIGger1 2 SWEep SOURce AUTO SINGIe EXTernal The command specifies the trigger source The naming of the parameters directly corresponds to the different settings with manual control SCPI uses other designations for the parameters the instrument accepts as well These designations are to be preferred if compatibility is important The following table provides an overview R amp S SML R amp S SMVO03 designation SCPI designation Command with manual control AUTO IMMediate Mode Auto SINGle BUS Mode Single or Step EXTernal EXTernal Mode Ext Trig Single or Ext Trig Step AUTO The trigger is free running e the trigger requirement is permanently met As soon as a sweep has been terminated the next one is started SINGle Triggering is effected by means of IEC bus commands TRIG SWE IMM or TRG If SOUR SWE MODE is set to STEP a step in the case of the AUTO setting a complete sweep is executed EXTernal Triggering is effected from outside via the TRIGGER socket or by the GET command via IEC IEEE bus The action triggered depends on the setting of the sweep mode as in the case of SINGle Example TRIG SWE SOUR AUTO RST value is SING TRIGger PULSe This node contains all commands to trigger the pulse generator Option R amp S SML B3 The commands are only valid for TRIGger1 TRIGger PULSe EGATed POLarity NORMal INVerted The command defines the active level of the ga
114. 6 hierarchical arrangement sss 6 1 a eae ieee nealte 5 7 PARAMS eege 5 10 EE 5 6 POCOS SIM Mm 5 13 A 5 5 1090 3123 12 Index FOCOQINUON EE 5 14 ee e 5 15 selling command GE 5 5 A ea 5 7 Ee 5 6 structure of command lines essesssus 5 9 SVNCHIONIZQUON a 5 15 7 3 SR A vince aieawiviakaiiieieats 5 12 universal commande 5 27 Command Emor Dlls i te o tac ob toad tus 5 20 Command lines Ee 5 9 Common command oio Er eoa teca oes 6 3 CONDON Bar iii aca ot de ed 5 17 Control signal pulse modulaton 4 17 Coupling external input AM seen 4 14 6 14 external input MI 4 15 6 19 external input MI 4 16 6 25 Crosshatch symbol 9 5 11 5 12 Cursor leie 3 1 MONTECUESO u naar 3 1 Data TOlnat RS DEE 4 57 sel IE EEE DIS ee 5 14 Data bit RS 232 C nun 5 29 DC offset compensation 4 15 6 7 DEE E 9 13 Decimal DO EE 1 6 5 10 Delay double DUISC 2s 2 ea 6 31 pulse modulatio 2 4 17 4 47 6 31 Delete Ee 3 8 NST ODIY a en O A 3 13 Deviation A paces oaov een 4 15 6 19 A A er A tet te nah 4 16 6 25 Device model IEC IEEE bus esses 5 13 DEVICE TOSDOLI EE 5 5 Device Dependent Error bt 5 20 IIE CUS eene 3 1 Disable A e AN 4 58 Bep EE 3 1 Eeer 4 55 unes Km 4 63 operating hours counter EEN 4 65 ET Ee ege 4 65 Software version 4 65 voltage of test points sse 4 64 Double pulse
115. 8 bytes Example a 125 345678E6 b 127 876543E6 CALL IBWRT generator SOURCE CORRECTION CSET DATA FREQ 216 MKDS a MKDS b ff in the command string introduces the binary block 2 indicates that 2 digits specifying the length will follow next 16 is the length of the binary block in bytes here 2 double precision floating point numbers of 8 bytes each The binary data follow Since the function IBWRT requires a text string MKD is used for type conversion The following ASCII format has the same effect CALL IBWRT generator OQUBCETCORRECTIONSCSBIZDATA PBREO 1254945679506 127 070542556 1090 3123 12 9 11 E 6 Structure and Syntax of Device Messages R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Overview of Syntax Elements Following is an overview of syntax elements E PIED El The colon separates the key words of a command In a command line the separating semicolon marks the uppermost command level The semicolon separates two commands of a command line It does not alter the path The comma separates several parameters of a command The question mark forms a query The asterix marks a common command Quotation marks introduce a string and terminate it ASCI character introduces block data A white space ASCII Code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank separates header and parameter 1090 3123 12 5 12 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Instrument Model and Comman
116. ACK key or mark selection Back using rotary knob and then press rotary knob The menu cursor wraps back to the next higher menu level Quick Selection of Menu QUICK SELECT The keys of the QUICK SELECT control field are used to call selected menus quickly by one keystroke Store menus Establish the desired operating status of the current menu Press ASSIGN key gt Press MENU1 or MENU2 key The current menu is stored as menu or menu2 That is to say 2 menus can be stored in total Call menus gt Press MENU1 or MENU2 key Menu or menu2 stored is displayed Exactly the operating status which was current at the point of time of storing is reconstructed 1090 3123 12 3 4 E 6 R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Basic Operating Steps Use of FREQ and LEVEL Keys RF frequency and RF level can be set without menu operation as well using direct keys FREQ and LEVEL FREQ LEVEL keys gt Press FREQ or LEVEL key The frequency or the level indication in the header field of the display is marked The current menu at the display is maintained Alter the value via a value input or the rotary knob Press BACK or SELECT key The menu cursor wraps to the position marked last in the menu Use of RF ON OFF and MOD ON OFF RF signal and modulation can be switched on off without menu operation as well using keys RF ON OFF or MOD ON OFF cf Sections RF ON OFF Key and IMOD ON OFF Key
117. ARI area code BK DK BK BKDK Example Broadcasting code is selected Area code is selected Broadcasting code and area code are selected SOUR STER TYPE BKDK RST value is DK SOURce STEReo ARI TYPE STATe ON OFF owitching on off ARI area code and braodcasting code Example SOUR STER ARI STAT ON RST value is OFF SOURce STEReo AUDio The commands to set the frequency of LF generator the operating mode L R L R L R LzR and the prempasis are under this node Unter diesem Knoten befinden sich die SOURce STEReo AUDio MODE LEFT RIGHt RELeft REMLeft RNELeft Selection of the operating mode LEFT Audio signal only in the left hand channel RIGHtAudio signal only in the right hand channel RELeft REMLeft RNEL eft Example 1090 3123 12 Audio signals of same frequency and phase in both channels Audio signals of same frequency but opposite phase in both channels Different and independent audio signals in both channels not possible with internal LG generator SOUR STER AUD MODE REL RST value is REL 6 35 E 6 SOURce STEReo R amp S SML RESOSMVOS SOURce STEReo AUDio FRE ency 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz Input value of the frequency of the LF generator Example SOUR STER AUD 3 kHz RST value is 1 kHz SOURce STEReo AUDio PREemphasis 50 us 75 us Selection of the preemphasis Example SOUR STER AUD PRE 75 us RST value is 50 us SOURce STEReo AUDio PREemphasis ST
118. ATe ON OFF Switching on of preemphasis Example SOUR STER AUD PRE STAT ON RST value is OFF SOURce STEReo EXTernal IMPedance 600 Ohm 100 kOhm Selection of the input impedances of the analog audio inputs and R Both input impedances are switched simultaneously Example SOUR STER EXT IMP 600 Ohm RST value is 100 kOhm SOURce STEReo DEViation 0 to 80 kHz Setting value the frequency deviation of the stereo signal Example SOUR STER 50 kHz RST value is 40 kHz SOURce STEReo DlRect String Command to send the RDS setting strings to the RDS Stereo coder Example SOURESTERSDIR String SOURce STEReo PlLot Commands for pilot tone settings are under this node SOURce STEReo PlLot DEViation O to 10 kHz Setting value of the frequency deviation of the pilot tone Example SOUR STER PIL 5 kHz RST value is 6 75 kHz SOURce STEReo PlLot PHAse 5to 5 DEG oetting value of phase of the pilot tone Example SOUR STER PIL PHA 3 DEG RST value is 0 DEG SOURce STEReo PlLot STATe ON OFF Switching on off the pilot tone Example SOUR STER PIL STAT ON RST value is OFF 1090 3123 12 6 36 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 SOURce STEReo SOURce STEReo RDS Commands to the basis RDS functions which can also be operated manually are under this node SOURce STEReo RDS DATaset DS1 DS2 DS3 DS4 DS5 Selection and activation of the RDS data sets DS1 to DS 5 Example SOUR STER
119. BK traffic announcement identification and area identification Example Command STEReo DIRect ARI ID 0 Deactivates the ARI identification Query STEReo DIRect ARI ID Response O BIN Description Defines and sends or queries binary test patterns The BIN command causes the Stereo RDS Coder to send periodic binary bit patterns instead of RDS data Command BIN x Value range Oto4 0 binary mode OFF 1 00000000 2 11111111 3 01010101 4 11001100 Example Command 1090 3123 12 STEReo DlIRect BIN 2 The binary test pattern is set to 2 so that only 1s are transmitted 4 23 E 6 Stereo Modulation Option R amp S SML B5 BK CT Note Description Command Query Response Value range Example Description Command Query Response Value range Example R amp S SML RESOSMVOS Sets the ARI area identification BK x BK X A F Command STEReo DIRect BK E The ARI area identification is set to E Query STEReo DIRect BK Response E Sets and activates transmission of the real time clock CT XX YY ZZ TT MM JJ XX hour YY minute ZZ second TT day MM month JJ year CT XX YY ZZ TT MM JJ 00 00 00 01 01 00 bis 23 59 59 31 12 85 ASCII coded decimal numbers Command STEReo DlIRect CT 20 30 59 01 08 03 The real time clock is set to 20 30 59 and 1 August 2003 Query STEReo DlRect CT Re
120. C If parameter AC is selected only the AC content is fed through in the case of DC the DC as well as the AC content Key words in square brackets can be omitted when composing the header cf Chapter 5 Section Optional Keywords The full command length must be accepted by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standards Parameters in square brackets can optionally be incorporated in the command or omitted as well Parameters in braces can optionally be incorporated in the command either not at all once or several times 6 2 E 6 R SOSML R amp S SMVO3 Common Commands Common Commands The common commands are taken from the IEEE 488 2 IEC 625 2 standard Same commands have the same effect on different devices The headers of these commands consist of an asterisk followed by three letters Many common commands refer to the status reporting system which is described in detail in Chapter 5 Table 6 1 Common Commands mee Geng um les LONE EN RN pe ooo f RN pe CS ECO mem ps mem w p KM RN perp CS me OO w m CELL m em ww m UU wem D ew wm w pe EEE mw En BE CTI m p wem pu CLS CLEAR STATUS sets the status byte STB the standard event register ESR and the EVENt part of the QUEStionable and the OPERation register to zero The command does not alter the mask and transition parts of the registers It clears the output buffer ESE 0 to 255 EVENT STATUS ENABLE sets the event status
121. C RST value is AC 1090 3123 12 6 19 E 6 SOURce FM R amp S SML RESOSMVOS SOURce FM INTernal The settings for the internal LF generator are effected under this node Here the same hardware is set for AM FM M and SOURce2 This means that e g the following commands are coupled to each other and have the same effect SOUR AM INT FREQ SOOURSEMSTINTSBERBEO SOURZPMFINTZEREO SOUR2 FREQ CW SOURce FM INTernal FREQuency 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz The command sets the modulation frequency Example SOUR FM INT FREQ 10kHz RST value is 1 kHz SOURce FM SOURce EXTernal INTernal TTONe The command selects the modulation source An external and an internal modulation source can be specified at the same time cf example Example SOUR FM SOUR INT EXT RST value is INT RST value is INT SOURce FM STATe ON OFF The command switches the frequency modulation on or off Example SOUR FM STAT OFF RST value is OFF SOURce FM BANDwidth STANdard WIDE The command sets the bandwidth for FM STANdard and WIDE are available Example SOUR FM BAND WIDE RST value is STAN 1090 3123 12 6 20 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 SOURce FREQuency SOURce FREQuency Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands for the frequency settings of the RF source including the SWeeps Command Parameters SOURce FREQuency CENTer 9 KHz Fmax Fmax depending on the model CW FIXed 9 kHz Fmax Fmax dependi
122. DIL Ee een 5 29 PassWord rM 6 49 E ces on eo been baue 5 6 ere 10 1 EE 10 49 Performance Test REDON ARMEN ER Nd 10 34 Performance test extension for R amp S SMVOS3 10 38 EEN 4 17 4 47 Phase modulation PM ooo 20 4 16 6 25 6 34 Physical qUahntitlBs istoc ostia osos iA 5 9 PM TINO UY TEN 4 16 6 26 COUPIO GEN 4 16 6 25 deV A O nr 4 16 6 25 MOQUNV nina 4 16 6 26 Polarity DUISQ it EE 4 17 4 47 6 12 6 30 Power TUSES 2 02a eier 1 3 POWER DA Di ds 5 20 EE 1 3 Power supply Connect 1 11 PPE parallel poll enable register 5 20 Preset instrument seftmgsl seus 1 4 Preset instrument states esses 6 49 Programming Examples eese eene nnns 7 1 e e 6 49 PFTRADSIOD Md a as 5 17 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Pulse delay EE 4 17 4 47 6 31 CTO A A tires er 4 17 4 47 6 31 left EE 4 17 4 47 6 32 ee EE 4 18 6 31 PUESE IPU Ae 1 10 4 18 6 52 Pulse modulation eese 4 17 6 30 Pulse polarity oor more euis 4 17 4 47 6 12 6 30 Pulse source selection soe at rer cori Leer ta Saat De 4 17 4 47 6 12 PULSE VIDEO output sees 1 10 4 47 Q QUAOI ATA pi EE 4 44 QUERES nlt at N Ei EE C 5 5 Query HERE 5 23 A utu wee orae 5 9 Qe ENO EE 5 20 TEEN ee ine le ces 5 12 QUEStionable Status sum b 5 19 QUICK SEIECHON EEN 3 4
123. DULATION gt PhiM gt PhiM DEVIATION 5 rad PhiM SOURCE LFGen LFGenFreq 1 kHz Settings on the test receiver Demodulation PhiM Detector Peak Activate THD amp SINAD Measurement Read offthe THD value from the test receiver and use the formula 1 k e 100 10 2 to convert to the total harmonic distortion 1090 3123 12 10 27 E 6 Test sequence R amp S SML RESEOSMVOS Pulse modulation option R amp S SML B3 On off ratio Test setup Settings on the R amp S SMLO1 Settings on the R amp S SML02 03 R amp S SMVO3 Settings on the test receiver Measurement Settings on R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 oettings on the test receiver Measurement Test setup 1 spectrum analyzer mode LEVEL 10 dBm FREQ 1000 MHz MODULATION gt PULSE gt PULSE SOURCE OFF LEVEL 10 dBm FREQ in addition to R amp S SMLO1 test frequency 2000 MHz 3300 MHz MODULATION gt PULSE gt PULSE SOURCE OFF Center frequency test frequency Span 20 kHz Reference level 10 dBm Marker Peak Read off the ON level from the spectrum analyzer and make a note of it MODULATION gt PULSE gt PULSE SOURCE EXT Make sure the pulse input is not connected Reference level 50 dBm Switch on average 5 samples Marker Peak Read off the OFF level from the spectrum analyzer and make a note of it The on off ratio is calculated from level ON level OFF Repeat the measurement for all test frequencies
124. E AUTO RST value is AUTO 1090 3123 12 6 38 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 SOURce SWEep SOURce SWEep FREQuency RUNNing The command set a queries whether a sweep is being performed Example SOUR SWE FREQ BUNN Note This query may cause distortions in the course of the sweep depending on the frequency of checkimng and dwell time SOURce SWEep FREQuency SPACing LiNear LOGarithmic The command selects whether the steps have linear or logarithmic spacings Example SOUR SWE SPAC LIN RST value is LIN SOURce SWEep FREQuency STEP LINear 0 to 1 GHz 0 to 2 GHZ 0 to 3 GHz R amp S SML The command sets the step width with the linear sweep A change of SPAN does not result in a change of STEP LIN Keyword LIN can be omitted then the command conforms to SCPI regulations see example Example SOUR SWE STEP 1MHz RST value is 1 MHz SOURce SWEep FREQuency STEP LOGarithmic 0 01 to 100 PCT The command indicates the step width factor for logarithmic sweeps The next frequency value of a sweep is calculated according to new frequency previous frequency STEP LOG x previous frequency if STARt lt STOP STEP LOG indicates the fraction of the previous frequency by which this is increased for the next sweep step Usually STEP LOG is indicated in percent A change of STARt or STOP does not result in a change of STEP LOG Example SOUR SWE STEP LOG 10PCT RST value is 1 PCT SO
125. E bus command ABOR Exec Single Sweep Starts a single sweep This function is displayed and is effective only if Single Mode is selected IEC IEEE bus command TRIG 1090 3123 12 4 53 E 6 Sweep R amp S SML RESOSMVOS LF Sweep Settings for LF sweeps can be made in the Sweep LFGen menu Menu selection Sweep LFGen 100 000 0000 mz 10 0 dem Sweeplroen fon Start Freq 1 0000 kHz Stop Freq 100 0000 kHz Current Freq 1 00000 kHz Spacing Lin step Lin 1 0000 kHz 13 0 ms Of Fig 4 21 oweep LFGen menu Start Freq Input value of start frequency IEC IEEE bus command SOUR2 FREQ STAR 1kHz Stop Freq Input value of stop frequency IEC IEEE bus command SOUR2 FREQ STOP 100kHz Current Freq Display of current frequency value In Step mode input value of frequency Spacing Selection of linear or logarithmic sweep IEC IEEE bus command SOUR2 SWE SPAC LIN Step Lin Input value of step size IEC IEEE bus command SOUR2 SWE STEP LIN 1kHz Dwell Input value of dwell time per step IEC IEEE bus command SOUR2 SWE DWEL 15ms Mode Selection of sweep mode see Operating Modes IEC IEEE bus command SOUR2 FREQ MODE SWE SOUR2 SWE MODE AUTO TRIG2 SOUR SING Reset Sweep Sets the start frequency IEC IEEE bus command ABOR Exec Single Sweep Starts a single sweep This function is displayed and is effective only if Single Mode is selected IEC IEEE bus command TRIG 1090 3123 12 4 54 E 6 R amp S SML R amp E
126. EM ceexetewees Reading Out INS trulemt Sebas c ee RFfrequency SPACES 20 Provide text variables with 20 characters CALL IBWRT generator FREQ Request frequency setting CALL IBRD generator RFfrequency Read value RFlevel SPACES 20 Provide text variables with 20 characters CALL IBWRT generator POW Request level setting CALL IBRD generator RFlevelS Read value AMmodulationdepth SPACES 20 Provide text variables with 20 characters CALL IBWRT generator AM Request setting of modulation depth CALL IBRD generator AMmodulationdepth Read value AMfrequency SPACES 20 Provide text variables with 20 characters CALL IBWRT generators AM INT FREQ Request setting of modulation frequency CALL IBRD generator AMfrequency Read value Stepwidth SPACES 20 Provide text variables with Z0 characters CALL IBWRT generator FREQ STEP Request step width setting CALL IBRD generator Stepwidth Read value REN eme Display Values On thessctrecen EE PRINT RF frequency H RFfrequencys PRINT RF level RFlevelS PRINT AM modulationdepth AMmodulationdepthS PRINT AM frequency AMfrequenzS PRINT Step width stepwidth REM X X kCkCkCKCKCKCKCK X CKCK CK CK C ECKE CK CIC KK KK KK kk kk kk kk KICK CK KK KK KK KICK I KAR 1090 3123 12 1 2 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Programming Examples Command synchronization The possibilities f
127. EVENt part indicates whether an event has occurred since it was read the last time it is the memory of the CONDition part It indicates only those events that were passed on by the edge filters The EVENt part is continuously updated by the instrument This part can be read only Upon reading its contents is set to zero In linguistic usage the EVENt part is often treated as equivalent to the complete register The ENABle part determines whether the associated EVEN bit contributes to the sum bit see below Each bit of the EVENt part is ANDed with the associated ENABle bit symbol amp The results of all logical operations of this part are passed on to the sum bit via an OR function symbol ENABle Bit 0 the associated EVEN bit does not contribute to the sum bit ENABle Bit 1 if the associated EVENT bit is 1 the sum bit is set to 1 as well This part can be written to and read Reading does not affect its contents As mentioned above the sum bit is obtained from the EVENt part and the ENABle part for each register The result is entered as a bit of the CONDition part into the next higher register The instrument automatically generates a sum bit for each register It is thus ensured that an event for example a PLL that has not locked can produce a service request throughout all hierarchical levels Note The service request enable SRE register defined in IEEE 488 2 can be taken as the ENABle part of the STB if th
128. Edit List Selection of editing functions for list editing When this item is selected a pop up menu with the following editing functions opens see section Edit List Insert Insertion of elements into a list Fill Filing of a list with elements Edit View Editing of individual elements of a list Delete Deletion of elements of a list If the list is empty only selection Insert is available 1090 3123 12 3 7 E 6 List Editor R amp S SML RESOSMVOS Select List Mark the desired list using the rotary knob see Fig 3 4 Press the SELECT key or the rotary knob The selected list is included in the instrument setup The selection window is closed The selected list is displayed under Select List Selection Select List 100 0000000 mi 10 0 dem ETE LevelUCorf Select List O100 Licor 0000 Ucorz 0000 UCears 0000 UCearetOO000 Ulboro 0000 Licores 0000 UCorr 0000 tors 0000 UCGor 0000 Fig 3 4 Select List window UCorO The currently selected list in this case UcorO is marked in the selection window 0100 The length of the list in this case 100 elements is indicated in the column right of the list designation Delete List Mark the desired list using the rotary knob see Fig 3 5 Press the SELECT key or the rotary knob The following query will appear Are you sure Press SELECT to confirm BACK to cancel Press the SELECT key or the rotary knob The contents of the list will be deleted
129. F 1 GHz AF 1 kHz Deviation 100 kHz Tot harm dist RF 1 GHz AF 1 kHz Deviation 500 kHz FM freq response Bandwidth standard 10 Hz to 100 kHz Spurious AM in FM AF 1 kHz dev 40 kHz Stereo modulation Crosstalk attenuation AF 1 kHz S N ratio AF 1kHz unweighted r m s weighted r m s Tot harm dist AF 1kHz Phase modulation Deviation error RF 1 GHz AF 1 kHz Deviation 5 rad Tot harm dist RF 1 GHz AF 1 kHz Deviation 5 rad PhiM freq response Bandwidth standard 10 Hz to 100 kHz Bandwidth broad 10 Hz to 500 kHz Pulse modulation option R amp S SML B3 On off ratio Rise time fall time Video crosstalk 1147 7621 12 Page 10 22 Page 10 23 Page 10 23 Page 10 24 Page 10 25 Page 10 25 Page 10 25 Page 10 26 Page 10 27 Page 10 27 Page 10 28 Page 10 29 Page 10 29 4 78 10 36 80 20 As data sheet E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Performance test report Cross Min value Actual value Max value Measurement reference tolerance Stereo modulation option R amp S SML B5 Frequency response Page 10 30 As data sheet Tot harm dist and Page 10 30 As data sheet channel separation Signal to noise ratio Page 10 31 As data sheet MPX deviation Page 10 32 Pilot tone level RDS subcarrier Preemphasis Page 10 32 Digital interface Page 10 33 S P Dif RDS function Page 10 33 1147 7621 12 10 37 E 6 Preliminary remark R amp
130. FFilter MEASure LEVel STATe numeric ON OFF LFGenlevel MEASure LPReset MEASure MAINIoop MEASure MUL Tfilter MEASure ROSCillator DATA MAXimum MINimum STORe VMODulation MEASure ONCE CALibration LEVel STATe The command switches level correction ON or OFF Example CAL LEV STAT ON RST value is ON 1090 3123 12 6 6 E 6 R SOSML R amp S SMVO3 CALibration CALibration ATTenuator STATe The command switches ON or OFF the correction values of the attenuator Example CAL ATT STAT ON RST value is ON CALibration LPReset MEASure The command calibrates Level Preset 0 is returned for O K and 1 in case of an error Example CAL LPR CALibration LFGenlevel MEASure The command calibrates the level of the LF generator 0 is returned for O K and 1 in case of an error Example CAL LFG CALibration HARMfilter MEASure The command calibrates the Harmonic Filters 0 is returned for O K and 1 in case of an error Example CAL HARM CALibration MULTfilter MEA Sure The command calibrates the Multiplier Filters 0 is returned for O K and 1 in case of an error Example CAL MULT CALibration IFFilter MEASure The command calibrates the IF Filters 0 is returned for O K and 1 in case of an error Example CAL IFF CALibration MAINloop MEASure The command calibrates the Mainloop 0 is returned for O K and 1 in case of an error Examp
131. FREQ ERAN ON RST value is OFF 1090 3123 12 6 22 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 SOURce MODulation SOURce MODulation Subsystem Command Parameters SOURce MODulation ALL STATe ON OFF SOURce MODulation ALL STATe ON OFF This command deactivates all types of modulation with OFF All analog vector digital digital standard and ARB modulations are thus set to OFF if they were switched on before This command can be used before switching on a new type of modulation in order to avoid the error message settings conflict since only one type of modulation can be operated at the same time The modulation used last is activated again with ON same function as MOD ON OFF key This command triggers an event and hence has no RST value and no query Example SOUR MODESTAT OFF 1090 3123 12 6 23 E 6 SOURce PHASe R amp S SML SOURce PHASe Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to adjust phase between the RF output signal and a reference signal of the same frequency nu M aj SOURce PHASe 360 360 DEG UP DOWN DEG REFerence STATe ON OFF STEP 360 360 DEG DEG SOURce PHASe 360 to 360 DEG UP DOWN Setting value of the phase of the output signal with respect to a reference signal of the same frequency Phase values from 360 to 360 are possible Alternatively the actual setting value can be varied by UP or DOWN steps The command SOURCE PHASe STEP specifies the
132. GenFreq 1 kHz Demodulation PhiM Detector Peak Filter 20 Hz to 23 kHz for the moment measurement must still be carried out with 50 Hz 100 kHz since filters are not yet implemented Read off the phase deviation from the test receiver Note Since the R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 has a purely digital deviation generator it is adequate to test its functionality by taking a measurement at one deviation setting and one frequency only 1090 3123 12 10 26 E 6 R amp S SML R S amp GSMV03 Test sequence PhiM frequency response Test setup Testsetup 1 demodulator mode oettings on R amp S SML LEVEL 0 dBm R amp S SMV03 FREQ 1 GHz MODULATION gt PhiM gt PhiM DEVIATION 0 5 rad FM SOURCE LFGen LFGenFreg 10 Hz to 100 kHz 500 kHz PhiM BANDWIDTH STANDARD WIDE Demodulation PhiM Detector Peak Settings on the test receiver Measurement Determine the modulation frequency response by varying the generator frequency of the built in LF generator in the PhiM menu from 10 Hz to 100 kHz 500 kHz The modulation frequency response is the difference between the lowest and highest measured deviation Note Since the frequency response is the same in FM and PhiM the standard PhiM loop can be measured in the same way as the FM frequency response PhiM total harmonic distortion Test setup Testsetup 1 demodulator mode Settings on R amp S SML LEVEL 0 dBm R amp S SMVOS FREQ 1075 MHz MO
133. Hz Back 4 Fig 4 17 LF Output menu preset setting State Switching on off LF output This parameter has no effect on the modulation settings IEC IEEE bus command OUTP2 ON Voltage Input value of output voltage of LF output A peak voltage is to be entered here IEC IEEE bus command OUTP2 VOLT IV LFGen Freq Input value of frequency of internal modulation generator IEC IEEE bus command SOUR2 FREQ 3kHz 1090 3123 12 4 46 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 PULSE VIDEO Output PULSE VIDEO Output The pulse generator output or video output is only available with Option R amp S SML B3 pulse generator cf Section Pulse Generator Menu selection Pulse Output Pulse Outp Polarity Pulse Generator Settings Pulse Period Pulse width Pulse Delay Double Pulse State Pulse Trigger Settings Trigger Mode Ext Trigger Slope Ext Gated Input Polarity Normal Back 4 Fig 4 18 Pulse Output menu Pulse Output Source Switching on off pulse source Off PulseGen or Video can be selected IEC IEEE bus command OUTES SOUR OFF Pulse Output Polarity Selection of polarity of pulse signal Normal or Inverse can be selected IEC IEEE bus command OUTP3 POL PULS NORM Pulse Period Input value of pulse period IEC IEEE bus command SOUR PULS PER 10us Pulse Width Input value of pulse width IEC IEEE bus command SOUR PULS WIDT lus Pulse Delay Input value of single pulse delay This value is indicated only if Doub
134. INT 1090 3123 12 9 9 E 6 Structure and Syntax of Device Messages R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Parameters The following examples are general they are not necessarly available with R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Most commands require a parameter to be specified Parameters must be separated from the header by a white space Permissible parameters are numerical values Boolean parameters text character strings and block data The parameter type required for a given command and the permissible range of values are specified in the command description Numerical values Special numerical values MIN MAX DEF UP DOWN INF NINF NAN Boolean Parameters Text 1090 3123 12 Numerical values can be entered in any form ie with sign decimal point and exponent Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down The mantissa may comprise up to 255 characters the exponent must be in the value range 32 000 to 32 000 The exponent is preceded by an E or e Specifying the exponent alone is not permissible In the case of physical quantities the unit can be entered Permissible unit prefixes are G giga MA mega MOHM and MHz being also permissible K kilo M milli U micro and N nano If no unit is entered the basic unit is used Example SOURce FREQuency 1 5 kHz SOURce FREQuency 1 5E3 The texts MINimum MAXimum DEFault UP and DOWN are interpreted as special numerical values In the ca
135. If the query is answered by pressing the BACK key the contents of the list will be retained The selection window is automatically closed upon answering the query Selection Delete List 100 000 0000 mHz 10 0 dem Llene Cor Delete List Dono Urn OO00 Uber 0000 Ubors OUO Cord 0000 UlearsQ000 Ubore 0000 UC or 0000 UCers 0000 UCcor3 0000 Back 4 Fig 3 5 Delete List window 1090 3123 12 3 8 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 List Editor Edit List When Edit List is selected a pop up menu with the editing functions opens Insert editing function see Fig 3 6 The Insert function inserts a desired number of elements with constant or linearly increasing decreasing values ahead of the element with the indicated start index All elements already existing from the start index are shifted so that they come at the end of the range of elements to be inserted Elements are inserted in a list according to the following procedure When Insert has been selected the menu cursor is on the Insert At menu item gt Press the SELECT key or the rotary knob The menu cursor is on the value for At gt Vary the index value by means of the rotary knob or enter an index value using the numerical keys and the ENTER key Press the SELECT key or the rotary knob The menu cursor is on the value for Range Vary the Range value by means of the rotary knob or enter a value using the numerical keys and the ENTER key
136. LIN is changed the value of POINts valid for SPAC LIN also changes according to the formula defined under POINts A change of SPAN does not cause a change of STEP LIN Keyword LIN can be omitted then the command conforms to SCPI regulation see example Example SOUR2 SWE STEP 10kHz RST value is 1 kHz SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency STEP LOGarithmic 0 01 to 100PCT This command defines the step width factor for logarithmic sweeps The next frequency value of a sweep is calculated as follows if STARt STOP New frequency previous frequency STEP LOG x previous frequency STEP LOG therefore indicates the fraction of the previous frequency by which that frequency is increased for the next sweep step STEP LOG is usually indicated in percent with the suffix PCT having to be used explicitly If STEP LOG is changed the value of POINts valid for SPACing LOGarithmic also changes according to the formula stated under POINts A change of STARt or STOP does not result in a change of STEP LOGarithmic Example SOUR2 SWE STEP LOG 5PCT RST value is 1 PCT SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency RUNNing The command set a queries whether a sweep is being performed Example SOUR2 SWE FREQ RUNN Note This query may cause distortions in the course of the sweep depending on the frequency of checkimng and dwell time 1090 3123 12 6 44 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 STATus STATus System This system contains the commands for t
137. LO CH ONT sciet ad etat aia 3 4 e T 4 69 EE 3 4 SUBIDO V aea ese Siete ee 3 15 3 16 SWEED UJ TQ EE 4 51 e EE 4 53 Sweeps E GE 4 54 A 4 55 E 6 Index BITTE SEEN ADO ia les 4 68 Utilities C allD ii laine ea oe 4 62 Utilities Diag Config 4 63 Utilities Diag Param esses 4 65 Utilities Diag TPoint ecce 4 64 Utilities DISDIaV ie neue 4 55 EE 4 67 leede ee 4 61 DES Rel OS e e dec RU 4 59 Utilities SM il aaa 4 56 Utilities System Language 4 58 Utilities System RS232 sss 4 57 Utilities System Security sss 4 58 Utile S KEE 4 66 VEG TORMOD RE 4 43 Moni CU ES A 3 1 Message OVEN COU 1 3 Messages device MESSI vostre reap aed hub 5 5 interface messages eee nennen nennen 0 5 Minimum value commande 5 9 5 10 MOD CODI acia EN 4 14 4 15 4 16 leet see een 1 8 Modulation AM ee 4 14 6 13 Eet 4 15 6 17 6 19 A ees 4 43 incompatible modulation types 1 c cceececssseneeeeeesaees 4 13 INPUTS EM 4 11 overview of modulation types ccscsccescetsetseseseeseeees 4 11 A MM im dta 4 16 6 25 6 34 A ee 4 17 6 30 Vector 2a een 4 43 Modulation depth AM een 4 14 6 13 Modulation source gt neuen aa 4 11 MONA nee ee E 4 11 Modulation types SWIICHING ON OR au 4 67 MEERE 4 20 4 22 4 23 dup cede D M M AD cla ice MM M E 4 11 E OR a
138. LOW only lower value querable Input value of step size of level variation via rotary knob The RF level is varied by the entered step size if Knob Step is set to User IEC IEEE bus command SOUR POW STEP 1 Decimal The variation step size corresponds to the position of the digit cursor User User defined the variation step size is as entered under Knob Step User only in dB IEC IEEE bus command SOUR POW UP SOUR POW DOWN The RF level is always in decremented by the given step value no special switching to Knob otep User Selection of resolution of level display 0 1 dB The resolution of the level display is 0 1 dB 0 01dB The resolution of the level display is 0 01 dB oelection of status to be assumed by RF output after power up of the instrument RF Off The RF output is switched off Previous Setting The RF output assumes the status active before switch off IEC IEEE bus command OUTP PON OFF Off Normal setting The stored RF level is loaded too when instrument settings are loaded with the RCL key IEC IEEE bus command SOUR POW RCL INCL On The stored RF level is not loaded when instrument settings are loaded ie the current level setting is maintained IEC IEEE bus command SOUR POW RCL EXCL Off After preset the RF state is Off On After preset the RF state is Off IEC IEEE bus command 4 4 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 RF Level Level Offset On the R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 it
139. MODULATION gt AM gt AM SOURCE EXT sinewave generator setting 1 Vs The modulation frequency response is the difference between the highest and lowest modulation depth 10 20 E 6 R amp S SML R S amp GSMV03 Test sequence AM total harmonic distortion Test setup Testsetup 1 demodulator mode Settings on the R amp S LEVEL SMLO1 2 1 dBm 6 dBm with R amp S SML B10 16 dBm FREQ 100 kHz 5 MHz 5 1 MHz 76 MHz 100 MHz 200 MHz 500 MHz 800 MHz 1100 MHz MODULATION gt AM gt AM DEPTH 30 80 AM SOURCE LFGen LFGenFreq 1 kHz Settings on the R amp S LEVEL SML02 03 R amp S SMVO3 0 1 dBm 6 dBm with R amp S SML B10 16 dBm FREQ in addition to the test frequencies for R amp S SMLO1 gt 5 MHz 2000 MHz 2200 MHz 2800 MHz 3000 MHz MODULATION gt AM gt AM DEPTH 30 80 AM SOURCE LFGen LFGenFreq 1 kHz Settings with option B3 FREQ only test frequencies gt 10 MHz Settings on the test receiver Demodulation AM Detector Peak Activate THD amp SINAD Measurement gt Read off the THD value from the test receiver and use the formula k e 100 HD 10 20 to convert to the total harmonic distortion With settings of 2 1 dBm R amp S SML02 03 0 1 dBm with deviation 30 and 6 dBm with deviation 80 9o simply measure across the frequency range 1090 3123 12 10 21 E 6 Test sequence R amp S SML RESOSMVOS Spurious PhiM in AM Test setup gt Test setup
140. O3 Settings on R amp S SMVO3 VECTORMOD STATE IQCW FREQ Test frequencies ATT FIX Test frequencies 100 kHz 5 1 MHZ fmax 1211 MHz 2200 MHz 3300 MHz LEVEL 3 1 dBm LEVEL LEVEL ATTENUATOR MODE FIXED Measurement See Performance test R amp S SMLO3 R amp S SMVO3 1147 7621 12 10 43 E 6 Test sequence R amp S SML RESOSMVOS Vector modulation Input impedance VSWR Test equipment Test setup for output reflection factor Performance test R amp S SML 03 R amp S SMVO3 Test setup gt The test port of the bridge is connected to the or Q input instead of the RF output Measurement gt Settings on R amp S SMVO3 Level 0 dBm Carrier frequency 900 MHz Vector modulation on Settings on signal generator Level 10 dBm Carrier frequency 5 10 and 30 MHz gt Screw the VSWR bridge off and measure the level as reference level gt Connect the test port of the VSWR bridge to input and measure the level again gt The voltage ratio of test level to reference level is the input reflection coefficient r of the input gt From this the voltage standing wave ratio VSWR can be calculated as follows VSWR 1 r 1 r gt Repeat the measurement for the Q input Maximum level Test equipment Power meter Table 5 1 item 8 DC voltage source Table 5 1 item 12 Test setup Connect the power meter Table 5 1 item 8 to the RF output Connect DC voltage source to the or Q input Measure
141. OMM SER SBIT RST value is 1 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial CONTrol RTS ON IBFull RFR The commands sets the hardware handshake RST has no influence on this parameter ON Interface line RTS is always active IBFull RFR Input Buffer Full Ready For Receiving Interface line RTS remains active as long as the instrument is ready to receive data Example SYST COMM SER CONT RTS ON RST value is RFR SYSTem COMMunicate SERial PACE XON NONE The command sets the software handshake RST has no influnence on this parameter XON Software handshake using the ASCII codes 11h XON and 13h XOFF Note This mode is not recommended for binary data and for baud rates above 9600 bauds NONE No software handshake Example SYST COMM SER PACE NONE RST value is NONE SYSTem COMMunicate SERial PARity ODD EVEN NONE The command defines the parity test Example SYST COMM SER PAR ODD RST value is EVEN SYSTem DISPlay UPDate STATe ON OFF ON The header line of the display indicates frequency and level values OFF The header line of the display remains empty This function is only available via IEC IEEE bus Example SYST DISP UPD OFF RST value is ON SYSTem ERRor The command queries the entry that has been in the error queue for the longest time Positive error numbers denote errors specific of the instrument negative error numbers denote error messages specified by SCPI see Chapter 9 If the error queue is empty O
142. OS The TP Traffic Programm and TA Traffic Announcement settings can manually be modified at any time as long as the dataset is displayed 1090 3123 12 4 42 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Vector Modulation R amp S SMVO03 only Vector Modulation R amp S SMVO03 only In the vector modulation mode UO modulation external modulation signals can be applied to modulation inputs and Q for a complex modulation of the RF carrier lt 1 0 3 V SMV03 lt Q 0 4V 152 2 M Amplitude XL 0 x input value LEVEL Sm 0 Lus eh 0 5V Fig 4 15 Example vector modulation If the UO modulator is driven by a constant sum vector modulation of I Q 0 5V the actual RF level corresponds to the displayed RF level To avoid the l Q modulator being overdriven care should be taken that the sum vector never exceeds 0 5 V when digital modulation modes with amplitude modulation components such as QPSK are used For full scale input the peak envelope power of the modulated RF signal is thus equal to the indicated LEVEL The average power is smaller The difference can be entered as an offset in the LEVEL menu Vector modulation settings are accessible in the Vector Mod menu see following page Menu selection VECTOR MOD 100 0000000 10 0 dem WowMd fon State E Crest Factor Impairment State Leakage Imbalance Juadrature Offset IO Swap Calibrate Calib Once Fig 4 16 VECTOR MOD menu pre
143. Operating Manual Z SIGNAL GENERATOR 9kHz 1 1 GHz D Odin m nx A OH Mim Hi Im IA ROHDE amp SCHWAR EEN md Ou d Y SON ee m ice Se A 7 4 0000000000 c 13 0 a j E P i 10000000000 GHz Offse i A M I Mi dee x 5 UOT d nnn gs SIGNAL GENERATOR R amp S SMLO1 R amp S SMVO03 1090 3000 11 1047 7509 13 R amp S SMLO2 1090 3000 12 R amp S SMLO3 1090 3000 13 Printed in Germany ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Test and Measurement Division 1171 5490 12 01 1 Dear Customer hroughout this manual R amp S SML and R amp S SMVO3 are abbreviated as R amp S SML and R amp S SMVO03 R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners R SOSML RESOSMVO3 Tabbed Divider Overview Tabbed Divider Overview Contents Index Data Sheet Safety Instructions Certificate of Quality EC Certificate of Conformity List of R amp S Representatives Short Tutorial About How to Use the Manual Divider 1 Chapter 1 Preparation for Use 2 Chapter 2 Introduction to Operation 3 Chapter 3 Manual Operation 4 Chapter 4 Functions 5 Chapter 5 Remote Control Basics 6 Chapter 6 Remote Control Commands 7 Chapter 7 Remote Control Programming Examples 8 Chapter 8 Maintenance 9 Chapter 9 Error Messages 10 Chapter 10 Performance Test 1090 3123 12 RE E 6 R SOSML R amp S SMVO3 Contents Contents 1 Putting into Operation occasion decae 1
144. Overvollage PrOle CUON m 10 18 Internal modulation generator EEN 10 18 AmpItUde ele Te rwn 10 19 AM total narrmionic GISTOMION E 10 21 misere iet 10 22 FM total harmonic alstorlion a a a a a E ar a A a E 10 23 PNase MOOUIATION EEN 10 26 Pulse modulation option R amp S GM B i 10 28 Stereo modulation option R amp S GM D i 10 30 Performance test FE DOM usura 10 34 Performance test extension for R amp S SMVO3 RENE 10 38 Preliminary ug 10 38 Measuring equipment and accessorie uu uuu2unaun0nunnnnannnnnunnunnnunnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 10 38 RK CN 10 40 Standard teer Setup EE 10 40 TESTS e E CE EE 10 41 A een een 10 41 Special BUND te eek 10 41 RE 10 43 MECIOF MOQAUALION et t EPI 10 44 Perf rmancertestireport une einer 10 49 1090 3123 12 8 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Tables Table 4 1 Table 5 1 Table 5 2 Table 5 3 Table 5 4 Table 5 5 Table 5 6 Table 5 7 Table 5 8 Table 6 1 Table 6 2 Table 9 1 Table 9 2 Table 10 1 Table 10 2 Table 10 3 Table 10 4 Table 10 5 Table 10 6 1090 3123 12 Contents Overview of internal calibration routines nenne nnn nenne nenn nenne onen 4 62 Synchronization by means of OPC OPC and WAI L ooccccocncccccccccnnccnccccnnocnnonanonnnos 5 15 Meaning of the bits used in the status Dvie cece cecccceeeceeceeae esse eeeseeeeeeeeeseeeaaes 5 19 M
145. R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 List of Error Messages 9 Error Messages The present chapter contains the error messages short term and long term messages of the R amp S SML R amp S SMVO03 Short term message The short term message is displayed in the status line Part of it overwrites the status indications and disappears after approx 2 seconds or in the case of a new entry The instrument shows e g short term messages if the attempt is made to enter an overrange or if incompatible operating modes deactivate one another Long term message The long term message is displayed in the status line by means of the message Err Pressing the ERROR key calls the ERROR page in which the messages are entered Several messages can be entered at the same time The long term message remains existing until there is no cause any more The ERROR page is exited using the BACK key The ERROR page offers access to long term messages if the ERROR key is pressed 100 0000000 10 0 dem O Mo error Fig 9 1 ERROR page Notes An error message Err does not necessarily point to a defect instrument There are various operating states which can cause an ERROR message e g if the instrument is set to external reference but no external reference is connected Error 313 indicates the loss of calibration data and is also applicable in case of a cold start key PRESET is pressed during switch on The calibration values can be restore
146. Ration and STATus QUEStionable which are defined by SCPI and contain detailed infor mation on the instrument The status reporting system further comprises the IST flag Individual STatus with the parallel poll enable PPE register allocated to it The IST flag like the SRQ combines the entire instrument state in a single bit The function fulfilled by the PPE register for the IST flag corresponds to that fulfilled by the SRE for the service request The output buffer contains the messages the instrument returns to the controller The output buffer is not part of the status reporting system but determines the value of the MAV bit in the STB register and is therefore shown in Fig 5 4 Structure of an SCPI Status Register Each SCPI register consists of five parts each of 16 bits width which have different functions see Fig 5 3 The individual bits are independent of each other ie each hardware status is assigned a bit number which is valid for all five parts For example bit 3 of the STATus OPERation register is assigned to the hardware status Wait for trigger for all five parts Bit 15 the most significant bit is set to zero for all five parts This allows the controller to process the contents of the register parts as positive integer hahah CONDition part 312 1 0 eu cn A Wy WW 1511413112 EVENt part 3 p h b vyw VYVY one 8 amp amp 8 8 SA 8 6 8 8 amp amp 8 amp 2 AAAA A amp Sum bit amp
147. Rce POWer LEVel MMediate AMPLitude 140 dBm to Pmax 29 dBm with R amp S SML B10 The command sets the RF output level in operating mode CW UP and DOWN can be indicated in addition to numeric values Then the level is increased or reduced by the value indicated under SOUR POW STEP In this command the OFFSet value is considered Thus the specified range indicated is only valid for SOUR POW OFFS 0 The keywords of this command are optional to a large extent thus the long as well as the short form of the command is shown in the example Example SOUR POW LEV IMM AMPL 10 Or POW 10 RST value is 30 dBm SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude OFFSet 100 to 100 dB The command enters the constant level offset of a series connected attenuator amplifier cf Chapter 4 Section Level Offset If a level offset is entered the level entered using POW does no longer conform to the RF output level The following relation is true POW RF output level POW OFFS Entering a level offset does not change the RF output level but only the value queried by POW The level offset is also valid for level sweep Only dB is permissible as a unit here linear units V W etc are not permitted Example SOUR POW LEV IMM AMPL OFFS 0 Or POW OFFS 0 RST value is 0 dB SOURce POWer LIMit AMPLitude 140 dBm to Pmax 29 dBm with R amp S SML B10 The command limits the maximum RF output level
148. S SMVO3 Utilities Utilities The Utilities menu contains submenus for general functions not directly related to signal generation Menu selection Utilities 100 0000000 mHz 10 0 dem BECK EHS Display System Ref Osc Phase Protect C alib Diag Test Mod Key Aus IO Back 4 Fig 4 22 Utilities menu Display Menu Utilities Display offers the contrast settings of the display Setting range is O to 63 Menu selection Utilities Display 100 0000000 10 0 dem Utilities Display POT Contrast 38 Remote Syntax Errors Back 4 Fig 4 23 Utilities Display menu Contrast Contrast settings of the Display Setting range is O to 63 Remote Syntax Show Parser Error On Off Errors IEC IEEE bus commands SYST DISP PARS ERR ON 1090 3123 12 4 55 E 6 Utilities R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 System Menu selection Utilities System 100 000 0000 mHz 10 0 dem Utilities System RS232 Security Language Back y Fig 4 24 Utilities System menu IEC IEEE Bus Address System GPIB Access to the remote control address is offered by the Utilities System GPIB Address submenu The setting range is 1 to 30 The address is factory set to 28 Menu selection Utilities System GPIB Address 100 000 0000 mz 10 0 dem Utilities Sustem loPIE GPIB 4Address Fig 4 25 Utilities System GPIB Address menu GPIB Address Input value of IEC IEEE bus address IEC
149. S SMVO3 Test setup See Performance test R amp S SMLO3 R amp S SMVO3 Settings on VECTORMOD STATE IQCW R amp S SMV03 FREQ Test frequency level accuracy Test frequencies 5 MHz 5 1 MHz 76 MHz 77 MHz 151 MHz 255 MHz 302 MHz 605 MHz 606 MHz 725 MHz 970 MHz fmax 1210 5 MHz 1211 MHz 1818 MHz 2000 MHz 2200 MHz 2800 MHz 3000 MHz 3300 MHz LEVEL Test level 1 level accuracy Testlevel 1 8 dBm 3 1 dBm 3 dBm 2 dBm 7 dBm 12 dBm 17 dBm 21 9 dBm 22 0 dBm oettings on powermeter See Performance test R amp S SML03 R amp S SMVO3 Measurement See Performance test R amp S SML03 R amp S SMVO3 Measurement procedure for low levels gt 115 dBm Caution The precondition for correct measurement is that the used components are wholly RF shielded Test Method see Performance test R amp S SMLO3 R amp S SMVO3 Settings on R amp S SMVO3 VECTORMOD STATE IQCW Testfrequencies gt 5MHz Setting time Test setup Test setup 2 see Performance test R amp S SMLO3 R amp S SMVO3 Test method See Performance test R amp S SMLO03 R amp S SMVO3 Preparing measurement See Performance test R amp S SMLO3 R amp S SMVO3 Settings on R amp S SMVO3 VECTORMOD STATE IQCW FREQ Test frequency setting time MeasurementMessung See Performance test R amp S SML03 R amp S SMVO3 Non interrupting level setting ATTENUATOR FIXED Tset setup gt Test setup 1 with spectrum analyzer Performance test R amp S SMLO3 R amp S SMV
150. SML R amp ES SMVO3 SOURce DM SOURce DM Subsystem R amp S SMV03 This subsystem contains the commands to control the vector modulation and to set the parameters of the modulation signal MT M aj SOURce DM IMPairment STATe ON OFF JO CREStfactor MAXimum MINimum CREStfactor numeric DB MAXimum MINimum STATe ON OFF IQRatio MAGNitude 12 12 PCT PCT 1QSWap STATe ON OFF LEAKage MAGNitude O 50 PCT PCT QUADrature ANGLe 10 10 DEG DEG SOURce DM IMPairment STATe ON OFF The command activates ON or deactivates OFF the three tuning or correction values LEAKage QUADrature and IQRatio for vector modulation Example SOUR DM IMP ON RST value is OFF SOURce DM IQ CRESTfactor The command ask the crestfactor Example SOUR DM IQ CREST SOURce DM IQ CRESTfactor numeric DB MAXimum MINimum The command adjusts the crestfactor Example SOUR DM IQ CRES 10DB RST Wert 0 SOURce DM IQ STATe ON OFF The command switches the vector modulation on or off Example SOUR DM IQ STAT ON RST value is OFF SOURce DM IQRatio MAGNitude 12 0 to 12 0 PCT The command adjusts the ratio of and Q modulation gain balance Example SOUR DM IOR MAGN 5 PCT RST value is O 1090 3123 12 6 17 E 6 SOURce DM R amp S SML RESOSMVOS SOURce DM IQSwap STATe ON OFF The command interchanges the and the Q channels in position on
151. SOUR SING TRIG2 SOUR SING TRIG SOUR SING Step by step manual run within the sweep limits Activating Step stops a running sweep and the cursor moves to the value indicated for Current The sweep can now be controlled upwards or downwards in discrete steps using the rotary knob or the numeric keys IEC IEEE bus commands RF sweep LF sweep Level sweep SOUR FREQ MODE SWE SOUR2 FREQ MODE SWE SOUR POW MODE SWE SOUR SWE MODE STEP SQUR2 SWE MODE STEP SOUR SWE POW MODE STEP TRIG SOUR SING TRIG2 SQUR SING IRIG SOUR SING Single sweep from start point to stop point as with Single but triggered by an external signal IEC IEEE bus commands RF sweep LF sweep Level sweep SOUR FREQ MODE SWE SOUR2 FREQ MODE SWE SOUR POW MODE SWE SOUR SWE MODE AUTO SOUR2 SWE MODE AUTO SOUR SWE POW MODE AUTO TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG2 SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT 4 50 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Sweep Ext Step Step by step run controlled by an external trigger signal Each trigger event triggers a single step IEC IEEE bus commands RF sweep LF sweep Level sweep SOUR FREQ MODE SWE SOUR2 FREQ MODE SWE SOUR POW MODE SWE SOUER SWE MODE STEP SOUR2 SWE MODE STEP SOUR SWE POW MODE STEP TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG2 SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT Off owitching off sweep mode IEC IEEE bus commands RF sweep LF sweep Level sweep SOUR FREQ MODE CW SOUR2 FREQ MODE CW SOUR POW MODE CW Sweep Inputs TRIGGER An external signal at the rear input triggers the s
152. STB AND 4 ER STB AND 32 END TE nouser NEXT I LOOP UNTIL SROFOUND S 0 ON ERROR GOTO error handling ON PEN GOSUB SEG RETURN 1090 3123 12 Poll all bus users No user existing Serial poll read status byte This instrument has bits set in the STB gt 0 THEN GOSUB Outputqueue gt O THEN GOSUB Failure gt O THEN GOSUB Esrread Enable SRO routine again End of SRQ routine 1 4 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Programming Examples Reading out the status event registers the output buffer and the error event queue is effected in subroutines RIEM ee m Sul COULLNGs Tor the xndryzdual SIB DIES 552 Outputqueue Reading the output buffer Messages SPACES 100 Make space for response CALL IBRD generator Message PRINT Message in output buffer Messages RETURN Failure Read error queue ERRORS SPACES 100 Make space for error variable CALL IBWRT generator SYSTEM ERROR CALL IBRD generator ERRORS PRINT Error text Us ERRORS RETURN Esrread Read Event status register Bero SPACESIZ20 Preallocate blanks to text variable CALL IBWRT generator ESR Read ESR CALL IBRD generator Esr IF VAL Esr AND 1 gt O THEN PRINT Operation complete IF VAL Esr AND 4 gt O THEN GOTO Failure IF VAL Esr AND 8 gt 0 THEN PRINT Device dependent error IF VAL Esr AND 16 gt 0 THEN GOTO Failure IF VAL Esr AND 32 gt 0 THEN GOTO Failure IF VAL Esr
153. SU ODD i m ote stet rar EE 3 9 Instrument states EE 6 49 Instrument setting commands TASAS C 52 Instrument settings A M9 3 14 A erden 1 2 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 SOMO a une ee ee ee 3 14 Interface functions IEC IEEE bus rrr ra EA 5 26 FUNCTIONS RS 232 C EE 5 29 lECHEEE BUS nee 1 11 5 25 messages IEC IEEE bus 5 27 A ee canst Narr 1 10 5 28 Intermal A ee 4 59 IHICHUDE Oe E 5 19 Inverted COMINGS s ae E 5 12 IST Uo 5 20 K Key E deeg 1 6 3 6 ASSIGN Massa ara 1 9 3 4 IBACK EE 3 2 3 6 BACK a o LA ERROR EE 9 1 I 21 0 eege 1 5 3 5 3 6 4 A TEE 1 6 eeh 1 5 3 5 3 6 4 LOCA a 5 4 UND EL A A OMT Ree NR rn 1 6 MENO Tal i 1 9 3 4 IMOD ON OFF u i 1 8 3 5 4 13 4 67 PRESET EE 1 4 REE E at ti esa Pa Rade o 1 0 3 1 IRF ONOFF sos orn i taut aia 1 8 3 5 4 10 OA MET ciet tee eee fran dtd n 1 5 3 14 SELECT ua cla 3 2 SELECTA EDEN L7 STATUS Et a 4 69 ES o eRe ee Ape en en 1 2 Backs paco anne 3 6 ERROR nre A ERU 1 8 HELP E 1 8 E 1 6 LOCAL da 1 8 PRE SE EE 1 8 STATUS een nenehen 1 8 Eeer 1 6 XENO manner 1 6 Knob Step EIERE 4 2 A eege 4 5 Leakage x accitus ee 4 44 Level automatic control 2 4 7 6 27 correction Ucor Jet 4 9 6 15 eiert EE 3 1 gj P Ee eg 4 4 6 28 Olsen 4 4 4 6 6 28 RF EISE eg 4 4 6 28 setting non interrupting eeeeeessssssssss 4 5 4 6 suppression of Idicaton een 4 58 O tuam nee pi EE SEE 4 53 UNAM M
154. Selection Edit 100 000 000 0 mHz 10 0 dem Level UE or Edit RF OF OOO 1 0000000000 GHz 0 0 de ooo 1 000000001 0 GHz 0 0 Ob 0003 1 0000000020 GHz 0 0 dE Fig 3 8 Edit editing function UCor Indication of list number Free Available space Free 150 for example means that there is free space for a total of 150 pairs of values elements in the list memory Len Occupied space Len 010 for example means that the current list occupies 10 elements in the list memory selection of index Select an index by means of the rotary knob or enter an index value by means of the numerical keys Editing of parameters gt Select the parameter frequency power to be edited by means of the SELECT key Vary the numerical value by means of the rotary knob or enter a numerical value using the numerical keys Upon pressing the BACK key the menu cursor goes back to the column left of the current column or to the Edit List menu 1090 3123 12 3 12 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 List Editor Delete editing function see Fig 3 9 The Delete function deletes the elements of the indicated range After a delete no gap is left in the list but the remaining elements move up If the indicated range extends beyond the end of the list the elements until the end of the list are deleted The inputs for deleting elements from a list are the same as for inserting elements into a list see section Insert editing function Upon
155. Sine FUNCTION Frequency 1kHz FUNCTION Voltage 0 707V DEMODULATOR FM STEREO CHANNEL L or R RELATIVE oet the respective LF generator R amp S SML or UPL to 500Hz and measure the reference level MEAS REF Then traverse the LF gen from 20Hz to 15kHz and record the frequency response in all four combinations internal L internal R external L external R Total harmonic distortion and channel separation Test setup Settings on R amp S SML R amp S SMVO03 d oetting on UPL 1090 3123 12 Test setup 6 PRESET FREQ Measurement frequency Measurement frequency 10 7MHz 66 MHz 76MHz 87MHz 98MHz 110MHz LEVEL 0 dBm MODULATION STEREO SOURCE EXT L R MODEL R AF 1kHz FILE LOAD INSTRUMENT STATE Mode Default GEN INSTRUMENT ANALOG Channel s 1 or 2 FUNCTION Voltage 0 707 V ANLR INSTRUMENT Channel s 1 amp 2 INSTRUMENT Ch1 Ch2 Imped 600 Ohm FREQ PHASE Meas Time Precision FUNCTION RMS amp S N FUNCTION Unit Ch1 Ch2 dBr FUNCTION Reference Value STORE Ch1 or Ch2 10 30 E 6 R amp S SML RESOSMVOS3 Setting on FMB Measurement Signal to noise ratio Test setup Settings on R amp S SML R amp S SMVO03 oetting on FMB oetting on UPL Measurement 1090 3123 12 Test sequence DEMODULATOR FM STEREO CHANNEL L or R NOISE FILTER OFF ABSOLUTE MAN RANGE dBm RANGE 12dBm AUDIO DIST SINAD Channel separation First note the level of th
156. Span 2 1090 3123 12 4 49 E 6 Sweep R amp S SML RESOSMVOS Selecting Linear or Logarithmic Sweep Spacing Lin Log Linear or logarithmic sweep can be selected with Spacing For RF and LF sweeps both the linear and logarithmic modes are selectable For level sweeps only the logarithmic mode is possible With logarithmic sweeps the step size Step is equal to a constant fraction of the current setting The logarithmic step size for RF and LF sweeps is entered in and for level sweeps in dB Operating Modes Mode The following sweep modes are available Auto Single Step Ext Single 1090 3123 12 Sweep from start point to stop point with automatic restart at start point If another sweep mode was active prior to selection of the auto mode the sweep is continued from the setting active at that time IEC IEEE bus commands RF sweep LF sweep Level sweep SOUR FREQ MODE SWE SOUR2 FREQ MODE SWE SOUR POW MODE SWE SOUR SWE MODE AUTO SOUR2 SWE MODE AUTO SOUR SWE POW MODE AUTO TRIG SOUR AUTO TRIG2 SOUR AUTO IRIG SOUR AUTO Single sweep from start point to stop point The selection of Single does not start a sweep run The sweep run is started by means of the Execute Single Sweep function which is displayed below the Mode line IEC IEEE bus commands RF sweep LF sweep Level sweep SOUR FREQ MODE SWE SOUR2 FREQ MODE SWE SOUR POW MODE SWE SOUR SWE MODE AUTO SOUR2 SWE MODE AUTO SOUR SWE POW MODE AUTO TRIG
157. T Set AM modulation depth to 30 CALL IBWRT generator AM STAT ON owitch on AM An amplitude modulated signal is now present at the output of the instrument 3 To return to manual control press the LOCAL key on the front panel 1090 3123 12 9 1 E 6 Brief Instructions R amp S SML R S amp 9SMVOS3 RS 232 C Interface It is assumed that the configuration of the RS 232 C interface of the unit has not yet been changed 1 Connect the unit and the controller using the null modem cable 2 Enter the following command on the controller to configure the controller interface mode com1 9600 n 8 1 3 Create the following ASCII file on the controller owitch instrument to remote control RETURN ARG TS Clio Reset instrument FREQ 1GHz Set frequency to 1 GHz POW 7 3dBm Set output level to 7 3 dBm OUTP STAT ON owitch on RF output AM 30PCT Set AM modulation depth to 30 AM STAT ON owitch on AM RETURN 4 Transfer the ASCII file to the instrument via the RS 232 C interface Enter the following command on the controller copy filename com An amplitude modulated signal is now present at the output of the instrument 5 Toreturn to manual control press the LOCAL key on the front panel 1090 3123 12 9 2 E 6 R SOSML R amp S SMVO3 Switchover to Remote Control Switchover to Remote Control On power up the instrument is always in the manual control mode LOCAL state and can be operated via the front pan
158. TATe ON OFF ERRor Query only PRESet No query PROTect 1 2 3 4 STATe ON OFF password SECurity STATe ON OFF SERRor Query only VERSion Query only SYSTem COMMunicate The commands to set the remote control interfaces are under this node SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB The commands to control the IEC bus are under this node GPIB General Purpose Interface Bus SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess 1 to 30 The command sets the IEC bus instrument address RST value is 28 Example SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 1 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial The command to set the serial interface are under this node The data format is fixedly set to 8 data bits no parity and 1 stop bit These values cannot be changed The device represents a DTE Data Terminal Equipment in relation to the serial interface Therefore the the controller must be connected via a 0 modem 1090 3123 12 6 46 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 SYSTem SYSTem COMMunicate SERial BAUD 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 The commands sets the baud rate for both the transmit and the receive direction RST has no influence on this parameter Example SYST COMM SER BAUD 1200 RST value is 9600 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial BITS 7 8 The command sets the length of a data word Example SYST COMM SER BITS RST value is 7 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial SBITs 1 2 The command defines whether 1 or 2 stop bits are used Example SYST C
159. Table 5 6 Universal commands QuickBASIC command Effect on the instrument DCL Device Clear IBCMD controller CHR 20 Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state Does not change the instrument setting IFC Interface Clear IBSIC controller Resets the interfaces to the default state Addressed Commands Addressed commands are in the code range 00 to OF hex They only act on instruments addressed as listeners Table 5 7 Addressed commands QuickBASIC command Effect on the instrument SDC Selected Device Clear IBCLR device Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state Does not change the instrument setting GET Group Execute Trigger IBTRG device Triggers a previously active instrument function eg a sweep The effect of this command is identical to that of a pulse at the external trigger signal input GTL Go to Local IBLOC device Transition to LOCAL state manual control PPC Parallel Poll Configure IBPPC device data Configures the instrument for parallel polling The QuickBASIC command additionally executes PPE PPD 1090 3123 12 9 27 E 6 Interfaces R amp S SML R amp S SMVO03 RS 232 C Interface The instrument is fitted with an RS 232 C interface as standard The 9 contact interface is provided at the rear of the unit A controller f
160. Ternal COUPling AC DC The command selects the type of coupling for the external M input AC The d c voltage content is separated from the modulation signal DC The modulation signal is not altered Example SOUR PM EXT COUP AC RST value is AC SOURce PM INTernal The settings for the internal LF generator are effected under this node Here the same hardware is set for AM FM M and SOURce2 This means that e g the following commands are coupled to each other and have the same effect SOQUESAMITINTSPEREO SOURSEM INT FREO SOUR PM INT FREQ QOURZSEREOTCN 1090 3123 12 6 25 E 6 SOURce PM R amp S SML RESOSMVOS SOURce PM INTernal FREQuency 0 1 Hz to 10 MHz The command sets the modulation frequency Example SOUR PM INT FREQ 10kHz RST value is 1 kHz SOURce PM SOURce EXT ernal INTernal TTONe The command selects the modulation source An external and an internal modulation source can be specified at the same time cf example Example SOUR PM SOUR INT RST value is INT SOURce PM STATe ON OFF The command switches the phase modulation on or off Example SOUR PM STAT OFF RST value is OFF SOURce PM BANDwidth STANdard WIDE The command sets the bandwidth for M STANdard and WIDE are available Example SOUR PM BAND WIDE RST value is STAN 1090 3123 12 6 26 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 SOURce POWer SOURce POWer Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to
161. URce SWEep POWer DWELI 10 ms to 5s The command sets the dwell time per level step Example SOUR SWE POW DWEL 12ms RST value is 15 ms SOURce SWEep POWer MODE AUTO MANual STEP The command specifies the sweep mode AUTO Each trigger triggers exactly one entire sweep cycle MANual Each level step of the sweep is triggered by means of manual control or a SOUR POW MAN command the trigger system is not active The level increases or decreases depending on the direction of the shaft encoder by the value stated under SOUR POW STEP INCR STEP Each trigger triggers only one sweep step single step mode The level increases by the value indicated under SOUR POW STEP INCR Example SOUR SWE POW MODE AUTO RST value is AUTO 1090 3123 12 6 39 E 6 SOURce SWEep R amp S SML RESOSMVOS SOURce SWEep POWer RUNNing The command set a queries whether a sweep is being performed Example SOUR SWE POW RUNN Note This query may cause distortions in the course of the sweep depending on the frequency of checkimng and dwell time SOURce SWEep POWer SPACing LOGarithmic The command defines that the sweep steps have logarithmic spacings It permits the query of SPACing Example SOUR SWE POW SPAC LOG RST value is LOG SOURce SWEep POWer STEP LOGarithmic O to 160 dB The command indicates the step width factor for logarithmic sweeps The next level value of a sweep is calculated according to new level 7
162. Voltage The R amp S SML R amp S SMVO03 can be operated at a c systems from 100 to 120 V and 200 to 240 V at system frequencies from 50 to 60 Hz The power supply socket is situated at the rear of the instrument The instrument automatically sets itself to the voltage applied within the permissible voltage ranges lt is not necessary to set the instrument to a certain supply voltage How to Ensure EMC In order to avoid electromagnetic interference the instrument may only be operated when it is closed and with all shielding covers fitted Only appropriate shielded signal and control cables may be used Power Fuses The R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 is protected against short circuits by means of two fuses according to nameplate of the power supply The fuses are situated in the draw out fuse holder which is inserted close to the power supply socket see below Power supply socket Fuse holder Power supply socket at the rear of the instrument Switching On Off the Instrument Switch on Press switch iss The instrument is ready for operation d Switch off Release switch On Off switch at the front of the instrument Initial Status Upon switching on the instrument automatically assumes the status which was set when it was switched off If the instrument need not to be operated from the initial status any further a defined default status should be established by pressing the PRESET and SELECT keys prior to furth
163. a query They may contain measurement results or information on the instrument status The structure and syntax of device messages are described in the following section 1090 3123 12 9 0 E 6 Structure and Syntax of Device Messages R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Structure and Syntax of Device Messages Introduction to SCPI SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments describes a standard command set for programming instruments irrespective of the type of instrument or manufacturer The objective of the SCPI consortium is to standardize the device specific commands to a large extent For this purpose a model was developed which defines identical functions of a device or of different devices Command systems were generated which are assigned to these functions Thus it is possible to address identical functions with identical commands The command systems are of a hierarchical structure Fig 5 1 illustrates this tree structure using a section of command system SOURce which operates the signal sources of the devices The other examples concerning syntax and structure of the commands are derived from this command system SCPI is based on standard IEEE 488 2 ie it uses the same basic syntax elements as well as the common commands defined in this standard Part of the syntax of the device responses is defined in greater detail than in standard IEEE 488 2 see section Responses to Queries Structure of Commands Commands consist of a
164. ad Command STEReo DIRect AF N 97 4 98 3 Erstellen einer neuen alternativen Frequenzliste Es werden die alternativen Frequenzen 97 4 und 98 3 eingef gt Query STEReo DIRect AF1 Reads the first alternative frequency list Response 97 4 98 3 Delete lists with STEReo DlRect AF N Deletes all frequency lists A maximum of five AF lists with max 25 frequencies per list can be created Description Command Query Response Value range Example 1090 3123 12 Activates ARI signal transmission ARI x ARI X OI Command STEReo DIRect ARI 0 Deactivates ARI signal transmission Query STEReo DIRect ARI Response O0 4 22 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Stereo Modulation Option R amp S SML B5 ARI DEV Description Sets the frequency deviation of the ARI signal max deviation Command ARI DEV xxxx Query ARI DEV Response XXXX Value range 0000 to 1000 ASCII coded decimal numbers corresponding to O Hz to 10 kHz Example Command STEReo DIRect ARI DEV 1000 oets the ARI frequency deviation to 10 kHz Query STEReo DIRect ARI DEV Response A 000 Note A four digit value must always be set Leading zeros if any must also be specified ARI ID Description Selects the ARI identification Command ARI ID x Query ARI ID Response X Value range 0 1 2 3 0 Off 1 DK traffic announcement identification 2 BK area identification 3 DK and
165. an en el trato con productos R amp S reacciones al rgicas como por ejemplo urticaria estornudos frecuentes irritaci n de la conjuntiva o dificultades al respirar se deber consultar inmediatamente a un m dico para averigurar los motivos de estas reacciones Si productos elementos de construcci n son tratados fuera del funcionamiento definido de forma mec nica o t rmica pueden generarse elementos peligrosos polvos de sustancia de metales pesados como por ejemplo plomo berilio n quel La partici n elemental del producto como por ejemplo sucede en el tratamiento de materias residuales debe de ser efectuada solamente por personal especializado para estos tratamientos La partici n elemental efectuada inadecuadamente puede generar da os para la salud Se deben tener en cuenta las directivas nacionales referentes al tratamiento de materias residuales En el caso de que se produjeran agentes de peligro o combustibles en la aplicaci n del producto que debieran de ser transferidos a un tratamiento de materias residuales como por ejemplo agentes refrigerantes que deben ser repuestos en periodos definidos o aceites para motores deberan ser tenidas en cuenta las prescripciones de seguridad del fabricante de estos agentes de peligro o combustibles y las regulaciones regionales para el tratamiento de materias residuales Cuiden tambi n de tener en cuenta en caso dado las prescripciones de seguridad especiales en la descrip
166. analog audio inputs and R Both input impedances are switched simultaneously IEC IEEE bus command SOUR STER EXT IMP 100kOhm Selection of the preemphasis Off Preemphasis switched off 50 us Preemphasis 50 us 75 us Preemphasis 75 us IEC IEEE bus command SOUR STER PRE 50us owitching on off the pilot tone On Pilot tone switched on Off Pilot tone switched off IEC IEEE bus command SOUR STER PIL STAT ON Input value of the frequency deviation of the pilot tone IEC IEEE bus command SOUR STER PIL DEV 6 75kHz Input value of the phase of the pilot tone with respect to to 38 kHz subcarrier IEC IEEE bus command SOUR STER PIL PHAS 0 DEG 4 18 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Stereo Modulation Option R amp S SML B5 ARI State ARI Deviation ARI Idendification ARI BK RDS State RDS Deviation RDS Data Set 1090 3123 12 owitching on off the ARI subcarrier On ARI subcarrier switched on Off ARI subcarrier switched off IEC IEEE bus command SOUR STER ARI STAT ON Input value of the frequency deviation of the ARI subcarrier IEC IEEE bus command SOUR STER ARIT DEV 3 5kHz Selection between ARI broadcasting code DK and traffic area code Bk Off The area code and the broadcasting code are switched off DK The broadcasting code is activated BK The area code is activated BK DK The broadcasting code and area code are activated IEC IEEE bus command SOUR STER ARI IDEN DK STAT ON Sel
167. analyzer Table 5 1 item 2 Connect the spectrum analyzer to the RF output of the R amp S SMVO3 Settings on R amp S SMVO03 Test level PvMmax Test frequencies 395 600 936 1250 1801 2200 3301 5099 5501 4400 6400 MHz unmodulated Select State Off inthe menu Vector Mod oettings on analyzer Center frequency test frequency Span 1 MHz Reference level test level ocale 10 dB div First measuere the unmodulated level as a reference Then switch on vector modulation with open inputs State IQ and measure the residual carrier The residual carrier in dBc is the level of the residual signal found reffered to the output signal of the DUT without modulation dBc 7 reffered to he carrier oet Impairment State On and Leakage 10 on the SMV 3 gt The residual carrier should increase 10 20 dBc 10 46 E 6 R amp S SML R S amp GSMV03 Test sequence UO Imbalance Measurement of Imbalance Test equipment opectrum analyzer Table 5 1 item 2 Adjustable DC voltage source Table 5 1 item 12 Test setup Connect the spectrum analyzer to the RF output of the R amp S SMVO3 Connect the DC voltage source to the or the Q input Measurement gt Settings on the R amp S SMVO3 Test frequencies 250MHz 250MHz 0 1Hz 420MHz 420MHz 0 1Hz 665MHz 900 MHz 1170MHz 1900MHz 3000MHz Test level 0 dBm Select State IQ in the menu vector Mod gt Settings on analyzer Center frequency test frequency
168. ances of the measuring instruments used in the performance test e he maximum frequency fmax that can be set for each of the different R amp S SML models is shown in Table 10 1 This should be borne in mind when choosing test equipment Table 10 1 Maximum frequencies R amp S R amp S R amp S R amp S SMLO1 SMLO2 SML03 SMV03 fmax MHz 1100 2200 3300 3300 1090 3123 12 10 1 E 6 Measuring equipment and accessories R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Measuring equipment and accessories Table 10 2 Measuring equipment and accessories Instrument Recommended specifications Recommended R amp S Application type instruments order No measurement Test receiver Frequency range to 3 fmax R amp S FSMR with 1166 3311 xx Frequency accuracy option Settling time R amp S FSU B4 1144 9000 02 Level accuracy R amp S FSU B9 1142 8994 02 Output reflection R amp S FSU B25 1044 9298 02 coefficient Harmonics Nonharmonics Pulse modulation Storage oscilloscope DC 100 MHz 0 1V div SSB phase noise Pulse modulation Settling time rise uer A Test transmitter with Phase noise at 1 GHz R amp S SMU200A 1141 2005 02 Output reflection high spectral purity typically 128 dBc Hz at 20 R amp S SMJ100A 1403 4507 02 coefficient kHz SSB phase noise Wideband noise Phase noise tester Mixer 10 MHz to fmax SSB phase noise Lowpass filter approx 500 kHz Preamplifier with approx 30 dB gain output noise lt 2 nV 1 Hz DC output coupling ac
169. ange The level is above the limit value guaranteed Level underrange The level is below the limit value guaranteed Dynamic level range exceeded The difference between the maximal and minimal value of a level list is above 20 dBm An exact level setting is no longer guaranteed Pulse input signal missing No pulse input signal available This modulation forces other modulations OFF A modulation has been switched on which cannot be used at the same time as an already active modulation The previous modulation has been switched off Output protection tripped The overvoltage protection has been activated If a fault occurs input overloaded the output is automatically switched off RF OFF To eliminate the fault simply switch to RF ON after the overload has been removed no further action required Oven cold The reference oscillator has not yet reached its operating temperature Reference PPL unlocked The level control loop is deactivated Main PPL unlocked The level control loop is deactivated Calibration failed Calibration could not be executed REF OSC calibration data not used because ADJUSTMENT STATE is ON The reference oscillator calibration data are not used as long as ADJUSTMENT STATE is activated Cannot access hardware The data transmission to a module was unsuccessful Function not supported by this hardware revision A later version of certain parts of the instrument is necessary to execute the functio
170. ated temperature range and from aging 1090 3123 12 10 8 E 6 R amp S SML R S amp GSMV03 Test sequence Spectral purity Harmonic ratio harmonic spurious Test setup Testsetup 1 spectrum analyzer mode Settings on the R amp S LEVEL max level as data sheet SMLO1 FREQ Test frequencies 100 kHz 120 kHz 5 MHz 76 MHz 100 MHz 151 MHz 200 MHz 255 25 MHz 300 MHz 400 MHz 500 MHz 605 MHz 655 25 MHz 700 MHz 1100 MHz Settings on the R amp S LEVEL max level as data sheet SMLO2 03 R amp S SMV03 FREQ in addition to the test frequencies for R amp S SMLO1 1211 MHz 1700 MHz 2010 MHz 2010 MHz 2200 MHz 3000 MHz 3300 MHz Settings with option B3 gt Test frequencies for harmonics gt 20 MHz Settings with option B10 gt Additional test level max level as data sheet Settings on the test receiver CF test frequency Reference level test level 10 dB 10 dB div SPAN 300 kHz Resolution bandwidth 30 kHz Measurement gt First measure the level of the fundamental as reference then look for signals at double and triple the carrier frequency When doing so make sure that the spectrum analyzer is not overloaded Analysis The harmonic ratio is the difference in level between the detected harmonic referenced to the output signal from the R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 in dBc referenced to the carrier Spurious suppression nonharmonic spurious Test setup gt Test setup 1 spectrum analyze
171. b 0003 1 0000000020 GHz 0 0 de Fig 4 8 UCor Level menu UCor Indication of list item number Free Available space Free 150 for example means that there is free space for a total of 150 pairs of values elements in the list memory Len Occupied space Len 010 for example means that the current list occupies 10 elements in the list memory RF ON OFF Key The RF output signal can be switched on and off with the RF ON OFF key This does not influence the current menu When the output signal is switched off RF Off appears in the header field with the level display With RF Off the 50 O source impedance is maintained IEC IEEE bus command OUTP OFF 1090 3123 12 4 8 E 6 R SOSML R amp S SMVO3 Modulation General Modulation General The R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 offers the following modulation types e Amplitude modulation AM e Frequency modulation FM e Phase modulation DM e Pulse modulation PULSE Option R amp S SML B3 e Stereo modulation STEREO Option R amp S SML B5 e Vector modulation VECTOR R amp S SMVO03 only For all modulations except vector modulation an internal or external modulation source can be used For stereo modulation external analog R or L signals can be applied The operation modes R L R L R L and RzL are available In addition the R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 provides an S P DIF input for externally generated digital stereo signals Vector modulation requires external
172. before the list is executed Example The POWer part of a list is longer than the FREQuency part or only the POWer part has been transmitted Data corrupt or stale The data are incomplete or invalid Example The instrument has aborted a measurement Hardware error The command cannot be executed because of a hardware fault of the instrument Hardware missing The command cannot be executed because of hardware missing Example An option is not fitted Directory full The list management cannot accept any more lists since the maximum number of lists has already been attained Example An attempt was made to create more than the allowed number of UCOR lists 9 4 E 6 R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 List of Error Messages Device Specific Error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Error code Error text with queue poll Explanation of error System error 310 This error message suggests an error within the instrument Please inform your R amp S service center Memory error 311 Error in instrument memory Calibration memory lost 313 Loss of stored calibration data The YFOM and ALC AMP calibration data can be restored by means of internal routines see chapter 4 section Calibration Save recall memory lost 314 Loss of the nonvolatile data stored with the command SAV Configuration memory lost 315 Loss of the nonvolatile configuration data stored by the instrument Self test failed 330 The self test could not be executed
173. bits have to be entered in hexadecimal code Command STEReo DIRect MASK 09 01 0000001 0000000 0000000 0000000 In nine RDS groups the least significant bit of the CRC code of block A is inverted i e an errored bit is sent After each errored group one error free group is inserted After transmission of the complete sequence MASK STATE is set to y With the command MASK_STATE 1 the above sequence 9 errored groups with one error free group inserted after each errored group is retransmitted once Then MASK STATE is again set to O Query STEReo DIRect MASK Response 09 01 0000001 0000000 0000000 0000000 4 30 E 6 1090 3123 12 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Stereo Modulation Option R amp S SML B5 MASK_STATE Description Switches on or off the transmission of defined bit errors in the RDS data stream Command MASK_STATE x Query MASK_STATE Response X Value range x 0 oder 1 Example Command STEReo DlRect MASK_STATE 1 With the command MASK_STATE 1 a sequence of errored groups as defined by the MASK command is retransmitted once if the number of groups to be masked is other than zero Then MASK STATE is automatically set to 0 If the number of groups to be masked is equal to zero in the MASK command which means continuous error transmission the masking function can be switched off with MASK_STATE 0 Query STEReo DlRect MASK_STATE Response Sa The MASK STATE query provides information
174. broadcast different programs at different times Note Do not combine methods A and B Method A Generate a new alternative frequency list with STEReo DIRect AF N 87 6 87 7 87 8 gt Set the group sequence e g STEReo DIRect gs 0A 14A The group sequence must contain group OA The alternative frequencies are now transmitted in group OA Add another alternative frequency list with STEReo DIRect AF 88 6 88 7 88 8 Method B Generate a new alternative frequency list with STEReo DIRect AFzN 87 6 90 2 87 6 90 2 gt Set the group sequence e g STEReo DIRect gs 0A 14A The group sequence must contain group OA he alternative frequencies are now transmitted in group OA gt Add another alternative frequency list with STEReo DlIRect AF 88 6 91 2 88 6 91 2 The frequency lists are not checked for correctness For this reason make sure that the syntax is correct A maximum of five AF lists can be generated For type A lists max 25 frequencies per list can be specified for type B lists max 12 frequencies per list Enhanced Other Networks Creating an EON data set gt Read the list of existing EON data sets with STEReo DIRect eon pi The list shows the EON PI codes already used and those remaining for new data sets gt Create an EON data set with STEReo DlRect eon pi 1234 Setthe program service PS name for the EON data set with STEReo DIRect EON PSz1234 TEST EON 1090 3123 12 4 40
175. broutine is REM activated REM Program suitable reaction to the OPC service request ON PEN GOSUB OpcReady Enable SRQ routine again RETURN REM KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK IK KK KK A KK Kk A X A koX 1090 3123 12 7 3 E 6 Programming Examples R amp S SML R8E SOSMVO3 Service Request The service request routine requires an extended initialization of the instrument in which the respective bits of the transition and enable registers are set In order to be able to use the service request function in conjugation with a National Instruments GPIB driver the setting Disable Auto Serial Poll must be changed to yes by means of IBCONF REM ee Example or invrtrialrzation OT the SRO In the case OL errors CALL IBWRT generatot CLS Reset status reporting system CALL IBWRT generator SRE 168 CALL IBWRT generator ESE 60 ON PEN GOSUB Srq PEN ON REM Continue main program here STOP Permit service request for STAT OPER SIAT QUES and EOR register Set event enable bit for command exe cution device dependent and query error Initialization of the service request routine End of program A service request is then processed in the service request routine Note The variables userN and userM must be pre assigned usefully SROFOUNDS O FOR I userN TO userM ON ERROR GOTO nouser CALL IBRSP I STB LE XB cu EHEN SROFOUNDS 1 LE WEE AND E IF
176. bsystem serves to select transmit and switch on User Correction tables see Section User Correction Ucor as well n uu Mee SOURce CORRection STATe ON OFF CSET CATalog Query only FREE Query only SELect name of table DATA FREQuency 9 kHZ Fmax 69 kHz Fmax Fmax depending on model POINts Query only POWer 20 20dB 20 20dB POINts Query only DELete name of table ALL SOURce CORRection STATe ON OFF The command switches the table selected using SOUR CORR CSET on or off Example SOUR CORR STAT ON RST value is OFF SOURce CORRection CSET The commands to select and edit the Ucor tables are under this node SOURce CORRection CSET CATalog The command requests a list of Ucor tables The individual lists are separated by means of commas This command is a query and has no RST value Example COUR CORR ICAT Answer UCOR1 UCOR2 UCOR3 SOURce CORRection CSET FREE This command queries the free space in the Ucor table The command is a query and thus has no RST value Example SOUR CORR FREE 1090 3123 12 6 15 E 6 SOURce CORRection R amp S SML RESOSMVOS SOURce CORRection CSET SELect name of table The command selects a Ucor table This command alone does not yet effect a correction First the table selected must be activated cf SOUR CORR STAT If there is no table of this name a new table is created The name may co
177. ccccccnnocociconncononocnnnenanconanonannnennrennnnenanenanans 7 2 Switchover to Manual Control EE 7 2 Reading out Instrument SettidgS occoonccnnociconiccnnnecnnonnnnonanonnanonaronnnronanrnnnnrennrrnnanrnanrnnanrenarennn 7 2 Command synchronization nassen 7 3 SENICE REQUEST EE 7 4 AM ITI Cree a ac a 8 1 Storing and PACKING ere 8 1 Exchanging the Lithium Battery 8 1 9 Error Ee TETTE TD noe ea aaa 9 1 List Of Error Message Sii Ko ee Buda tU E dad Foe s EXE ZO AG V EUER 9 2 SCPI Specific Error MESSAGES a scu see enu ecran a 9 2 R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Specific Error Messages 9 6 Possible Er i e RR 9 8 1090 3123 12 f E 6 Contents R amp S SML R amp S amp SMVOS3 TOPerTOormance Test EE 10 1 GONG EE 10 1 Measuring equipment and accessories uuzuun unau0nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnunnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnn 10 2 RK EEN 10 3 Standard lest sellus oua een 10 3 Test selup Tor setting dl E 10 3 Test setup for SSB Phase NOISC EE 10 4 Test setup for output reflection coefficient occconcccnnncccnncocnnocononocononononnnnonanonancnnncnnnnnnos 10 4 Test setup for pulse modulator option R amp S GM Bi 10 5 Test setup for stereo coder option R amp S GM Pi 10 5 TESESEQUENCE percer EN 10 6 Display ANG leoi m S X 10 6 mice ge ron ERE 10 6 Reference EEN t TEE o or 10 8 ejercer Rol EE 10 9 Residual uM Rr 10 12 Residual AN nr 10 12 ENIM E MIT PR 10 13
178. ce EXCLude The RF frequency is not loaded when instrument settings are loaded the current settings are maintained Example SOUR FREQ RCL INCL SOURce FREQuency MANual 9 kHz to Fmax Fmax depending on the model The command sets the frequency if SWE MODE MAN and FREQ MODE SWE are set Only frequency values between the settings with SOUR FREQ STAR and STOP are permitted As to the permitted range cf FREQ CENT Example SOUR FREQ MAN 500MHz RST value is 100 MHz 1090 3123 12 6 21 E 6 SOURce FREQuency R amp S SML RESOSMVOS SOURce FREQuency MODE CW FlXed SWEep The command specifies the operating mode and hence also specifies which commands control the FREQuency subsystem The parameters are assigned as follows CW FlXed CW and FlXed are synonyms The output frequency is specified by means of SOUR FREQ CW FIX SWEep The instrument operates in the SWEep mode The frequency is specified by means of commands SOUR FREQ STAR STOP CENT SPAN MAN Example SOUR FREQ MODE SWE RST value is CW SOURce FREQuency OFFSet 50 to 50 GHz The command sets the frequency offset of a mixer which might be series connected cf Chapter 4 Section Frequency Offset Example SOUR FREQ OFFS 100MHz RST value is O SOURce FREQuency SPAN 0 Fmax 9 kHz Fmax depending on the model This command specifies the frequency range for the sweep This parameter is coupled to the start and stop
179. ci n del producto Ciertos productos como por ejemplo las instalaciones de radiaci n HF pueden a causa de su funci n natural emitir una radiaci n electromagn tica aumentada En vista a la protecci n de la vida en desarrollo deber an ser protegidas personas embarazadas debidamente Tambi n las personas con un bypass pueden correr peligro a causa de la radiaci n electromagn tica El empresario usario est 1171 0000 42 03 00 10 comprometido a valorar y sefialar areas de trabajo en las que se corra un riesgo aumentado de exposici n a radiaciones para evitar riesgos La utilizaci n de los productos requiere instrucciones especiales y una alta concentraci n en el manejo Debe de ponerse por seguro de que las personas que manejen los productos est n a la altura de los requerimientos necesarios referente a sus aptitudes f sicas ps quicas y emocionales ya que de otra manera no se pueden excluir lesiones o da os de objetos El empresario lleva la responsabilidad de seleccionar el personal usuario apto para el manejo de los productos Antes de la puesta en marcha del producto se deber tener por seguro de que la tensi n preseleccionada en el producto equivalga a la del la red de distribuci n Si es necesario cambiar la preselecci n de la tensi n tambi n se deber n en caso dabo cambiar los fusibles correspondientes del prodcuto Productos de la clase de seguridad con alimentaci n m vil y enchufe individ
180. ck B and 16 bits each in blocks C and D of the group Command 1A WW XXXXXXXXXX yyyyyyyyy or 1A 00 erases the data Query 1A Response XXXXXXXXXX YY YY Y Y Y Y Y Value range WW number of retransmissions X y 0000000000 bis 1FFFFFFFFF 10 ASCII ccoded hexadecimal characters each Max 20 different data sequences can be defined Example Command STEReo DIRect 1A 01 0123456789 1FFFFFFFFF Fills a queue with the data 0123456789 1FFFFFFFFF The data is sent in consecutive order in group 1A after group 1A is added to the group sequence see GS command below Query STEReo DIRect 1A Reads the data of group 1A Response 01 0123456789 1FFFFFFFFF Note 10 characters must be specified each for x and y Leading zeros if any must also be specified The command described here only causes a queue to be filled with data for a specific group The data will only be sent when the group in question is added to the group sequence with the GS command 1090 3123 12 4 21 E 6 Stereo Modulation Option R amp S SML B5 AF Note ARI Description Command Query Response Value range Example R amp S SML RESOSMVOS Alternative Frequenzen f r die ausgestrahlte Frequenz festlegen AF A XXX X XXX X AFz XXX X XXX X or if list z is not available xxx x 7 87 6 to 107 9 ASCII coded decimal numbers A N new AF list or AF list to be added z 1 to 5 AF list to be re
181. conductor protector fijo con el conductor protector del aparato antes de hacer cualquier otra conexi n La instalaci n y la conexi n deber n ser efecutadas por un electricista especializado 1171 0000 42 03 00 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 En caso de que los productos que son instalados fijamente en un lugar sean sin protector implementado autointerruptor o similares objetos de protecci n el circuito de suministro de corriente deber estar protegido de manera que usuarios y productos est n suficientemente protegidos Por favor no introduzca ning n objeto que no est destinado a ello en los orificios de la caja del aparato No vierta nunca ninguna clase de l quidos sobre o en la caja Esto puede producir corto circuitos en el producto y o puede causar golpes de corriente fuego o heridas Aseg rese con la protecci n adecuada de que no pueda originarse en el producto una sobrecarga por ejemplo a causa de una tormenta Si no se ver el personal que lo utilice expuesto al peligro de un golpe de corriente Los productos R amp S no est n protegidos contra el agua si no es que exista otra indicaci n ver tambi n punto 1 Si no se tiene en cuenta esto se arriesga el peligro de golpe de corriente para el usario o de dafios en el producto lo cual tambi n puede llevar al peligro de personas No utilice el producto bajo condiciones en las que pueda producirse y se hayan producido l quidos de condensaci
182. control which is intended for maximum possible operating convenience the priority of remote control is the predictability of the device status This means that when incompatible settings are attempted the command is ignored and the device status remains unchanged i e is not adapted to other settings Therefore IEC IEEE bus control programs should always define an initial device status e g with command RST and then implement the required settings This manual contains the commands syntax of the firmware version 2 51 Notation Table of Commands Command In the command column the table provides an overview of the commands and their hierarchical arrangement see indentations Parameter In the parameter column the requested parameters are indicated together with their specified range Unit The unit column indicates the basic unit of the physical parameters Remark In the remark column an indication is made on whether the command does not have a query form whether the command has only one query form whether this command is implemented only with a certain option of the instrument Indentations The different levels of the SCPI command hierarchy are represented in the table by means of indentations to the right The lower the level is the farther the indentation to the right is Please observe that the complete notation of the command always includes the higher levels as well Example SOURce FM MODE is represented
183. cording to mixer for oscilloscope VSWR bridge 1 MHz to a R amp S ZRC 1039 9492 55 Output reflection a of directivity gt 40 dB 1039 9492 52 coefficient RF power sensor 9 kHZ tO fmax R amp S NRP Z22 Level accuracy 30 to 23 dBm Non interrupting level setting Low noise preamplifier 5 KHZ to fmax Gain 20 dB Noise factor 10 dB Sinewave generator 10 Hz to 500 kHz R amp S ADS 8 V Upeak R amp S AFG aM Level accuracy 1012 4002 02 AM FM PhiM modulation AC DC voltmeter DC to 1 MHz R amp S URE3 350 5315 03 LF generator Putse generator ff 377 2100 02 Overvoltage protection Modulation analyzer 100 kHz to fmax AM FM PhiM R amp S FMB with 856 5005 52 Residual FM stereo coder stereo decoder option Residual AM distortion meter weighting filter R amp S FMA B1 855 2002 52 AM FM PhiM modulation ITU R ITU T R amp S FMA B2 855 0000 52 LF generator R amp S FMA B3 856 0003 52 Stereo modulation R amp S FMA B4 855 6008 52 Co a gt ax on NO Audio analyzer 10Hz to 100kHz R amp S UPLOG R amp S 1078 2008 05 Stereo coder B5 UPL B29 with BNC SLR adapters 14 RDS decoder EN R amp S DMDC 0820 6618 03 Stereo coder B5 1090 3123 12 10 2 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Test setups Standard test setup Test setup 1 Measuring equipment Test setup Test receiver table Measuring Equipment and Accessories item 1 Modulation analyzer table Measuring E
184. cy offset occooocccoccncocncoconoconononcnoncncononnnncnnnnnnnnnnonnncnnannnnns 4 2 Fig 4 3 EG Ana EE 4 3 Fig 4 4 Typical setup with level offset aussen een 4 5 Fig 4 5 Level ALC menu preset setting ooccoocccoconoconnccoonononconanocanononononnnnonanonanononanenanoos 4 6 Fig 4 6 Levels ABC Slale EE 4 6 Fig 4 7 Levels UCO dier Dc iii 4 7 Fig 4 8 UCOFLeVe Mon a ado 4 8 Fig 4 9 Modulation AM menu preset setimg nen enenne nenn nnnnnennnnnenne nennen 4 11 Fig 4 10 Modulation FM menu preset seitng nen enennn nenn nnnnn nano nenne nennen 4 12 Fig 4 11 Modulation DM menu preset setting us0240022000220 nenne none nnnnenene nenne nennen 4 13 Fig 4 12 Modulation Pulse menu preset setting equipped with option R amp S SML B3 4 14 Fig 4 13 Signal example 1 single pulse Pulse mode Auto fg 4 16 Fig 4 14 Signal example 2 double pulse Pulse mode Ext Trig Slope Pos 4 16 Fig 4 15 Signal example 3 single pulse Pulse Mode Ext Gate 4 16 Fig 4 16 Modulation Stereo menu preset setting equipped with option R amp S SML B5 4 17 Fig 4 15 Example vector modula a 4 43 Fig 4 16 VECTOR MOD menu preset settings R amp S SMVOS o ooccocccccnccncccncocccnnncnoncnonononononos 4 43 Fig 4 17 LF Output menu preset setting nennen 4 46 Fig 4 18 RUSS OUIDIIE MENU a ne en ee 4 47 Fig 4 19 vision cool 4 51 Fig 4 20 SWesp Level M
185. d Processing Instrument Model and Command Processing The instrument model shown in Fig 5 2 was created with a view to the processing of IEC IEEE bus commands The individual components work independently of each other and simultaneously They communicate with each other by means of messages Input unit IEC IEEE p with bus input buffer y Command recognition v Data set v otatus reporting gt system Instrument hardware Y IEC IEEE a Output unit bus with output buffer Fig 5 2 Device model for remote control via the IEC IEEE bus Input Unit The input unit receives commands character by character from the IEC IEEE bus and stores them in the input buffer The input buffer has a size of 256 characters The input unit sends a message to the command recognition when the input buffer is full or when it receives a terminator PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR gt as defined in IEEE 488 2 or the interface message DCL If the input buffer is full the IEC IEEE bus traffic is stopped and the data received up to then are processed After this the IEC IEEE bus traffic is continued If on receipt of a terminator the input buffer is not full the input unit can receive the next command during command recognition and execution Receipt of a DCL command clears the input buffer and immediately initiates a message to the command recognition 1090 3123
186. d is entered Otherwise an error 224 Illegal parameter value is generated and STATe remains ON Example SYST PROT1 STAT OFF 123456 SYSTem SECUrity STATe ON OFF The command switches the security state on or off ON The following commands cannot be executed DISP ANN ALL ON DISP ANN FREQ ON DISP ANN AMPL ON OFF In the transition from ON to OFF all data existing in the instrument except for the calibrating data are deleted especially all status registers all instrument states and all lists The command is not influenced by RST and RCL Example SYST SEC STAT ON SYSTem SERRor This command returns a list of all errors existing at the point of time of the query The error messages are separated by commas This list corresponds to the indication on the ERROR page with manual control cf Chapter 9 Section Error Messages Example SYST SERR Answer 22 ly 9 t MINIS COn LIO y 153 T Input voltage out Or range SYSTem VERSion The command returns the SCPI version number the instrument acts in accordance with This command is a query and thus has no RST value Example SYST VERS Answer 1994 0 1090 3123 12 6 48 E 6 R amp S SML TEST TEST System This system contains the commands to execute the selftest routines RAM ROM and BATT as well as to directly manipulate the hardware modules TEST DIR The selftests return a 0 if the test has been executed successfully otherwise a value
187. d with internal calibration routines These routines are accessible via menu Utilities Calib see section on calibration 1090 3123 12 9 1 E 6 List of Error Messages R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 List of Error Messages The following list contains all SCPI and device specific error messages for errors occurring in the instrument The meaning of negative error codes is defined in SCPI positive error codes mark device dependent errors The lefthand column of the table below contains the error code In the righthand column the error text entered into the error event queue and shown on the display is in bold type Below the error text there is an explanation of the error SCPI Specific Error Messages No error Error text with queue poll Error code Explanation of error No error This message is output if the error queue contains no entries Command Error errored command sets bit 5 in the ESR register Error code Error text with queue poll Explanation of error Command error The command is errored or invalid Invalid character The command contains an invalid character Example A header contains an ampersand SOURCE4 Syntax error The command is invalid Example A command contains block data which the instrument does not accept Invalid separator The command contains an illegal character instead of a terminator Example A semicolon after the command is missing Data type error The command contains an i
188. d with the corresponding bits of the PPE Unlike the SRE bit 6 is used in this case The IST flag results from the ORing of all results The PPE can be set using the command PRE and read using the command PRE Event Status Register ESR and Event Status Enable Register ESE The ESR is already defined in IEEE 488 2 It can be compared with the EVEN part of an SCPI register The event status register can be read using the command ESR The ESE is the associated ENABle part It can be set using the command ESE and read using the command ESE Table 5 3 Meaning of the bits used in the event status register Operation Complete This bit is set on receipt of the command oPc when all previous commands have been executed Query Error This bit is set if either the controller wants to read data from the instrument without having sent a query or if it does not fetch requested data and sends new instructions to the instrument instead The cause is often a query which is errored and hence cannot be executed Device Dependent Error This bit is set if a device dependent error occurs An error message with a number between 300 and 399 or a positive error number which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue see Chapter 9 Section Error Messages Execution Error This bit is set if a received command is syntactically correct but cannot be executed for other reasons An error message with a number between
189. de An RDS data stream of binary data is generated If transparent data is selected all other RDS data is ignored TRANS xxxxxXXXXXXXXXXXX TRANS XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX x 16 ASCII coded hexadecimal characters blocks A to D of the RDS groups TRANS 0 Deletes all transparent data and switches back to normal RDS data transmission Max 20 different data sequences can be defined Command STEReo DIRect TRANS 0123456789ABCDEF The data 0123456789ABCDEF is sent instead of the RDS data Query STEReo DIRect TRANS Reads the transparent data Response 0123456789ABCDEF 16 characters must be specified for each data sequence Leading zeros if any must also be specified The data will be transmitted even if it constitutes no meaningful RDS data 1090 3123 12 4 39 E 6 Stereo Modulation Option R amp S SML B5 R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Examples Alternative Frequency Lists Alternative frequency lists can be transmitted in two ways Method A The frequencies of an AF list are entered one after the other the frequency currently transmitted has to be specified as the first frequency Method B The frequencies of an AF list are entered in pairs each pair containing the frequency currently transmitted and an alternative frequency The frequency pairs should normally be entered in ascending order Descending order should be chosen only if the alternative frequencies belong to different regions or are used to
190. describes the functions of the instrument and its options which can be activated manually via menus or by remote control frequency and level settings analog modulations sweep and general functions not directly related to signal generation provides basic information on remote control for example on the IEC IEEE bus RS 232 C interface interface and device messages command processing status reporting system etc contains for each command system an overview and description of all commands available for the instrument and its options as well as an alphabetical list of all commands includes programming examples for remote control gives information on preventive maintenance for example for keeping the exterior clean storage etc contains the SCPI specific and device specific error messages displayed on the instrument includes the performance test with the performance test report R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Putting into Operation 1 Putting into Operation This chapter contains all information about putting into operation unpacking connection to AC supply switching on and off functional testing and installation of the instrument preset settings and views of the front and rear panel showing the controls and connectors needed for operation General Instructions Before putting the R amp S SML R amp S SMVO03 into operation please make sure that e the cover of the casing are put on and screwed e the ventilation op
191. ding actions Fig 5 4 shows that an SRQ is triggered if one or several of the bits 2 3 4 5 and 7 of the status byte are set and enabled in the SRE Each of these bits combines the information of another register the error queue or the output buffer By setting the ENABle parts of the status registers accordingly it is achieved that arbitrary bits of an arbitrary status register trigger an SRQ To make use of the possibilities of the service request all bits of the SRE and ESE enable registers should be set to 1 Examples see also Fig 5 4 and chapter 7 Programming Examples Use of command OPC to generate an SRQ gt Set bit O in the ESE Operation Complete Setbit 5 in the SRE ESB The instrument generates an SRQ after completion of its settings Indication of end of sweep by means of an SRQ at the controller gt Set bit 7 sum bit of STATus OPERation register in SRE gt Set bit 3 sweeping in STATus OPERation ENABle gt Set bit 3 in STATus OPERation NTRansition so that the transition of sweeping bit 3 from 1 to O end of sweep is recorded in the EVENt part The instrument generates an SRQ after completion of a sweep The SRQ is the only way for the instrument to become active on its own Each controller program should therefore set the instrument such that a service request is triggered in the event of a malfunction The program should react appropriately to the service request A detailed example of a service req
192. dshake Software handshake The software handshake with the XON XOFF protocol controls data transmission If the receiver instrument wishes to inhibit the input of data it sends XOFF to the transmitter The transmitter then interrupts data output until it receives XON from the receiver The same function is also provided at the transmitter end controller Note The software handshake is not suitable for the transmission of binary data Here the hardware handshake is to be preferred Hardware handshake With a hardware handshake the instrument signals its readiness for reception via the lines DTR and RTS A logic O means ready a logic 1 means not ready Whether or not the controller is ready for reception is signalled to the instrument via the CTS or the DSR line see section Signal Lines The transmitter of the instrument is switched on by a logic O and off by a logic 1 The RTS line remains active as long as the serial interface is active The DTR line controls the instrument s readiness for reception Wiring between instrument and controller Wiring between the instrument and the controller is by means of a null modem ie the data control and signalling lines have to be cross connected The wiring plan below applies to controllers with a 9 pin or 25 pin connector R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Controller R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Controller 9 pin 9 pin 9 pin 25 pin 1 1 1 A 8 2
193. dulations switched off Transient free level setting switched off level attenuator mode Auto Internal level control level Alc On User correction level Ucor Off LF output switched off oweep switched off Suppression of indications system security unaltered Protection of calibration data protection lock unaltered Settings stored unaltered Data lists etc stored unaltered IEC bus address unaltered All parameters and circuit states even those of operating modes which are not activated are preset by means of Preset The presettings going beyond the above list can be seen from the menu representations as of Chapter 4 which each indicate the Preset setting status Functional Test On switching on the instrument and permanently during operation the R amp S SML R amp S SMVO03 carries out a self test The ROM contents as well as the battery of the non volatile RAM are checked The most important instrument functions are automatically monitored during operation If an error is detected the message Err is displayed in the status line For further identification of the error press the ERROR key Thereupon a description of the error is displayed cf Chapter 9 section Error Messages Return to the menu exited by pressing the BACK key If required internal test points can be polled by the user and the results be read out and displayed cf Service Manual Mounting into a 19 Rack The R amp S SML R amp S SMVO03 can be mounted
194. e OUTP2 VOLT 3 0V RST value is 1 V 1090 3123 12 6 12 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 SOURce AM SOURce System This system contains the commands to configure the RF signal source Keyword SOURce is optional i e it can be omitted The LF signal source is configured in the SOURce2 system The following subsystems are realized in the instrument SOURce AM CORRection DM FM FREQuency PHASe PM POWer PULM PULSe ROSCillator STEReo Amplitude modulation Correction of the output level Vector modulation Frequency modulation Frequencies including sweep Phase of the output signal Phase modulation Output level level control and level correction Pulse modulation Pulse generator Reference oscillator Stereo modulation SWEep Sweeps SOURce AM Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to control the amplitude modulation An LF generator which serves as internal modulation source is fitted in the instrument Part of the settings is effected under SOURce2 Bu idi M SOURce AM DEPTh O to100 PCT PCT EXTernal COUPling AC DC INTernal FREQuency 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz Hz SOURce EXTernal INTernal TTONe STATe ON OFF SOURce AM DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT The command sets the modulation depth in percent RST value is 30PCT Example SOUR AM DEPT 15PCT 1090 3123 12 6 13 E 6 SOURce AM R amp S SML RESOSMVOS SOURce AM EXTernal The commands to set t
195. e ROSCillator INTernal The commands to set the internal reference oscillator are under this node SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust The commands for frequency adjustment fine tuning of the frequency are under this node SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust STATe ON OFF The command switches the frequency adjustment on or off Example SOUR ROSC INT ADJ STAT ON RST value is OFF SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust VALue 0 to 4095 The command indicates the frequency correction value tuning value For a detailed definition cf Section Reference Frequency Internal External Example SOUR ROSC INT ADJ VAL 0 not influenced by RST or PRESET SOURce ROSCillator INTernal RLOop NORMal NARRow The command sets the bandwidth of the reference loop Normal and Narrow are available Example SOUR ROSC INT RLO NORM RST value is NORM SOURce ROSCillator SOURce INTernal EXTernal The command selects the reference source INTernal The internal oscillator is used EXTernal The reference signal is fed externally Example SOUR ROSC SOUR EXT RST value is INT 1090 3123 12 6 33 E 6 SOURce STEReo R amp S SML RESOSMVOS SOURce STEReoSubsystem This subsystem contains the commands to control the stereo modulation the ARI functions and basic RDS functions and to set the parameters of the modulation signal All RDS functions of the Stereo RDS coder can be set by means of SOURce STEReo DlRect
196. e is output in the status line of the display if it attains or goes beyond the upper limit value the warning Level overrange or Unleveled is output Please note limit and or other limiting factors Table 4 1 Basic switching levels for SMLO1 03 5SMVO3 current model of SMVO3 only w o B10 ew lm SMLO1 5 dBm 0 5 2 dBm 3 8 SML02 03 9MV03 3 dBm 2 7 0 dBm 5 10 D usw in 5 dB Stufen Then the following level ranges will arise 0 dB setting of attenuator MEM CW from until AM from until SMLO1 5 20 15 dBm 5 8 13 dBm 2 17 15 dBm 2 8 13 dBm SML02 03 SMV03 3 20 17 dBm 3 10 13 dBm 0 17 17 dBm 0 8 13 dBm max level depends on AM depth Change of a fixed range via SCPI outp amod auto pow Odbm wai outp amod fixed 1090 3123 12 4 5 E 6 RF Level R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Switching On Off Automatic Level Control ALC Settings for automatic level control ALC can be made in the Level ALC menu When level control is switched off ALC State Off switchover is made to a sample and hold mode In the sample and hold mode level control is switched on automatically for a short time after each level or frequency setting and the level control is held at the value attained With the Learn table function called up a new table can be prepared Level control OFF is used in multisource measurements to improve intermodulation
197. e AF signal on the UPL in channel 1 as reference then switch the source to channel 2 and measure level of crosstalk 2 gt 1 Carry out the same in reverse and measure level of crosstalk 1 gt 2 Limit values according to data sheet Read off harmonic distortion from the FMB limit values according to data sheet Test setup 6 PRESET FREQ Measurement frequency Measurement frequency 10 7 MHz 66 MHz 76 MHZ 98 MHz 87 MHz 110 MHz LEVEL 0 dBm MODULATION STEREO EXT L R MODE L R MPX Deviation 67 5kHz acc IEC 60315 4 DEMODULATION FM STEREO INTERN NOISE FILTER ON MAN RANGE RANGE 12dBm DEEMPHASIS 50us FILE LOAD INSTRUMENT STATE Mode Default GEN FUNCTION Voltage 0 707V ANLR INSTRUMENT Channels 1 amp 2 INSTRUMENT Ch1 Ch2 Imped 6000hm FREQ PHASE Meas Time Precision FILTER CCIR wtd CCIR unwtd A Weighting FUNCTION RMS amp S N Q Pk amp S N FUNCTION S N Sequ ON The following filter detector combinations need to be measured CCIR Weighted Quasipeak CCIR Unweighted RMS A Weighted RMS gt The data sheet values need to be checked 10 31 E 6 Test sequence R amp S SML RESEOSMVOS MPX deviation pilot tone level and RDS subcarrier Test setup Settings on R amp S SML R amp S SMV03 Settings on FMB Measurement Preemphasis Test setup Settings on R amp S SML R amp S SMV03 Setting on FMB Measurement 1090 3123 12 gt Test setup 6
198. e STB is structured in accordance with SCPI Analogously the ESE can be taken as the ENABle part of the ESR 1090 3123 12 9 17 E 6 Status Reporting System Overview of Status Registers R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Error Queue Output buffer 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 not implemented T 6 5 4 3 SRQ 2 1 eq i 0 STATus OPERation Register amp S RQS MSS amp SES ESB bu An E amp THIT CC SRE STB amp not implemented amp amp amp amp amp PPE f e STATus QUEStionable Register IST flag Response to parallel poll amp 7 Power on amp 6 User Request 8 5 Command Error amp 4 Execution Error amp 3 Device Dependent Error amp logical AND amp 2 Query Error amp logical OR amp 1 Request Control of all bits amp 0 Operation Complete ESE ESR Fig 5 4 Overview of status registers 1090 3123 12 5 18 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Status Reporting System Description of Status Registers Status Byte STB and Service Request Enable Register SRE The STB is already defined in IEEE 488 2 It provides a rough overview of the instrument status by collecting the pieces of information of the lower registers It can thus be compared with the CONDition part of an SCPI register and assumes the highest level within the SCPI hierarchy A special feature is that bit 6 acts as the sum bit of the remaining bits of
199. e interpulse period INVerse The RF signal is suppressed during the pulse Example SOUR PULM POL INV RST value is NORM SOURce PULM SOURce EXTernal INTernal The command selects the source of the modulating signal INTernal Internal pulse generator EXTernal Signal fed externally Example SOUR PULM SOUR INT RST value is INT SOURce PULM STATe ON OFF The command switches on or off the pulse modulation Example SOUR PULM STAT ON RST value is OFF 1090 3123 12 6 30 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 SOURce PULSe SOURce PULSe Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to set the pulse generator Option R amp S SML B3 The pulse generation is triggered on principle with the trigger certainly being able to be set to free run using TRIG PULS SOUR AUTO as well SOURce PULSe Option R amp S SML B3 DELay 20 ns to 1 3s DOUBle DELay 60 ns to 1 3 s STATe ON OFF PERiod 100 ns to 85 s WIDTh 20 ns to 1 3s SOURce PULSe DELay 20 ns to 1 3s The command specifies the time from the start of the period to the first edge of the pulse Due to the construction of the instrument this parameter is set to O if SOUR PULS DOUB STAT Is set to ON The old value is activated again as soon as the double pulse has been switched off Example SOUR PULS DEL 10us RST value is 1 us SOURce PULSe DOUBle The commands to check the second pulse are under this node If SOUR PULS DOUB STAT is se
200. e2 SWEep FREQuency DWELI 10 ms 5s S MODE AUTO MANual STEP RUNNinng Query only SPACing LINear LOGarithmic STEP LINear 0 1 MHz Hz LOGarithmic 0 01 PCT 100 PCT PCT SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency The commands to set the frequency sweeps are under this node Keyword FREQuency can be omitted Then the commands are SCPI compatible unless stated otherwise see examples SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency DWELI 10 msto5s The command sets the time per frequency step dwell Example SOUR2 SWE DWEL 20ms RST value is 15 ms SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency MODE AUTO MANual STEP The command specifies the run of the sweep AUTO Each trigger triggers exactly one entire sweep cycle STEP Each trigger triggers only one sweep step single step mode The frequency increases by the value defined under SOUR2 SWE STEP Example SOUR2 SWE MODE AUTO RST value is AUTO SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency SPACing LiNear LOGarithmic The command selects whether the steps have linear or logarithmic spacings Example SOUR2 SWE SPAC LOG RST value is LIN 1090 3123 12 6 43 E 6 SOURce2 SWEep R amp S SML RESOSMVOS SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency STEP The commands to set the step width with linear and logarithmic sweeps are under this node The settings of STEP LIN and STEP LOG are independent of each other SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency STEP LlNear 0 to 1 MHz The command sets the step width with the linear sweep If STEP
201. eaning of the bits used in the event status redgisler cc cceccccseecseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 20 Resetting of instrument FUNCTIONS nennen nennen nennen 5 24 Intertace TUI C ONS ee ds 5 26 Universal Comitialis esu aci bes Load 5 27 Addressed Kee ien nu ne E 5 27 Control characters for RS 232 C interface nenn nenne nen enennnnenennnnn nennen 5 29 CORO Ren lee 6 3 Device Response to OPTA dd 6 4 Error messages of hardware monitoring esses 9 8 Error messages as a result of loss of data 9 8 Maximum BE erte 10 1 Measuring equipment and accessories nenne nennen 10 2 Measuring the frequency setting me 10 7 Performance Test TOD OM osi iodo 10 34 Measuring equipment and accessories enne nnns 10 38 Performance Test RepofFt crt a ees libe dass ce dde uo mr Dai uda 10 49 Contents R amp S SML R amp S amp SMVO0S3 Figures Fig 1 1 PON Dane VICW TEE IL UU UM 1 5 Fig 1 2 Rear DAS Eeer 1 10 Fig 1 2 Rear panel VIGW nt ii ios 1 11 Fig 2 1 DISPYT AM Seling ER 2 3 Fig 2 2 Display for pattern selling EE 2 5 Fig 3 1 Design ot the display EE 3 1 Fig 3 2 Modulation AM Men ltda A re are 3 2 Fig 3 3 BE UCI MA NL 3 7 Fig 3 4 Select LISEWINOOW Eee ee 3 8 Fig 3 5 Delete List WIN GOW a eier 3 8 Fig 3 6 EIE TUG TON Be E EEN 3 10 Fig 3 7 FILCONHGTUNCHON EE 3 11 Fig 3 8 Editeditng HEEN 3 12 Fig 3 9 Delele editing TUnellon u 824er mI 3 13 Fig 4 1 SR eg un EE 4 1 Fig 4 2 Typical setups with frequen
202. easure the level at the test frequencies The frequency response is the difference between the highest and the lowest measured value The level error is the deviation from the set value Measurement method for very small levels 80 dBm Caution A prerequisite for correct measurement is full RF shielding of the components used Test setup Testsetup 1 a low noise preamplifier must be connected between the R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 and the test receiver Measurement Having measured a level continue by carrying out a calibration This enables levels down to the lowest limits set for the R amp S SML R amp S SMVO03 to be measured Output reflection coefficient Test setup gt Test setup 4 spectrum analyzer mode Test method Since the VSWR of a source must be measured a purely passive measurement using the VSWR bridge is possible only at levels where the output impedance of the electronic attenuator defines the VSWR At higher levels the influence of the level control must be included This is done with the aid of an auxiliary transmitter which transmits a wave into the DUT This wave has a slightly offset carrier frequency the difference frequency within the control bandwidth of the level control and is superimposed on the decaying wave of the DUT At an ideal internal impedance only the decaying wave of the DUT flows back into the bridge whilst at an internal impedance that deviates from the ideal there is s
203. ection of the standard traffic area codes Traffic area code A Traffic area code B Traffic area code C Traffic area code D Traffic area code E Traffic area code F IEC IEEE bus command SOUR STER ARI BK A moO WwW gt 7 Switching on ff the RDS functions On RDS switched on Off RDS switched off IEC IEEE bus command SOUR STER STAT Input value of the frequency deviation of the RDS subcarrier IEC IEEE bus command SOUR STER RDS DEV 2kHz Selection and activation of the RDS data set 1 RDS data set 1 2 RDS data set 2 3 RDS data set 3 4 RDS data set 4 5 RDS data set 5 IEC IEEE bus command SOUR STER DAT DS1 The RDS data sets cannot manually be entered They have to be sent via the IEC IEEC bus or the RS 232 interface 4 19 E 6 Stereo Modulation Option R amp S SML B5 R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Program Service Name Indication of the program service name of the selected RDS data set hexadecimal value OOOO bisFFFF Each RDS data set has its own program service name lt can only be modified over the IEC IEEC bus or the RS 232 interface see section RDS commands Program Idendification Indication of the program service name of the selected RDS data set hexadecimal value OOOO bisFFFF Each RDS data set has its own program identification It can only be modified over the IEC IEEC bus or the RS 232 interface see section RDS commands Traffic Program owitching on off traffic programm On Traffic p
204. el The instrument is switched to remote control REMOTE state as follows IEC IEEE bus when it receives an addressed command from the controller RS 232 C interface when it receives a carriage return CR 0Dh or a line feed lt LF gt 0Ah from the controller During remote control operation via the front panel is disabled The instrument remains in the remote state until it is reset to the manual state via the front panel or via the IEC IEEE bus Switching from manual to remote control and vice versa does not affect the instrument settings Remote Control via IEC IEEE Bus Setting the Device Address The IEC IEEE bus address of the instrument is factory set to 28 It can be changed manually in the Utilities System GPIB Address menu or via the IEC IEEE bus Addresses 1 to 30 are permissible Manually Call Utilities System GPIB Address menu Enter desired address gt Terminate input using the 1x ENTER key Via IEC IEEE bus CALL IBFIND DEV1 generators Open port to instrument CALL IBPAD generator 28 Transfer old address to controller CALL IBWRT generators SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 20 Set instrument to new address CALL IBPAD generator 20 Transfer new address to controller Indications during Remote Control The remote control state is indicated by Remote being displayed in the STATUS line In the REMOTE state the STATUS page is always displayed Locked indicates that the LOCAL key is
205. elay pulse width and pulse period can be set The polarity of pulse modulation is selectable With Pulse Polarity Normal the RF level is switched on if HIGH level is present at the PULSE modulation input Settings for the pulse modulation and the pulse generator can be made in the Modulation Pulse menu Menu selection Modulation Pulse 100 000 0000 mHz 10 0 dem Modulation Pulse Pulse Mod Source Pulse Gen Pulse Mod Polarity Normal Pulse Generator Settings Pulse Period Pulse width Pulse Delay Double Pulse State Pulse Trigger Settings Trigger Mode Execute Single Pulse Ext Triqger Slope Ext Gated Input Polarity Normal Back A Fig 4 12 Modulation Pulse menu preset setting equipped with option R amp S SML B3 Pulse Mod Source Selection of modulation source Off Ext and Pulse Gen are available IEC IEEE bus commands SOUR PULM SOUR EXT STAT ON Pulse Mod Polarity Selection of polarity of modulation signal Normal The RF signal is on with HIGH level present Inverse The RF signal is suppressed with HIGH level present IEC IEEE bus command SOUR PULM POL NORM Pulse Period Input value of pulse period IEC IEEE bus command SOUR PULS PER 10us Pulse Width Input value of pulse width IEC IEEE bus command SOUR PULS WIDT lus Pulse Delay Input value of single pulse delay This value is indicated only if Double Pulse otate is set to Off IEC IEEE bus command SOUR ZPULS DEE lus 1090 3123 1
206. elects AC coupling of the external signal source 1090 3123 12 9 6 E 6 R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Structure and Syntax of Device Messages Fig 5 1 Tree structure of SCPI command systems using the SOURce system as an example Optional key words Long and short form 1090 3123 12 Some key words occur at several levels within one command system Their effect depends on the structure of the command that is to say at what position of the header of a command they are inserted Example SOURce FM POLarity NORMal This command contains the key word POLarity at the third command level It defines the polarity between the modulator and the modulation signal Example SOURce FM EXTernal POLarity NORMal This command contains the key word POLarity at the fourth command level It defines the polarity between the modulation voltage and the resulting direction of the modulation only for the external signal source indicated Some command systems permit certain key words to be optionally inserted into the header or omitted These key words are marked in the description by square brackets The instrument must recognize the full command length for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standard Some commands can be considerably shortened by omitting optional key words Example SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet 1 This command immediately sets the offset of the signal to 1 dB The following command has the same effect POWer OFFSet 1
207. els To abbreviate the command line the second command is started with the level below SOURce FM The colon after the semicolon is omitted The abbreviated form of the command line reads as follows CALL IBWRT generators SOURce FM MODE LOCKed INTernal FREQuency 1kHz However a new command line always has to be started with the complete path Example CALL IBWRT generator SOURCe FM MODE LOCKed CALL IBWRT generators SOURce FM INTernal FREQuency 1kHz Responses to Queries For each setting command a query is defined unless explicitly specified otherwise The query is formed by adding a question mark to the setting command in question Responses to queries to the SCPI standard are partly subject to stricter rules than responses to the IEEE 488 2 standard 1 The requested parameter is transmitted without header Example SOURce EXTernal COUPling Response AC 2 Maximum values minimum values and all further quantities requested via a special text parameter are returned as numerical values Example FREQuency MAX Response 10E3 3 Numerical values are output without a unit Physical quantities are referred to the basic units or to the units set with the Unit command Example FREQuency Response 1E6 for 1 MHz 4 Truth values Boolean parameters are returned as 0 for Off and 1 for On Example OUTPut STATe Response 1 5 Text character data is returned in a short form Example SOURce FM SOURce Response
208. en a ooh a N 4 11 Modules indication eerte erret soe eas 6 8 MOS Dl ee Sree te 5 19 AIC inet ed Ree a n Oe ela ee ae UIS 5 10 New Line commande 5 9 NINE tc 5 10 Non interrrupting level setting ssssessssssus 4 5 Note Blur ea 4 4 NTRaNSIION DAN taa 5 17 N mericAnput TIeld en nenn asia 1 6 INUICTIC use een 1 6 N mencal SUM zs rr e ae 5 8 Numerical values ba 5 10 1090 3123 12 R amp S SML R8E SOSMVO3 Offset MAUI o es 4 1 e 4 4 RE GE 1 5 Operating time Coumter RR een 4 65 6 8 Operation EMG m N 1 3 general instructions ee eeee esce seen rans 1 1 Manual CONTO EE 4 1 putting into OD CY ATION NEEN 1 1 remote CONTO Ree Sao aua CR Doa ee 6 1 A E E 1 1 Operation Complete Du 5 20 OPERation Status Register sum bit 5 19 Output B cn 1 8 4 46 6 12 PULSE VIDEO initio i MEM dS 1 10 4 47 dic pA NN sets 1 10 4 59 EE 1 8 6 21 Output buffer IEC IEEE Dusl nen 5 15 OUPUCIEVO s ieri S ee 4 4 6 27 Quitput unit ECAEEE Dus it ettet 5 15 Overlapping execufon iiien 5 14 Overview SAUS EE 5 18 Syntax elemiellls nennen 5 12 RAIN sita 8 1 Parallel Doll uet O NE 5 23 Parallel poll enable register PPE ssuusss 5 20 Parameter A ee re Jig text EE 5 10 Parameters Commande 5 10 Panty 929256 aen cie pe stes tees use secet corpua 4 57 6 47 Panty
209. en ee a ee 4 53 Fig 4 21 oWebD s EFGENIMERU EE 4 54 Fig 4 22 JMISS un Mia a da 4 55 Fig 4 23 Wee EE TO edel 4 55 Fig 4 24 Utilities SYST Men E 4 56 Fig 4 25 Utilities System GPIB Address men 4 56 1090 3123 12 10 E 6 R SOSML R amp S SMVO3 Contents Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig 1090 3123 12 4 26 4 27 4 28 4 29 4 30 4 31 4 32 4 33 4 34 4 35 4 36 4 38 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 9 1 Utilities System RS232 menu 4 57 Utilities System Security menu 4 58 Utilities RefOsc menu preset setting ENEE 4 59 Menu E LN EE 4 60 Utilities Protect menu preset seitng uk EEN 4 61 Utilities Calib menu preset Setting ccoooccccocccccoonccononnnconoconannonanonnonnnnonannnnnnnos 4 62 Utilities Diag Config menu 4 63 Utilities Diag TPoint menu EEN 4 64 Utilities Diag Param menu 4 65 Utiles Tes men srta E 4 66 Utilities ModKey menu preset seitng nen ennnne nenn nenne nnne ernennen 4 67 SIA TUS Men e TH E 4 69 Tree structure of SCPI command systems using the SOURce system SN 5 7 Device model for remote control via the IEC IEEE bus 5 13 Status redister model ci 5 16 Overview of status reQiSters ccccccccsseccseecceseecececeueeccsecceucececcsaneeaueessasesueesseneeaees 5 18 Pin
210. enings are free e no signal voltage levels exceeding the permissible limits are applied at the inputs e the outputs of the instrument are not overloaded or connected incorrectly If these points are not observed the instrument might be damaged Unpacking the Instrument lt a gt gt Take the instrument out of the shipping box and check whether the j items listed in the packing list and in the lists of accessories are all included gt Remove the two protective caps from the front and rear of the instrument and carefully check the instrument for damage remove protective cabs Should the instrument be damaged immediately notify the forwarder who shipped the instrument to you and keep the box and packing material For further transport or shipment of the instrument the original packing should also be used It is recommended to keep at least the two protective caps for front and rear side in order to prevent damage to the controls and connectors 1090 3123 12 1 1 E 6 Putting into Operation R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Setting up the Instrument For applications in the laboratory or on a work bench it is recommended that the support feet on the bottom of the instrument be extended For the LCD display this provides the optimum viewing angle which typically ranges from perpendicular to the display front to approximately 30 below Warning Danger of injury The feet may fold
211. equency and level of the RF output signal are set via keys FREQ and LEVEL in the DATA INPUT field Frequency 500 MHz Level 10 dBm Operating steps Explanations MENU VARIATION Reset the instrument to the defined state DATA INPUT oet the frequency to 500 MHz M The menu cursor marks the Y dBuV permanent frequency indication DATA INPUT Set the level to 10 dBm The menu cursor marks the ENTER dB m permanent level indication Reset the menu cursor to the menu field 1090 3123 12 2 1 E 6 Sample Setting for First Users R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 AM modulation of the output signal The output signal is to be amplitude modulated next AM modulation depth 10 5 AM signal 3 kHz sine Operating steps Explanations MENU VARIATION MENU VARIATION Select menu Modulation using rotary knob Modulation Press SELECT key or rotary knob The submenu is displayed MENU VARIATION MENU VARIATION Select submenu AM Press SELECT key or rotary knob The AM setting menu is displayed MENU VARIATION MENU VARIATION Select parameter AM Depth using rotary knob Press SELECT key or rotary knob AM Depth The menu cursor marks the setting value DATA INPUT Enter modulation depth 10 5 and acknowledge using x1 Enter key Reset menu cursor to AM Depth using BACK key MENU VARIATION MENU VARIATION Select AM Source using rotary knob Press SELECT key
212. er settings Frequency accuracy after switching on when the oven controlled reference oscillator is fitted option R amp S SML B1 The reference oscillator needs some minutes of warm up time to reach its nominal frequency During this period of time the output frequency does not yet reach its final value either In the status line in the header field of the display the message OVEN COLD is displayed for this time 1090 3123 12 1 3 E 6 Putting into Operation R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 RAM With Battery Back Up The R amp S SML R amp S SMVO03 has a static read write memory CMOS RAM with battery back up in which 50 different complete settings of the instrument can be stored cf Chapter 3 section Storing and Calling of Instrument Settings In addition all data and or lists the user enters himself such as for user correction of the level are stored in the RAM Further all data of the calibrations running within the instrument in the R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 are stored in the RAM cf Chapter 4 section Calibration A lithium battery with a service life of approx 5 years serves to supply the RAM with power When the battery is discharged the data stored will be lost Exchanging the battery is described in the Service Manual Preset Setting A defined setting status is achieved by pressing the PRESET key Preset Status RF frequency 100 MHz RF level 10 dBm Reference frequency internal adjustment off Offsets 0 Mo
213. erator level is always in V Example after RST pow 0 WALES DOW gt Answer DBM POW Answer 0 000000E 00 sSUnit pow dbuv Tun pow Answer DBUV pow Answer 1 069897E 02 pow 0 SUALE POW Answer DBUV pow Answer 0 000000E 00 unit pow dbm unit pow Answer DBUV pow Answer 1 069897E 02 1090 3123 12 6 52 E 6 R SOSML R amp S SMVO3 List of Commands List of Commands EX 85 ONTOFF ease 85 ON OFF Desc es age es ease Is ease Is ES en DIAGnostic MEASure POINt not SCPI ee ON OFF en en OUTPut1 AFIXed RANGe LOWer 2 OUTPut1 AMODe AUTO FIXed not SCPI age T T T f T T T T A f T ON OFF foe OUTPut2 VOL Tage 0 V to 4 V not SCPI OUTPut1 STATe PON OFF UNCHanged CALibration ROSCillator DATA CALibration ROSCillator S TORe SOURce AM DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT Pf BB DIAGnostic INFO CCOunt POWer Ac IDO EEE LITE pen OFF LON E ON TOFF CER E o HsoumejcoRRedencsESEleq aan O e SOURce CORRection CSET DATA FREQuency POINts nt SCPE SOURce CORRection CSET DATA POWer POINts Po nSP See MEMory NSTates ON OFF 1090 3123 12 6 53 E 6 List of Commands R amp S SML R amp S SMVO03 IE ler E SSES E RESCH ON OFF sm STaNiard WIDE sm ENTE sz ON OFF sz sa oni OFF E Jee ON I OFF sz
214. ermined by interpolation based on the nearest correction values When user correction is switched on Ucor user correction is displayed in the header field in addition to the level The RF output level is the sum of both values Level Ucor output level If an offset is selected at the same time the displayed level value is the difference between the amplitude and the offset entered in the Level menu Amplitude offset level User correction is active in all operating modes when switched on Menu selection Level UCor 100 0000000 10 0 dem teener o rm Off Select List LI ot Delete List Edit List Insert Back A Fig 4 7 Level UCor menu State Switching on off user correction IEC IEEE bus command SOUR CORR ON Select List Selection of a list or generation of a new list see Chapter 3 Section List Editor IEC IEEE bus command SODURSCOBRSCSET UCORL Delete List Deletion of a list see Chapter 3 Section List Editor IEC IEEE bus command SOURZCORRSCSETSDEL UCORZ Edit List Selection of editing mode for modifying a selected list see Chapter 3 Section List Editor IEC IEEE bus commands SSOURICORRBSCSETI DATA EBREO 105MHz LO TIME Zi yrsa SOUR CORR CSET DATA POW 1dB 0 9dB 0 8dB 1090 3123 12 4 7 E 6 RF Level R amp S SML RESOSMVOS Menu selection Level UCor 100 000 0000 mHz 10 0 dem Lena UC or Edit RF OF OCIO 1 0000000000 GHz 0 0 de Donz 1 000000001 0 GHz 0 0 O
215. et but passes them on to the hardware only upon request by the command recognition As this is only effected at the end of a command line the sequence of setting commands in the command line is not relevant The data are only checked for compatibility among one another and with the instrument hardware immediately before they are transferred to the instrument hardware If it is found that an execution is not possible an execution error is signalled to the status reporting system All alterations mad to the data set are cancelled and the instrument hardware is not reset Due to the delayed checking and hardware setting it is permissible however that impermissible instrument states are briefly set within a command line without an error message being produced At the end of the command line however a permissible instrument state must be attained Before the data are passed on to the hardware the settling bit in the STATus OPERation register is set The hardware makes the settings and resets the bit when the new state has settled This procedure can be used for synchronization of command processing IEC IEEE bus queries cause the data set management to send the desired data to the output unit Status Reporting System The status reporting system collects information on the instrument state and makes it available to the output unit upon request A detailed description of the structure and function is given in section Status Reporting System 1
216. eturn to the menu by means of the BACK or SELECT key Setting of the RF level also in the LEVEL menu SAVE Opens the storing of the current instrument setting Memory selection is effected by entering a number 1 to 50 and is finished by means of the x1 ENTER key RCL Opens the calling of an instrument setting stored Memory selection is effected by entering a number 1 to 50 and is finished by means of the x1 ENTER key gt Cf Chapter 3 Sections Use of FREQ and LEVEL Keys RF Frequency RF Level and Storing and Calling of Instrument Settings QUICK SELECT E 10 amp ROHDEASCHWARZ VECTOR SIGNAL GENERATOR 9 kHz 3 3 GHz SMV 03 Fig 1 1 Front panel view 1090 3123 12 1 5 E 6 Front panel 1147 7509 13 FUNCTION MENU VARIATION DATA INPUT QUICK SELECT 10 e ROHDE amp SCHWARZ VECTOR SIGNAL GENERATOR 9 kHz 3 3 GHz SMV 03 Fig 1 1 Front panel view 1090 3123 12 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 4 DATA INPUT Numeric input field Zo GJ us Le Le Da La Lu Numeric values decimal point and minus sign can be entered by means of the digital keys Oto9 Enters the digit e Enters the decimal point lt Enters the minus sign Deletes the la
217. f 1 MHz 0 7 dB Output impedance 50 O Output matching Frequency R amp S SMLO1 level gt 10 dBm R amp S SMLO2 03 R amp S SMVO03 level gt 8 dBm R amp S SMLO1 level x 10 dBm R amp S SML02 03 R amp S SMVO3 8 dBm f 300 MHz 2 3 f 300 MHz 1 8 f gt 1 5 GHz 2 3 same as R amp S SML R amp S SMV standard specification Range Spectral purity f gt 100 kHz same as R amp S SMLO1 02 03 R amp S SMVO3 standard specification Harmonics R amp S SMLO1 R amp S SMLO2 03 R amp S SMVO3 lt 30 dBc at levels lt 20 dBm lt 30 dBc at levels lt 18 dBm Subharmonics same as R amp S SMLO1 02 03 R amp S SMVO3 standard specification Nonharmonics Amplitude modulation same as R amp S SML01 02 03 R amp S SMVO3 standard specification AM distortion 3 _140 dBm to 21 dBm for f lt 5 MHz f gt 3 GHz for R amp S SMLO3 R amp S SMV03 1090 3123 12 B 2 same as R amp S SML01 02 03 R amp S SMVO3 standard specification temperature range 20 C to 55 C E 1 Before putting the product into operation for the first time make sure to read the following Safety Instructions All plants and locations of the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies make every effort to keep the safety standard of our products up to date and to offer our customers the highest possible degree of safety Our products and the auxiliary equipment required
218. f the RS 232 C interface see section Interface Functions Device Messages Commands and Device Responses Device messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC IEEE bus the ATN control line not being active ASCII code is used The device messages are largely identical for the two interfaces IEC IEEE bus and RS 232 C A distinction is made according to the direction in which device messages are sent on the IEC IEEE bus Commands are messages the controller sends to the instrument They operate the device functions and request information Commands are subdivided according to two criteria 1 According to the effect they have on the instrument Setting commands cause instrument settings such as reset of the instrument or setting the output level to 1 V Queries cause data to be provided for output queries on the IEC IEEE bus eg for device identification or polling of the active input 2 According to their definition in standard IEEE 488 2 Common Commands are exactly defined as to their function and notation in standard IEEE 488 2 They refer to functions such as the management of the standardized status registers reset and selftest Device specific refer to functions depending on the features of the commands instrument such as frequency setting A majority of these commands has also been standardized by the SCPI committee Device responses are messages the instruments sends to the controller in reply to
219. for example calling up of menus selection and editing of parameters use of the list editor and the SAVE RECALL function This chapter also contains an overview of menus showing the functions available for the instruments and its options It is useful to read the sample settings for first users in Chapter 2 Short Tutorial Design of the Display 1 100 0000000 mHz 10 0 dem Q man TAO 3 Frequency Level Modulation LF Output Pulse Output Sweep Utilities Help Fig 3 1 Design of the display 1 Header field The header field of the display indicates frequency and level of the RF output signal In the RF sweep operating mode the start and stop frequencies are displayed in two lines one above the other The start and stop levels are indicated in the LEVEL sweep operating mode correspondingly 2 Status line The status line indicates at the left the menu path of the current menu and at the right the operating mode and operating state of the instrument Error messages and notes for caution are also displayed in the status line 3 Menu fields The indication fields below the status line are reserved for the menu representations The image contents of these fields change as a function of the menu selected The lowest menu level shows the setting menu with the current settings of the selected menu Settings are made in select or input windows which open when the current setting is activated Menu cursor The menu cursor
220. for them are designed and tested in accordance with the relevant safety standards Compliance with these standards is continuously monitored by our quality assurance system The product described here has been designed and tested in accordance with the EC Certificate of Conformity and has left the manufacturer s plant in a condition fully complying with safety standards To maintain this condition and to ensure safe operation observe all instructions and warnings provided in this manual If you have any questions regarding these safety instructions the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies will be happy to answer them Furthermore it is your responsibility to use the product in an appropriate manner This product is designed for use solely in industrial and laboratory environments or in the field and must not be used in any way that may cause personal injury or property damage You are responsible if the product is used for an intention other than its designated purpose or in disregard of the manufacturer s instructions The manufacturer shall assume no responsibility for such use of the product The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with its product documentation and within its performance limits see data sheet documentation the following safety instructions Using the product requires technical skills and a basic knowledge of English It is therefore essential that the product be used exclusively by skilled and
221. frequency Negative values for SPAN are permitted then STARt STOP is true The following relations hold STARt CENTer SPAN 2 STOP CENTer SPAN 2 Example SOUR FREQ SPAN 400MHz RST value is STOP START SOURce FREQuency STARt 9 kHz to Fmax Fmax depending on the model This command defines the starting value of the frequency for the sweep operation Parameters STARt STOP SPAN and CENT are coupled to each other STARt may be larger than STOP As to specified range Cf FREO CENT Example SOUR FREQ STAR 500MHz RST value is 100 MHz SOURce FREQuency STOP 9 kHz to Fmax Fmax depending on the model This command indicates the final value of the frequency for the sweep operation see STARt as well As to the specified range cf FREQ CENT Example SOUR FREQ STOP 1GHz RST value is 500 MHz SOURce FREQuency STEP The command to enter the step width for the frequency setting if frequency values UP or DOWN are used is under this node This command is coupled to the Knob Step command in manual control Only linear step widths can be set SOURce FREQuency STEP INCRement 0to1 GHz 0 2 GHz 0 3 GHz R amp S SMLO1 R amp S SMLO2 R amp S SMLO3 R amp S SMVO3 The command sets the step width for the frequency setting Example SOUR FREQ STEP INCR 1MHz RST value is 1 MHz SOURce FREQuency ERANge ON OFF The command activates or deactivates the Extended Divider Range function Example SOUR
222. gnal generator Table 10 5 item 5 Test setup Connect the Rf output of the R amp S SMVO3 to the spectrum analyzer connect the signal generator to the input of R amp S SMVO3 Test method By applying a sinewave AC voltage to the or Q input an amplitude modulation with a suppressed carrier is generated The modualtion frequency response is determined by measuring the sidebands as a function of the frequency of the applied AC voltage Measurement gt Settings on R amp S SMVO3 Test level pegel 0 dBm test frequency gt 30 3 MHz Select State IQ in the menu Vector Mod Settings on signal generator level Pegel 0 5 V Vpeax corresponding to 4 dBm Settings on analyzer Center frequency test frequency Span 30 kHz RBW 10 kHz Reference level test level 6 dB Scale 2 dB div 1147 7621 12 10 45 E 6 Test sequence R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 gt Vary the frequency from 1 MHz to 30 MHz on the signal generator and measure the modulation sidebands on the analyzer CENTER FREQ test frequency modulation frequency The result level for a sideband frequency is the average value of the left and the right sideband level For evaluation determine the difference between the highest and the lowest sideband gt The modulation frequency response is the difference between the highest and the lowest sideband Residual carrier and leakage Test equipment Test setup Measurement 1147 7621 12 opectrum
223. he external AM input are under this node SOURce AM EXTernal COUPling AC DC The command selects the type of coupling for the external AM input AC The d c voltage content is separated from the modulation signal DC The modulation signal is not altered RST value is AC Example SOUR AM EXT COUP AC SOURce AM INTernal The settings for the internal AM input are effected under this node Here the same hardware is set for AM FM M and SOURce2 This means that for example the following commands are coupled to each other and have the same effect SOURFAMSINT EREO SOUREEMSINT EREO SGOUERTPMSLNT EBREO SOUR2 FREQ CW SOURce AM INTernal FREQuency 0 1Hz to 1 MHz The command sets the modulation frequency Example SOUR AM INT FREQ 15kHz RST value is 1 kHz SOURce AM SOURce EXTernal INTernal TTONe The command selects the modulation source An external and an internal modulation source can be specified at the same time Example SOUR AM SOUR EXT INT RST value is INT RST value is INT SOURce AM STATe OFF ON The command switches amplitude modulation on or off Example SOUR AM STAT ON RST value is OFF 1090 3123 12 6 14 E 6 R SOSML R amp S SMVO3 SOURce CORRection SOURce CORRection Subsystem The CORRection subsystem permits a correction of the output level The correction is effected by adding user defined table values to the output level as a function of the RF frequency In the SML this su
224. he status reporting system c f Section Status Reporting System STATus OPERation register and STATus QUEStionable register are not implemented RST has no influence on the status registers nu TL eim STATus PRESet QUEue NEXT STATus PRESet The command resets the edge detectors and ENABle parts of all registers to a defined value All PTRansition parts are set to FFFFh i e all transitions from O to 1 are detected All NTRansition parts are set to O i e a transition from 1 to O in a CONDition bit is not detected Example STAT PRES STATus QUEue NEXT The command queries the entry that has been in the error queue for the longest time and thus deletes it Positive error numbers denote errors specific of the instrument negative error numbers error messages specified by SCPI see Chapter 5 If the error queue is empty O No error is returned The command is identical to SYST ERR Example STAT QUE NEXT Answer 221 Settings conflict 1090 3123 12 6 45 E 6 SYSTem R amp S SML RESOSMVOS SYSTem System In this system a number of commande for general functions which are not immediately related to signal generation are combined d uu aee SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess 1 to 30 SERial BAUD 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 BITS 7 8 SBITs 112 CONTrol RTS ON IBFull RFR PACE XON NONE PARity ODD EVEN NONE DISPlay UPDate S
225. iag TPoint RFOn Ort Test Point MB OFFSETCPU OOOO Back y Fig 4 33 Utilities Diag TPoint menu State Switching on off the voltage display in the header field Test Point Input value of test point IEC IEEE bus command DIAG POIN xxxx 1090 3123 12 4 64 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Utilities Display of Service Data Diag Param The Diag Param submenu offers access to various parameters such as serial number software version operating hours counter and overvoltage count Menu selection Utilities Diag Param 100 000 000 0 mz 10 0 dem Utiities iagParam fon Serial No 012345673 Software Version 1 30 Software Date May 31 z006 Power On Count Operation Time Overload Prot Count Boot Code Linknown Boot Code Version Linknown Flash Size Linknown Ram Size Unknown MMI Version 0215 7 Est Cal Date Jul 03 Z000 Stereocoder SW Version 01 02 33 Stereocoder DSP Version 02 03 4b Back y Fig 4 34 Utilities Diag Param menu For information on IEC IEEE bus commands see section DIAGnostic System 1090 3123 12 4 65 E 6 Utilities R amp S SML RESEOSMVOS Test The R amp S SML R amp S SMVOS3 carries out a selftest on switching on the instrument On switching on the RAM and ROM contents are checked If an error is detected this is indicated through a corresponding error message The battery voltage of the non volatile RAM is also checked on power up If the voltage falls below 2 5 V
226. ible Error Sources R amp S SML R amp S SMVO03 Possible Error Sources The error messages issued by the continuous monitoring of diagnosis points are described in the following table Troubleshooting should be performed according to the order given in the table since an error mentioned further down could be caused by those above Table 9 1 Error messages of hardware monitoring 174 Reference PLL The PLL of the If unit is set to external reference unlocked 800 MHz reference oscillator on the main board is out of synchronization Level or frequency of external reference does not Output frequency correspond to data sheet value not correct No external reference signal at the 10 MHz REF connector rear of unit 175 Main PLL The PLL of the main Calibration is missing or erroneous for example unlocked oscillator on the main after an exchange of modules or batteries board is out of synchronization Output frequency not correct 110 Output The level control for the Level outside the specified range unleveled OPU 1 output level on the main board is switched off Overload at AM EXT DC gt Output level not Calibration is missing or erroneous for example after correct an exchange of modules or batteries Error messages issued as a result of loss of data for example on exchanging a battery or software update are listed in the following table Table 9 2 Error messages as a result of loss of data Displayed me
227. ies gt The frequency response is the difference between the highest and the lowest measured value The level error is the deviation from the set value Measurement method for small levels 80 dBm to 25 dBm Caution A prerequisite for correct measurement is full RF shielding of the components used Measurement principle A line measurement in RF level mode is carried out at an output level from the R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 of 25 dBm and measurements are then carried out this mode down to 80 dBm Test setup gt Test setup 1 Settings on the R amp S FREQ SMLO1 Frequency that shows the largest deviation at O dBm 120 kHz 50 MHz 1100 MHz LEVEL 6 dBm 5 dB steps as far as 80 dBm 1090 3123 12 10 13 E 6 Test sequence R amp S SML RESOSMVOS Settings on the R amp S FREQ SML02 03 R amp S SMVO3 to 1100 MHz as R amp S SML01 from 1105 MHz every 20 MHz to 2200 MHz or 3300 MHz oettings on the test receiver RF LEVEL mode Center frequency FREQ R amp S SML Execute function CAL ABS POWER Record the reference value with the aid of the power sensor Now connect the RF output from the R amp S SML R amp S SMVOS to the RF connector of the receiver The receiver now measures the power via the RF connector and determines a correction factor which is taken into account in the subsequent measurements Caution This correction value applies to the set measurement frequency only Measurement M
228. in if they are not folded out completely or if the instrument is shifted The feet may break if they are overloaded Fold the feet completely in or completely out to ensure stability of the instrument and personal safety To avoid injuries never shift the instrument when its feet are folded out The overall load the instrument s own weight plus that of the instruments stacked on top of it on the folded out feet must not exceed 500 N Place the instrument on a stable surface Secure the instruments stacked on top of it against slipping e g by locking their feet on the top front frame When the instrument is standing on its folded out feet do not work under the instrument and do not put anything under it otherwise injuries or material damage could occur 500 N The instrument can be used in each of the positions shown here aa UA Cleaning the Outside and Storing What is necessary is essentially the cleaning of the instrument ATTENTION Instrument damage caused by cleaning agents Cleaning agents contain substances that may damage the instrument e g solvent containing cleaning agents may damage the front panel labeling or plastic parts Never use cleaning agents such as solvents thinners acetone etc acids bases or other substances The outside of the instrument is suitably cleaned using a soft line free dust cloth 1090 3123 12 1 2 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Putting into Operation Supply
229. inets or tables that for reasons of weight or stability are unsuitable for this purpose Always follow the manufacturer s installation instructions when installing the product and fastening it to objects or structures e g walls and shelves Handles on the products are designed exclusively for personnel to hold or carry the product It is therefore not permissible to use handles for fastening the product to or on means of transport such as cranes fork lifts wagons etc The user is responsible for securely fastening the products to or on the means of transport and for observing the safety regulations of the manufacturer of the means of transport Noncompliance can result in personal injury or material damage If you use the product in a vehicle it is the sole responsibility of the driver to drive the vehicle safely Adequately secure the product in the vehicle to prevent injuries or other damage in the event of an accident Never use the product in a moving vehicle if doing so could distract the driver of the vehicle The driver is always responsible for the safety of the vehicle The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for accidents or collisions If a laser product e g a CD DVD drive is integrated in a Rohde amp Schwarz product do not use any other settings or functions than those described in the product documentation Otherwise this may be hazardous to your health since the laser beam can cause irreversible damage to
230. ing Calling of Instrument Settings uu 220202200 n00nnnnnnnnnnn nun anno nnnnnnnnn nun nnnnn nennen 3 14 Menu Summary Tor EE 3 15 Menu Summary TOF ROS OMVOS iniciada Seu uw dra do 3 16 1090 3123 12 3 E 6 Contents R amp S SML RE SOSMVO3 4 JOSETTE ENEE 4 1 siguen D aa a 4 1 FTE QUEEN duri 4 2 Extended Divider Range EE 4 2 xig TE 4 3 LOVE TS ot PS 4 5 Non Interrupting Level Selina id 4 5 Switching On Off Automatic Level Control AC 4 6 User COMEGCHON UCA rad 4 7 IRF ONOFF RO Ys 4 8 Oe le UA Ten General dadas 4 9 Ville ie Eier uie eld ei ERE EO Do Lom 4 9 Simultaneous ModUldllOf EE 4 10 Mutual Switch Off of Modulation Tvpes nemen 4 10 IMOD ONOFF crm 4 10 A alod MOGUIALIONS EN 4 11 PoAotjeiiPier MijeroiUirzjiio gue Er 4 11 FFEGUGACY mereri iet tr ss 4 12 Phase Modulation ET 4 13 Pulse Modulation Option R amp S GM B i 4 14 Stereo Modulation Option R amp S GM Bai 4 17 Vector Modulation R amp S SMV03 only z 22020220000000n n0nonnon nun nnnnnn nun nnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nun nn 4 43 WO IMPAIRMENT EE 4 45 LF Generato E 4 46 Reif TE 4 46 PUESE VIDEO OUIDUL uicta dor Dua pex bence drame deua xad as nota 4 47 i i i lo mese e E Mec e m 4 49 Setting the Sweep Range Start Freq Stop Freq Center Freq Span
231. into a 19 rack by means of rack adapter ZZA 211 stock no 1096 3260 00 The mounting instructions are attached to the adapter ATTENTION Risk of damage to the instrument Ensure free air inlet at the perforation of the side walls and air outlet at the rear of the instrument in rack mounting Non observance may cause damage to the instrument 1090 3123 12 1 4 E 6 R SOSML R amp S SMVO3 Front Panel Explanation of Front and Rear Panel Elements of the Front Panel 1 ON OFF SWITCH POWER Oo ol 1147 7509 13 The On Off switch switches the instrument on I or off O gt Cf Chapter 1 Section Switching On Off the Instrument FUNCTION MENU VARIATION 2 DISPLAY Cf Chapter 3 for the design of the display 3 Parameter field Parameters RF frequency and RF level can be entered directly by means of the parameter keys alternatively to menu operation Further complete instrument settings can be stored and called DATA INPUT FREQ Opens the setting of the RF frequency via value input or variation by means of a rotary knob The current menu is maintained Return to the menu by means of the BACK or SELECT key Setting of the RF frequency also in the FREQUENCY menu LEVEL Opens the setting of the RF level via value input or variation by means of a rotary knob The current menu is maintained R
232. ion of active level of gate signal HIGH or LOW Normal HIGH and Inverse LOW are available IEC IEEE bus command TRIG PULS EGAT POL NORM 4 48 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Sweep Sweep The R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 features digital step by step sweep for the following parameters e RF frequency LF frequency e HF level A sweep is set in four basic steps which are demonstrated by the following example ie the setting of a frequency sweep 1 Set sweep range Start Freq and Stop Freq or Center Freq and Span 2 Select linear or logarithmic sweep Spacing 3 Select step size Step Lin or Step Log and dwell time Dwell 4 Switch on sweep Mode set to Auto Single Step Ext Single or Ext Step Setting the Sweep Range Start Freq Stop Freq Center Freq Span The sweep range for RF sweeps can be entered in two ways Either the Start Freq and Stop Freq are entered or Center Freq and Span Please note that the two parameter sets mutually affect each other as follows otart Freq altered Stop Freq unaltered Center Freq Start Freq Stop Freq 2 Span Stop Freq Start Freq Stop Freq altered Start Freq unaltered Center Freq Start Freq Stop Freq 2 Span Stop Freq Start Freq Center Freq altered Span unaltered Start Freq Center Freq Span 2 Stop Freq Center Freq Span 2 Span altered Center Freq unaltered Start Freq Center Freq Span 2 Stop Freq Center Freq
233. ion selected in Utilities ModKey RF ON OFF Switches on off the RF signal gt Cf Chapter 4 Sections The Help System Status and Chapter 3 Section Use of MOD ON OFF and RF ON OFF keys Exit the menus using the BACK key 7 MOD LF gt MOD Input of external modulation signal alternately for AM FM and erM RF 509 Cig LF Output LF signal of the internal LF generator RF 50 Q Output RF signal gt Cf Chapter 4 Sections LF Output and RF ON OFF key 8 PRESET Establishes a defined instrument status Confirm by SELEC key ERROR Indicates error and caution messages LOCAL Switches the instrument from the REMOTE mode remote control to the LOCAL mode manual control gt Cf Chapter 1 Section Preset Settings Chapter 9 Error Messages and Chapter 6 Remote Control Exit the menus using the BACK key 1 8 E 6 R SOSML R amp S SMVO3 Front Panel 9 QUICK SELECT The menu quick selection keys permit fast access to two menus selected 1147 7509 13 ASSIGN Stores the current menu as menu when the MENU key is pressed afterwards or as menu2 when the MENU2 key is pressed FUNCTION z afterwards MENU1 Activates menu1 stored a MENU2 Activates menu2 stored gt Cf Chapter 3 Section Quick Selection of Menu QUICK SELECT 10 R amp S SMVO3 only DATA INPUT
234. juries or material damage may occur It is the responsibility of the employer to select suitable personnel for operating the products Prior to switching on the product it must be ensured that the nominal voltage setting on the product matches the nominal voltage of the AC supply network If a different voltage is to be set the power fuse of the product may have to be changed accordingly In the case of products of safety class with movable power cord and connector operation is permitted only on sockets with earthing contact and protective earth connection Intentionally breaking the protective earth connection either in the feed line or in the 1171 0000 42 03 00 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 product itself is not permitted Doing so can result in the danger of an electric shock from the product If extension cords or connector strips are implemented they must be checked on a regular basis to ensure that they are safe to use If the product has no power switch for disconnection from the AC supply the plug of the connecting cable is regarded as the disconnecting device In such cases it must be ensured that the power plug is easily reachable and accessible at all times corresponding to the length of connecting cable approx 2 m Functional or electronic switches are not suitable for providing disconnection from the AC supply If products without power switches are integrated in racks or systems
235. la posibilidad de utilizar mal el producto y a consecuencia danarlo INFORMACI N Indica una situaci n en la que deber an seguirse las instrucciones en el uso del producto pero que no consecuentemente deben de llevar a un da o del mismo Las palabras de se al corresponden a la definici n habitual para aplicaciones civiles en el rea econ mica europea Pueden existir definiciones diferentes a esta definici n en otras reas econ micas o en aplicaciones militares Por eso se deber tener en cuenta que las palabras de se al aqu descritas sean utilizadas siempre solamente en combinaci n con la correspondiente documentaci n de producto y solamente en combinaci n con el producto correspondiente La utilizaci n de las palabras de se al en combinaci n con productos o documentaciones que no les correspondan puede llevar a malinterpretaciones y tener por consecuencia dafios en personas u objetos Informaciones de seguridad elementales El producto solamente debe ser utilizado segun lo indicado por el fabricante referente a la situaci n y posici n de funcionamiento sin que se obstruya la ventilaci n Si no se convino de otra manera es para los productos R amp S v lido lo que sigue como posici n de funcionamiento se define principialmente la posici n con el suelo de la caja para abajo modo de protecci n IP 2X grado de suciedad 2 categor a de sobrecarga el ctrica 2 utilizar solamente en estancias interiores utilizaci
236. lable IEC Bus Befehl TRIG PULS EGAT POL NORM Pulse Generator As an internal modulation source the pulse generator offers the possibility of setting single and double pulses with variable pulse delay pulse width and pulse period The pulse generator can be triggered internally or by an external signal at the PULSE input The following Pulse modi can be selected Auto Trig Ext Trig and Ext Gated see Fig 4 13 to Fig 4 15 The internal trigger signal is derived from the reference frequency and hence very stable In the trigger mode Ext Trig the positive or the negative edge can be used for triggering the pulse generator In the trigger mode Ext Gated the pulse generator is triggered as long as an active Gate signal arrives at the PULSE input The pulse generator can also be used as an independent unit ie without the pulse modulator being controlled if the pulse modulation source Pulse Source is switched to OFF or EXT The pulse can be tapped at the VIDEO output 1090 3123 12 4 15 E 6 Pulse Modulation Option R amp S SML B3 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 a PERIOD 4 PULSE DELAY K WIDTH a PULSE DELAY K WIDTH v Fig 4 13 Signal example 1 single pulse Pulse mode Auto Trig Int SYNC signal VIDEO signal PULSE input ES me TRIGGER DELAY 4 DOUBLE PULSE DELAY gt lt WIDTH l WIDTH i ue Fig 4 14 Signal example 2
237. lace ME rH a 9 2 Switchover to Remote Control nenn 5 3 Remote Control va IEC IEEE BUS aan en d 5 3 Remote Control via RS 232 C Interface nennen nennen nennen nns 5 4 MESSAGES IE 5 5 Interface EE E Eee EI elle 5 5 Device Messages Commands and DevceHesponses nenne nenne nennen 5 5 Structure and Syntax of Device Messages ueus02u000 n0n0nn0onanunnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnen 5 6 IAILOQGUELON Ke Tr 5 6 AA ee ES 5 6 Structure or Command Lines its eege Ee 5 9 Responses TO QUES cian 5 9 Parametros ara cai 5 10 Overview of Syntax MN iii 5 12 Instrument Model and Command Processing 1 eeeeeeeeeeee eene eene nnns 5 13 A Nc Sr bM RR O A E 5 13 Command RECOJO meist 5 14 Data Set and Instrument Hardware 5 14 Stats TREPOMING SM dle ttas dui 5 14 A Eege 5 15 Command Sequence and Command Synchronization nenne nenn ernennen 5 15 Status Reporting System sn aka 5 16 Structure of an SEP Status ISegisleli nee 5 16 Overview Ol Status ROSS e 5 18 Deseription f Status Registers rss ea 5 19 Use of Status REDOMING System s c o o ni an 5 22 Reset Values of Status Reporting System occcocccoconccocnccncnoconcccanononononononanononnnnnnnnonanenaninnns 5 24 A cies siensctseamesbacuacenscusavenswanasmurncscanesacus ve cuaweveaustesnvansmuseeeusauactinssuueeewentee ren Leere 5 25 EGMEEE BUS ITC E 5 25 PR 2202 GM WMC ACC c rH 5 28 1090 3123 12 5 E 6 Contents R amp S SML RE SOSMVO3
238. lation Stereo signal as for crosstalk attenuation measurement analyzer Demodulation FM STEREO CHANNEL L or R DETECTOR RMS FILTER 10 Hz to 100 kHz AUDIO Switch on harmonic distortion meter Measurement Read off harmonic distortion from modulation analyzer Carry out measurement for left and right channels Signal to noise ratio in FM stereo Test setup gt See measurement of crosstalk attenuation in FM stereo Settings on R amp S SML R amp S See measurement of crosstalk attenuation in FM stereo SMVO3 1090 3123 12 10 25 E 6 Test sequence oetting on the modulation analyzer Measurement Phase modulation PhiM deviation setting Test setup oettings on R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 oettings on the test receiver Measurement R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Stereo signal as for crosstalk attenuation measurement Demodulation FM STEREO CHANNEL L or R FILTER CCIR WT or UNWT DETECTOR RMS Relative deviation measurement DEEMPHASIS 50 us Switch on the left or right channel on the stereo coder and carry out a relative measurement Then switch off the useful signal on the stereo coder and read off the S N ratio Carry out this measurement for both filters weighted and unweighted Then switch on the right channel and repeat the same measurement Test setup 1 demodulator mode LEVEL 0 dBm FREQ 1 GHz MODULATION gt PhiM gt PhiM DEVIATION 5 rad PhiM SOURCE LFGen LF
239. le CAL MAIN CALibration FMOFfset MEASure The command calibrates the FM offset 0 is returned for O K and 1 in case of an error Example CAL FMOF CALibration VMODulation MEASure The command triggers a calibration for the l Q modulator in the whole Rf frequency range 0 is returned for O K and 1 in case of an error Example SOUR POW ALC TABL CAL VMOD CALibration ALL The command executes automatically all calibrations in the indicated order 0 is returned for O K and 1 in case of an error Example CAL CALibration ROSCillator DATA The command displays the calibration value entered in the Utilities Calib RefOsc menu Example CAL ROSC CALibration ROSCillator STORe The command stores the calibration value entered in the Utilities Calib RefOsc menu Example CAL ROSC STOR 1090 3123 12 6 7 E 6 DIAGnostic R amp S SML RESOSMVOS DIAGnostic System The DIAGnostic system contains the commands for diagnostic test and service of the instrument SCPI does not define DIAGnostic commands the commands listed here are R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 specific All DIAGnostic commands are queries which are not influenced by RST Hence no default setting values are stated MAT MT x n DIAGnostic INFO CCOunt POWer Query only MODules Query only OTIMe Query only SDATe Query only MEASure POINt Query only DIAGnostic INFO The commands which can be used to quer
240. le This product was developed manufactured and tested in compliance with our quality manage ment system standards The Rohde amp Schwarz quality manage ment system is certified according to DIN EN 150 9001 2000 DIN EN 9100 2003 DIN EN 150 14001 2004 CERTIFICAT DE QUALIT Cher Client vous avez choisi d acheter un produit Rohde amp Schwarz Vous disposez donc d un produit fabriqu d apr s les m thodes les plus avanc es Le d veloppement la fabrication et les tests respectent nos normes de ges tion qualit Le syst me de gestion qualit de Rohde amp Schwarz a t homologu conform ment aux normes DIN EN 150 9001 2000 DIN EN 9100 2003 DIN EN 150 14001 2004 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ 1171 0200 11 02 00 amp ROHDE amp SCHWARZ EC Certificate of Conformity Certificate No 99059 This is to certify that Equipment type Stock No Designation SMLO1 1090 3000 11 Signal Generator 9 kHz to 1 1 GHz SMLO2 1090 3000 12 Signal Generator 9 kHz to 2 2 GHz SMLO3 1090 3000 13 Signal Generator 9 kHz to 3 3 GHz SML B1 1090 5790 02 Reference Oscillator SML B3 1090 5403 02 Pulse Modulator SML B5 1147 8805 02 Stereo RDS Coder complies with the provisions of the Directive of the Council of the European Union on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electrical equipment for use within defined voltage limits 73 23 EEC revised by 93 68 EEC relating to electromagnetic co
241. le Pulse State is set to Off IEC IEEE bus command SOUR PULS DEL 1us Double Pulse Delay Delay between the two pulses of a double pulse This value is indicated only if Double Pulse State is set to On IEC IEEE bus command SOUR PULS DOUB DEL lus Double Pulse State owitching on off double pulse On Double pulse is switched on Off Single pulse IEC IEEE bus command SOUR PULS DOUB OFF 1090 3123 12 4 47 E 6 PULSE VIDEO Output R amp S SML RESOSMVOS Trigger Mode Execute Single Pulse Ext Trigger Slope Ext Gated Input Polarity 1090 3123 12 Selection of trigger mode Auto The pulse generator is triggered automatically The pulse period is as entered under Pulse Period Single The pulse generator is triggered manually The pulse period is determined by the user Ext Single he pulse generator is externally triggered The pulse period is determined by an external signal at the PULSE input Ext Gated The pulse generator is triggered if the gate signal is active IEC IEEE bus command TRIG PULS SOUR AUTO Starts a single pulse This function is displayed and is effective only if Single Mode is selected IEC IEEE bus command TRIG PULS IMM Selection of active edge of external trigger signal Pos The pulse generator is triggered on the positive edge of the external signal Neg The pulse generator is triggered on the negative edge of the external signal IEC IEEE bus command TRIG PULS SLOP POS Definit
242. level sweep by command SOUR POW MODE SWE Command Parameters SOURce SWEep FREQuency DWELI 10 ms 5s MODE AUTO MANual STEP RUNNing Querry only SPACing LINear LOGarithmic STEP LINear 0 1 GHZ 0 2 GHz 0 3 GHz LOGarithmic 0 01 100 PCT R amp S SMLO1 R amp S SMLO2 R amp S SMLO3 POWer DWELI 10 ms 5s MODE AUTO MANual STEP RUNNing Querry only SPACing LOGarithmic STEP 0 160 dB LOGarithmic MAXimum MINimum SOURce SWEep FREQuency The commands to set the frequency sweeps are under this node Keyword FREQuency can be omitted cf examples The commands are SCPI compatible then unless stated otherwise SOURce SWEep FREQuency DWELI 10 msto5s The command sets the dwell time per frequency step Example SOUR SWE DWEL 12ms RST value is 15 ms SOURce SWEep FREQuency MODE AUTO MANual STEP The command specifies the run of the sweep AUTO Each trigger triggers exactly one entire sweep cycle MAN ual Each frequency step of the sweep is triggered by means of manual control or a SOUR FREQ MAN command the trigger system is not active The frequency increases or decreases depending on the direction of the shaft encoder by the value indicated under SOUR FREQ STEP INCR STEP Each trigger triggers only one sweep step single step mode The frequency increases by the value indicated under SOUR SWE STEP LOG Example SOUR SWE MOD
243. lyzer is triggered by the positive edge on the EOI line of the IEC IEEE bus If the process controller then switches from the start frequency to the target frequency the build up process appears on the spectrum analyzer screen Synchronize reference frequencies on R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 and analyzer Establish IEC IEEE bus and RF connections Connect trigger port to EOI line pin 5 of IEC IEEE bus Settings on R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Frequency Start frequency unmodulated Level 0 dBm Settings on spectrum analyzer Reference level 0 dBm 10 6 E 6 R amp S SML RES SMVO3 Test sequence FREQ CENTER STOP FREQUENCY FM DEMOD ON Demodulation bandwidth 100 kHz Span 200 Hz MEAS TIME 10 ms oettings on R amp S SML LEVEL 0 dBm R amp S SMVO3 UTILITIES REF OSC SOURCE EXTERN Measurement Setting on spectrum analyzer TRIGGER EXTERN external triggering on positive edge at 1 4 V gt Send target frequency from process controller gt The build up trace appears on the screen of the externally triggered spectrum analyzer The settling time can be determined with the aid of the cursor Repeat measurement with start and target frequencies interchanged The following hops need to be measured Table 10 3 Measuring the frequency setting time Start frequency Target frequency 806 MHz 808 MHz 606 MHz 1075 MHz 76 MHz 1075 MHz 1210 5 MHz 2200 000001 MHz 2800 MHz 1818 MHz 1075 MH
244. m Off Traffic amp nnouncement ff Back 4 Fig 4 16 Modulation Stereo menu preset setting equipped with option R amp S SML B5 Deviation Input value of the frequency deviation of the stereo signal IEC IEEE bus command SOUR STER DEM 40kHz 1090 3123 12 4 17 E 6 Stereo Modulation Option R amp S SML B5 R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Source Mode LFGen Freq Ext L R Impedances Preemphasis Pilot State Pilot Deviation Pilot Phase 1090 3123 12 Selection of the modulation source The sources cannot be used simultaneously Off The stereo modulation is witched off ExtL R oelection of the L and R inputs for external analog modulation signals Ext S P DIF Selection of the S P DIF input for the external digital modulation signal LF Gen The modulation signal is generated by the internal LF generator IEC IEEE bus command SOUR STER SOUR LREX STAT ON Selection of the operating mode L Audio signal only in the left hand channel R Audio signal only in the right hand channel L R Audio signals of same frequency and phase in both channels L Audio signal of same frequency but opposite phase in both channels LAR Different and independent audio signals in both channels not possible with internal LF generator IEC IEEE bus command SOUR STER MODE LEQR Input value of the frequency of the LF generator IEC IEEE bus command SOUR STER INT FREQ 1kHz Selection of the input impedances of the
245. mand SOUR FREQ RCL EXCL Frequency Offset On the R amp S SML R amp S SMVOS3 it is possible to enter an offset for subsequent units if any in the Frequency menu Such entries are taken into account in the frequency displayed in the header line which indicates the frequency of the RF signal at the output of the units in question see Fig 4 2 The frequency of the RF output signal in the Frequency menu is calculated from the frequency displayed in the header line and offset values as follows RF output frequency frequency displayed in header line offset The entry of an offset causes a change of the frequency value displayed in the header line the value taking into account the offset is displayed The value of the RF output frequency is displayed under Frequency in the Frequency menu The entered offset remains active also for frequency sweeps Input value Offset L O Y R amp S SML Mixer R amp S SMVO3 gt RF output frequency Input value Frequency Frequency Frequency menu Header line display R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Fig 4 2 Typical setups with frequency offset Extended Divider Range For frequencies of equal or greater than 77 MHz the R amp S SML R amp S SMVO03 generates the RF signals by means of frequency division or frequency multiplication Below 77 MHZ the RF signals are normally generated by frequency mixing This results in good modulation capabilities but reduced single
246. ment gt Settings on R amp S SMVO3 Level 0 dBm Carrier frequency 900 MHz Measure level without modulation as reference level gt SelectSTATE IQ in the menu Vector Mod Set DC voltage source to 0 500 V Measure the level again gt The diffrence between the levels should be within permissible tolerance specified in the data sheet 1147 7621 12 10 44 E 6 R amp S SML R S amp GSMV03 Test sequence Error vector Test set Test setup 6 vector modulation Measurement Instead of static measurement an equivalent dynamic measurement with a low symbol rate is carried out gt Settings on R amp S SMV03 Level 0 dBm Select State IQ in the menu Vector Mod M Generate a modulation signal on the ARB generator using the controller and the simulation program Modulation 16QAM no coding SQR COS Filter with a 0 5 PRBSO9 data sequence Pulse width and oversampling 32 Length 100 symbols oymbol clock 10 kHz Check if the channels on the ARB generator are equal and adjust if necessary Make the corresponding settings on the demodulator Synchronize to abit sequence starting with the 9 symbol 12 bits long result length 80 symbols gt Vary the carrier frequency from 5 MHz to RF For recommended setting values see Table 5 2 at least frequencies Measure the error vector magnitude peak and rms on the demodulator Modulation frequency response Test equipment opectrum analyzer Table 10 5 item 2 si
247. modulation signals Modulation Sources Internal modulation source For AM and FM M an internal modulation generator Lfgen is available For more information see section LF Generator The generator can also be used for analog stereo modulation In this case the operation modes R L R L R L are available For more information see section Stereo Modulation option R amp S SML B5 For internal pulse modulation option R amp S SML B3 the instrument is equipped with a pulse generator For more information see section Pulse Generator External modulation source for AM FM M and PULSE For external modulation input connectors MOD AM FM M and PULSE Pulse modualtion are available External AM and FM M can be AC or DC coupled External modulation signals should have a voltage of Vp 1 V Vms 0 707 V to maintain the displayed modulation depth or deviation External modulation sources for stereo modulation For external analog stereo modulation input connectors STEREO R and STEREO L are available at the rear panel of the R amp S SML R amp S SMVOS3 External modulation signals should have a voltage of Vp 1 V Vims 0 707 V to maintain the displayed frequency deviation For external digital stereo modulation the unsymmetrical BNC input connector S P DIF is available input impedance of 75 2 The external modulation signal should have a voltage of Vpp 400 mV to V 5 V 1090 3123 12 4 9 E 6 Modulation
248. mp S FREQ 100 kHz 5 1 MHz 1100 MHz 1211 MHz 2200 MHz 3300 MHz SML02 03 R amp S SMVO3 LEVEL 5 1 dBm LEVEL gt ATTENUATOR MODE FIXED Measurement Read off the level from the analyzer as the reference value and make a note of it or set the delta marker for relative measurement to O dB gt Now reduce the level on the R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 in 5 dB steps The following deviations should not be exceeded Attenuation in dB ATT FIXED Tolerance in dB 0 5 1 5 3 0 Maximum level Test setup Testsetup 1 power meter mode Settings on R amp S SML FREQ R amp S SMVO3 100 kHz 500 kHz 1 MHz to 5 MHz Increment 1 MHz 5 MHz 1 Hz 15 MHz 25 MHz 25 MHz to 1100 MHz Increment 10 MHz 1100 MHz to 3300 MHz Increment 20 MHz LEVEL 16 dBm with R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 B10 26 dBm Measurement Check whether error message 110 Output unleveled OPU1 f gt 1210 5 MHz OPU3 occurs Alternatively monitor diagnostic point TP 402 f 1210 5 MHz TP 509 for voltages gt 10 V The measured level must always be higher than the maximum level according to data sheet 1 dB 1090 3123 12 10 17 E 6 Test sequence R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Overvoltage protection Measuring equipment Sinewave generator table Measuring Equipment and Accessories item 9 Test setup Connect the sinewave generator to the RF output of the R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Settings on R amp S SML FREQ
249. mpatibility 89 336 EEC revised by 91 263 EEC 92 31 EEC 93 68 EEC Conformity is proven by compliance with the following standards EN61010 1 1993 A2 1995 EN55011 1998 A1 1999 EN61326 1997 A1 1998 A2 2001 For the assessment of electromagnetic compatibility the limits of radio interference for Class B equipment as well as the immunity to interference for operation in industry have been used as a basis Affixing the EC conformity mark as from 1999 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ GmbH amp Co KG Muhldorfstr 15 D 81671 Munchen Munich 2002 05 23 Central Quality Management FS QZ Becker 1090 3000 1 1 CE E 8 amp ROHDE amp SCHWARZ EC Certificate of Conformity Certificate No 2001 56 This is to certify that Equipment type Stock No Designation SMV03 1147 7509 13 Vector Signal Generator 9 kHz to 3 3 GHz SML B1 1090 5790 02 Reference Oscillator SML B3 1090 5403 02 Pulse Modulator SML B5 1147 8805 02 Stereo RDS Coder complies with the provisions of the Directive of the Council of the European Union on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electrical equipment for use within defined voltage limits 73 23 EEC revised by 93 68 EEC relating to electromagnetic compatibility 89 336 EEC revised by 91 263 EEC 92 31 EEC 93 68 EEC Conformity is proven by compliance with the following standards EN61010 1 1993 A2 1995 EN55011 1998 A1 1999 EN61326 1997 A1
250. n Insert Insert At Input of start index Range Number of elements to be inserted Start Frequency Input of start value for the frequency Increment Frequency Input of increment between two successive frequency values If O is entered as an increment identical values will be inserted Power Input of start value for the power Increment Power Input of increment between two successive power values If O is entered as an increment identical values will be inserted Execute otarts the insertion After the execution of the function the menu cursor goes back to Edit List 1090 3123 12 3 10 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 List Editor Fill editing function see Fig 3 7 The Fill function overwrites a parameter with constant or linearly increasing decreasing values within a defined range If the BACK key is pressed the editing window will be exited without any change being made If the fill range extends beyond the end of the list the list is automatically extended Filling of a list is done in the same way as the insertion of elements in a list see Insert editing function Selection Fill 100 0000000 10 0 dem LeveyucorFil FONT Fill At UT NN Range 0001 Parameter Frequency Start Frequency 100 0000000 MHz Increment Frequency 0 1 Hz Execute Back 4 Fig 3 7 Fill editing function Fill At Input of start index Range Number of elements to be included Parameter Selection of parameters frequency po
251. n hasta 2000 m sobre el nivel del mar transporte hasta 4 500 m sobre el nivel del mar A menos que se especifique otra cosa en la hoja de datos se aplicar una tolerancia de 10 sobre el voltaje nominal y de 5 sobre la frecuencia nominal En todos los trabajos deber n ser tenidas en cuenta las normas locales de seguridad de 1171 0000 42 03 00 trabajo y de prevenci n de accidentes E producto solamente debe de ser abierto por personal perito autorizado Antes de efectuar trabajos en el producto o abrirlo deber este ser desconectado de la corriente El ajuste el cambio de partes la manutenci n y la reparaci n deber n ser solamente efectuadas por electricistas autorizados por R amp S Si se reponen partes con importancia para los aspectos de seguridad por ejemplo el enchufe los transformadores o los fusibles solamente podr n ser sustituidos por partes originales Despues de cada recambio de partes elementales para la seguridad deber ser efectuado un control de seguridad control a primera vista control de conductor protector medici n de resistencia de aislamiento medici n de medici n de la corriente conductora control de funcionamiento Sheet 6 Informaciones de seguridad 3 Como en todo producto de fabricaci n industrial no puede ser excluido en general de que se produzcan al usarlo elementos que puedan generar alergias los llamados elementos alerg nicos por ejemplo el n quel Si se producier
252. n selected Diagnostic A D converter failure Diagnostic A D converter has failed Stereocoder firmware missing 9 6 E 6 R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 List of Error Messages Continuation Device dependent Error Error code 1090 3123 12 Error text in the case of queue poll Error explanation No list defined There is no list defined Dwell time adjusted A dwell time given on a list cannot be processed by the unit The setting was automatically adjusted No User Correction Table zero assumed An attempt has been made to switch on user correction but no UCOR table has been stored in the instrument yet The instrument behaves as if a table was called which only contains O values Invalid keyboard input ignored An invalid input via the keyboard is not considered This parameter is read only An attempt has been made to change a fixedly specified value Data output aborted Data output was aborted on the IEC IEEE bus Example The key LOCAL was pressed String too long A character string which is too long was received via the IEC bus The names of lists may have a length of maximally seven letters Fill pattern too long trunctated More data have been entered with block function FILL in the list editor than the filling range RANGE set permits The exceeding data are ignored No fill pattern specified An attempt was made to execute a filler function without having to indicate a filler pattern 9 7 E 6 Poss
253. nd or LEVEL key again deletes the entire input 1090 3123 12 3 6 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 List Editor List Editor The R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 offers the facility of generating lists for user defined level correction Ucor The lists consist of elements pairs of values which are defined by an index and at least one parameter per index Each list is assigned a separate name and selected by means of this name Access to the lists is made in the associated menus How to generate and edit lists is explained in detail in this section by the example of the user defined level correction Ucor Level UCor menu see Fig 3 3 Menu selection Level UCor 100 0000000 mrz 10 0 dem LeveUCo o RFOn Off Select List UCor Delete List Edit List Insert Back y Fig 3 3 Level UCor menu The settings for State are not relevant for the general description of the list editor They are described in greater detail in chapter 4 in section User Correction Ucor The Select List Delete List and Edit List lines are always displayed They are intended for the selection and deletion of lists and for the calling of editing functions Select List Opens a window in which a list out of 10 lists can be selected In this line the currently active list is displayed see section Select List Delete List Opens a window from which a list can be selected whose contents are to be deleted see section Delete List
254. nds will be found in the relevant manuals The requirements of the SCPI standard regarding command syntax error handling and configuration of the status registers are explained in detail in the respective sections Tables provide a fast overview of the bit assignment of the status registers The tables are complemented by a comprehensive description of the status registers A description of commands is given in chapter 6 Programming examples for the main functions will be found in chapter 7 Brief Instructions The short and simple operating sequence given below permits fast putting into operation of the instrument and setting of its basic functions IEC IEEE Bus It is assumed that the IEC IEEE bus address which is factory set to 28 has not been changed 1 Connect the instrument and the controller using the IEC IEEE bus cable 2 Write and start the following program on the controller CALL IBFIND DEV1 generator Open port to instrument CALL IBPAD generator 28 Transfer instrument address to controller CALL IBWRT generator RST CLS Reset instrument CALL IBWRT generator FREQ 1GHz oet frequency to 1 GHz CALL IBWRT generator POW 7 3dBm oet output level to 7 3 dBm CALL IBWRT generator OUTP STAT ON owitch RF output on CALL IBWRT generator AM SOUR INT oet AM modulation source Lfgen CALL IBWRT generator AM INT FREQ 15kHz Set AM modulation frequency to 15 kHz CALL IBWRT generator AM 30PC
255. ng ont the model RCL INCLude EXCLude MANual 9 KHz Fmax Fmax depending on the model MODE CW FIXed SWEep OFFSet 50 50 GHz SPAN 0 Fmax 9 kHz Fmax depending on the model STARt 9 kHZ Fmax Fmax depending on the model STOP 9 kHZ Fmax Fmax depending on the model STEP INCRement 0 1 GHz 0 2 GHz 0 3 GHz R amp S SMLO1 R amp S SML 02 R amp S SMLO3 R amp S SMV03 ERANge ON OFF SOURce FREQuency CENTer 9 kHz to Fmax Fmax depending on the model The command sets the sweep range by means of the center frequency This command is coupled to the commands SOUR FREQ STAR and SOUR FREQ STOP Here the Offset value is taken into account Example SOUR FREQ CENT 300MHz RST value is STARt STOP 2 SOURce FREQuency CW FIXed 9 kHz to Fmax Fmax depending on the model The command sets the frequency for CW operation This value is coupled to the current sweep frequency In addition to a numeric value UP and DOWN can be indicated The frequency is increased or reduced by the value set under SOUR FREQ STEP as to specify range see FREQ CENT Example SOUR FREQ 500MHz RST value is 100 MHz SOURce FREQuency RCL INCLude EXCLude The command determines the effect of the recall function on the frequency RST value has no effect to this setting INCLude The saved frequency is loaded when instrument settings are loaded with the RCL key or with a memory sequen
256. ngs on the product since they are necessary for ventilation and prevent the product from overheating Do not place the product on soft surfaces such as sofas or rugs or inside a closed housing unless this is well ventilated Do not place the product on heat generating devices such as radiators or fan heaters The temperature of the environment must not exceed the maximum temperature specified in the data sheet Batteries and storage batteries must not be exposed to high temperatures or fire Keep batteries and storage batteries away from children Do not short circuit batteries and storage batteries If batteries or storage batteries are improperly replaced this can cause an explosion warning lithium cells Replace 1171 0000 42 03 00 28 29 30 31 32 33 the battery or storage battery only with the matching Rohde amp Schwarz type see spare parts list Batteries and storage batteries must be recycled and kept separate from residual waste Batteries and storage batteries that contain lead mercury or cadmium are hazardous waste Observe the national regulations regarding waste disposal and recycling Please be aware that in the event of a fire toxic substances gases liquids etc that may be hazardous to your health may escape from the product The product can be very heavy Be careful when moving it to avoid back or other physical injuries Do not place the product on surfaces vehicles cab
257. nt and returns the voltage measured The measuring point is specified by a numeric suffix cf service manual Example DIAG MEAS POIN 2 Response 11 56 1090 3123 12 6 9 E 6 DISPlay R amp S SML RESOSMVOS DISPLAY System This system contains the commands to configure the screen If system security is activated using command SYSTem SECurity ON the display cannot be switched on and off arbitrarily cf below MAT MT ee DISPlay ANNotation ALL ON OFF AMPLitude ON OFF FREQuency ON OFF DISPlay ANNotation The commands determining whether frequency and amplitude are indicated are under this node Caution With SYSTem SECurity ON the indications cannot be switched from OFF to ON In this case RST does not influence the ANNotation settings either With SYSTem SECurity OFF the RST value is ON for all ANNotation parameters DISPlay ANNotation ALL ON OFF The command switches the frequency and amplitude indication on or off Command DISP ANN ALL ON can only be executed if SYST SEC is set to OFF Example DISP ANN ALL ON With SYST SEC OFF RST value is ON DISPlay ANNotation AMPLitude ON OFF The command switches on or off the amplitude indication Command DISP ANN AMPL ON can only be executed if SYST SEC is set to OFF Example DISP ANN AMPL ON With SYST SEC OFF RST value is ON DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency ON OFF The command switches on or off the frequency indication Command DISP ANN
258. nta que en caso de un incendio pueden desprenderse del producto agentes venenosos gases l quidos etc que pueden generar da os a la salud El producto puede poseer un peso elevado Mu valo con cuidado para evitar lesiones en la espalda u otras partes corporales No sit e el producto encima de superficies veh culos estantes o mesas que por sus caracter sticas de peso o de estabilidad no sean aptas para l Siga siempre las instrucciones de instalaci n del fabricante cuando instale y asegure el producto en objetos o estructuras por ejemplo paredes y estantes 1171 0000 42 03 00 31 32 Las asas instaladas en los productos sirven solamente de ayuda para el manejo que solamente est previsto para personas Por eso no est permitido utilizar las asas para la sujeci n en o sobre medios de transporte como por ejemplo gr as carretillas elevadoras de horquilla carros etc El usuario es responsable de que los productos sean sujetados de forma segura a los medios de transporte y de que las prescripciones de seguridad del fabricante de los medios de transporte sean tenidas en cuenta En caso de que no se tengan en cuenta pueden causarse da os en personas y objetos Si llega a utilizar el producto dentro de un veh culo queda en la responsabilidad absoluta del conductor que conducir el veh culo de manera segura Asegure el producto dentro del veh culo debidamente para evitar en caso de un accidente las lesiones
259. ntain up to 7 letters This command triggers an event and hence has no RST value Example SOUR CORR CSET SEL UCOR1 SOURce CORRection CSET DATA The commands to edit the Ucor tables are under this node SOURce CORRection CSET DATA FREQuency 9 kHz Fmax 1 9 kHz Fmax Fmax depends on model The command transmits the frequency data for the table selected using SOUR CORR CSET The frequency values must be entered in ascending order RST does not influence data lists Example SOUR CORR CSET DATA FREQ 100MHz 102MHz 103MHz SOURce CORRection CSET DATA FREQuency POINts The command returns the number of list elements This command is a query and hence has no RST value Example SOUR CORR CSET DATA FREQ POIN SOURce CORRection CSET DATA POWer 20 to 20dB 20 to 200B The command transmits the level data for the table selected using SOUR CORR CSET RST does not influence data lists Example SQURSCORBSCSETSDATAEPON LOB De 0 aB QO 75dB ux SOURce CORRection CSET DATA POWer POINts The command returns the number of list elements This command is a query and hence has no RST value Example SOUR CORR CSET DATA POW POIN SOURce CORRection CSET DELete name of table The command deletes the table indicated from the instrument memory This command triggers an event and hence has no RST value Example SOURZCORRSESETEDEL UCORS 1090 3123 12 6 16 E 6 R amp S
260. nterfaces Transmission Parameters To ensure error free and correct data transmission the transmission parameters on the instrument and the controller must have the same settings The settings are made in the Utilities System RS232 menu Transmission rate Eight different baud rates can be set on the instrument baud rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Data bits Data transmission is in 8 bit ASCII code The LSB least significant bit is transmitted as the first bit Start bit The transmission of a data byte is initiated with a start bit The falling edge of the start bit indicates the beginning of the data byte Parity bit No parity bit is used Stop bit The transmission of a data byte is terminated by a stop bit Example Transmission of character A 41 hex in 8 bit ASCII code 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Bit 01 start bit Bits 02 to 09 data bits Bit 10 stop bit Bit duration 1 baud rate Interface Functions For interface control a number of control characters defined from O to 20 hex of the ASCII code can be transmitted via the interface Table 5 8 Control characters for RS 232 C interface lt Ctrl Q gt 11 hex Enable character output XON lt Ctrl S gt 13 hex Stop character output XOFF Break at least 1 character logic 0 Reset instrument ODhex OAhex Terminator lt CR gt lt LF gt Local remote switchover 1090 3123 12 9 29 E 6 Interfaces R amp S SML R amp S SMVO03 Han
261. nus sign The old value is deleted the entry is indicated in the marked field Enter further digits gt Terminate the input using a unit key or in the case of inputs in the base unit or in the case of inputs without unit using the 1x Enter key Press BACK key The menu cursor wraps back to the appropriate parameter Set the digit cursor bright field to the position of the setting value to be varied using keys gt Turn rotary knob The value is varied Note RF frequency and RF level can also be varied in a step width which can be defined arbitrarily using the rotary knob In the respective setting menu Frequency or Level the step width is entered as Knob Step User and the Knob Step set from Decimal to User To point to the fact that the step width has been converted to the value programmed the bright field as a symbol of the digit cursor disappears in the respective value indication 3 9 E 6 Basic Operating Steps R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 1 out of n selection gt Select parameter Press SELECT key or rotary knob A pop up menu displays a selection of settings Set the menu cursor to the position desired within the 1 out of n selection using the rotary knob or cursor keys lt gt Press SELECT key or rotary knob The setting is made The pop up menu is closed using BACK key and the current setting is indicated at the right margin of the display Press B
262. nvalid value information Example ON is entered instead of a numerical value for frequency setting GET not allowed A Group Execute Trigger GET is entered within a command line Parameter not allowed The command contains too many parameters Example The command SOURce FM INTernal FREQuency allows for a frequency entry only Missing parameter The command contains too few parameters Example The command SOURce FM INTernal FREQuency requires a frequency entry 1090 3123 12 9 2 E 6 Command Error continued Error code 112 113 114 123 124 128 131 134 138 141 144 148 158 161 168 178 1090 3123 12 Error text with queue poll Explanation of error Program mnemonic too long The header contains more than 12 characters Undefined header The header is not defined for the instrument Example XYZ is undefined for every instrument Header suffix out of range The header contains an illegal numerical suffix Example SOURce3 does not exist in the instrument Exponent too large The absolute value of the exponent is larger than 32000 Too many digits The number contains too many digits Numeric data not allowed The command contains a number which is not allowed at this position Example The command SOURce FREQuency MODE requires the entry of a text parameter Invalid suffix The suffix is invalid for this instrument Example nHz is not defined Suffi
263. on the R amp S SML R amp S SMVOS3 is the center frequency deviation Note This value is not specified but is typically 0 1 of the set deviation and is therefore lt 500 Hz at a set deviation of 500 kHz 1090 3123 12 10 24 E 6 R amp S SML R S amp GSMV03 Test sequence Crosstalk attenuation in FM stereo Test setup Test setup 1 with modulation analyzer gt Connect the AF1 connector on the stereo coder to the MOD input on the R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Settings on R amp S SML R amp S LEVEL 0 dBm SMVO03 MODULATION FM FM DEVIATION 46 5 kHz FM SOURCE EXT EXT COUPLING DC FREQ Test frequency stereo Test frequencies 87 MHz 98 MHz 108 MHz oetting on the modulation owitch on 1 kHz stereo signal on stereo coder set level of useful analyzer signal to 40 kHz peak deviation and level of pilot tone to 6 5 kHz peak deviation Demodulation FM STEREO CHANNEL L or R DETECTOR RMS FILTER 10 Hz to 100 kHz Relative deviation measurement Measurement gt Switch on the left channel on the stereo coder and carry out a relative measurement Then switch to the right channel on the demodulator and read off the crosstalk attenuation Then carry out the same measurement with the right channel Total harmonic distortion in FM stereo Test setup gt See measurement of crosstalk attenuation in FM stereo Settings on R amp S SML R amp S See measurement of crosstalk attenuation in FM stereo SMVO3 Setting on the modu
264. or remote control can be connected via the interface Characteristics of Interface e Serial data transmission in asynchronous mode Bidirectional data transmission via two separate lines e Selectable transmission rate from 120 to 15200 baud e Logic O signal level from 3 V to 15 V e Logic 1 signal level from 15 V to 3 V An external unit controller can be connected e Software handshake XON XOFF e Hardware handshake RxD DTR TxD RTS DSR CTS Fig 5 6 Pin assignment of RS 232 C interface Signal Lines RxD Receive Data Data line transmission from external controller to instrument TxD Transmit Data Data line transmission from instrument to external controller DTR Data terminal ready Output logic zero active With DTR the instrument indicates that it is ready to receive data The DTR line controls the instrument s readiness for reception GND Interface ground connected to instrument ground DSR Data Set Ready In the case of instruments with a VAR2 REV3 front module the DSR line is used instead of the CTS line RTS Request To Send Output logic O active With RTS the instrument indicates that it is ready to receive data The RTS line controls the instrument s readiness for reception CTS Clear To Send Input logic O active CTS informs the instrument that the opposite station is ready to receive data 1090 3123 12 9 28 E 6 R SOSML R amp S SMVO3 I
265. or rotary knob AM Se A pop up menu displays the current 1 out of n selection 1090 3123 12 2 2 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Sample Setting for First Users Operating steps Explanations MENU VARIATION MENU VARIATION Select LF generator as modulation source using rotary knob The selection mark marks LFGen SELECT Press BACK key The cursor is set back to AM Source MENU VARIATION MENU VARIATION Select parameter LFGen Freq using rotary knob Press SELECT key or rotary knob LFGen Freq The menu cursor marks the current frequency selection DATA INPUT Set the frequency of the LF generator D to 3 kHz The AM modulation setting is completed The indications on the display are represented in Fig 2 1 Modulation At amp Depth 105 X OM Source LFGen Est Coupling LFGen Freq bk Ona Back 4 Fig 2 1 Display for AM setting 1090 3123 12 2 3 E 6 Sample Setting for First Users R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Setting the step width Subsequently to the above setting 1 GHz as new RF frequency and 12 kHz as the step width for the RF frequency variation are set in the following Operating steps Explanations Reset the menu cursor to the main menu in 3 steps MENU VARIATION MENU VARIATION Select menu Frequency using rotary knob Press SELECT key or rotary knob Frequency The frequency setting menu is displayed MENU VARIATION MENU VARIATION Select paramete
266. or synchronization implemented in the following example are described in Chapter 5 Section Command Order and Command Synchronization REM EX mp Les or command synehr nTzat1on gt REM Command ROSCILLATOR SOURCE INT has a relatively long execution time REM over 300ms It is to be ensured that the next command is only executed REM when the reference oscillator has settled BEN osse Purot Jee tee Ee ee GE CALL IBWRT generator ROSCILLATOR SOURCE INT WAI FREQUENCY 1l100MHZ REN Seren Second possibility Use Of ORC Ee OpcOkS SPACES 2 Space for OPC Provide response CALL IBWRT generator ROSCILLATOR SOURCE INT OPC REM ee here the Control ler Can cervice Other instruments eee CALL IBRD generator Opcoks Ware Lor 72 trom OBC REM Third possibility Use or OPC REM In order to be able to use the service request function in conjugation REM with a National Instruments GPIB driver the setting Disable Auto REM Serial Poll must be changed to yes by means of IBCONF CALL IBWRT generator SRE 32 Permit service request for ESR CALL IBWRT generator ESE 1 Set event enable bit for operation complete bit ON PEN GOSUB OpcReady Initialization of the service request routine PEN ON CALI LBNRI generatorse ROSCILLATOR SOURGCE INT OPC REM Continue main program here P End ot program OpcReady REM As soon as the reference oscillator has settled this su
267. output buffer which can be read The bit can be used for the automatic reading of data from the instrument to the controller see chapter 7 Programming Examples ESB bit Sum bit of event status register It is set if one of the bits of the event status register is set and enabled in the event status enable register If the bit is set this indicates a serious error which can be determined in greater detail by polling the event status register MSS bit Master Status Summary bit This bit is set if the instrument triggers a service request This is the case if one of the other bits of this register is set together with its mask bit in the service request enable SRE register OPERation Status Register sum bit This bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the OPERation status register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1 If the bit is set this indicates that the instrument is just carrying out an action The type of action can be determined by polling the OPERation status register 1090 3123 12 5 19 E 6 Status Reporting System R amp S SML R8E SOSMVOS IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register PPE Analogously with the SRQ the IST flag combines the entire status information in a single bit It can be queried by means of a parallel poll see section Parallel Poll or using the command IST The parallel poll enable PPE register determines which bits of the STB contribute to the IST flag The bits of the STB are ANDe
268. over If the signal to noise ratio of the second test transmitter is not at least 10 dB better than that of the DUT the noise component of the reference transmitter must also be determined and due allowance must be made The corrected signal to noise ratio is the required measured value Example Let the reference level be measured as 12 dBm At 20 kHz a noise level of 8 dBm 1 Hz is determined The difference is 90 dB Adding in the correction for the second sideband 6 dB and the level switchover 40 dB gives a signal to noise ratio of 136 dB or a noise level of 136 dBc dB referenced to the carrier power Testsetup 1 spectrum analyzer mode UTILITIES REF OSC SOURCE EXTERN LEVEL 5 1 dBm FREQ 5 MHz 10 MHz 76 MHz 76 000 000 1 MHz 151 312 500 1 MHz 255 250 000 1 MHz 605 250 000 MHz 605 250 000 1 MHz 700 MHz 807 MHz 807 000 000 1 MHz 950 MHz 1 076 MHz 1 076 000 000 1 MHz 1 100 MHz 1 250 MHz 1 800 MHz 2 010 MHz 2 200 MHz 2 655 MHz 2 655 000 000 1 MHz 2 800 MHz 2 800 000 000 1 MHz 3 300 MHz Reference level 7 dBm Center frequency FREQ R amp S SML or FREQ 5 MHz Span 50 kHz MEAS gt CHANPWR ACP gt CP ACP CONFIG gt CHANNEL BANDWITH 30 kHz The measurement method is based on the channel power measurement First the carrier power is determined then the measurement channel is moved to a corresponding store and the channel power is likewise 10 11 E 6 Test
269. q 1 kHz 10 19 E 6 Test sequence Settings with option B3 oettings on the test receiver Measurement AM frequency response Test setup Settings on the R amp S SMLO1 oettings on the R amp S SML02 03 R amp S SMVO3 Settings with option B3 oettings on the test receiver Measurement 1090 3123 12 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 FREQ only test frequencies 10 MHz Demodulation AM Detector Peak First at AM deviation test frequencies and with test levels 2 1 dBm R amp S SMLO2 03 0 1 dBm and 5 dBm test the deviation setting from 10 to 95 Then at deviation 80 and test level 8 dBm R amp S SML02 03 6 dBm traverse the frequency range from 100 kHz to fmax in steps of 60 MHz Read off the deviation from the test receiver Test setup 1 demodulator mode LEVEL 3 dBm with R amp S SML B10 13 dBm FREQ 500 kHz 5 1 MHz 1100 MHz MODULATION gt AM gt AM DEPTH 60 AM SOURCE LFGen LFGenFreq 10 Hz to 50 kHz LEVEL 3 dBm with R amp S SML B10 13 dBm FREQ in addition to the test frequencies for R amp S SMLO1 1211 MHz 2200 MHz 3300 MHz MODULATION gt AM gt AM DEPTH 60 AM SOURCE LFGen LFGenFreq 10 Hz to 50 kHz FREQ only test frequencies 10 MHz Demodulation AM Detector Peak Determine the modulation frequency response by varying the LF generator frequency Repeat the measurement using an external sinewave generator with the setting
270. quipment and Accessories item 12 10 MHz reference Measuring instrument Test setup for setting time Test setup 2 Measuring equipment Test setup 1090 3123 12 Testreceiver table Measuring Equipment and Accessories item 1 Pulse generator table Measuring Equipment and Accessories item 11 Process controller table Measuring Equipment and Accessories item 3 Trigger Puls 10 MHz Referenz Puls generator Mess empfanger 10 3 Test setups E 6 Test setup for setting time RESOSML R amp S SMVO3 Test setup for SSB phase noise Test setup 3 Measuring Test receiver equipment table Measuring Equipment and Accessories item 1 Second test transmitter table Measuring Equipment and Accessories item 4 Phase noise tester consisting of Mixer with low pass filter and preamplifier table Measuring Equipment and Accessories item 5 Storage oscilloscope table Measuring Equipment and Accessories item 2 Test setup 10 MHz reference Test transmitter r Test receiver Mixer preamlifier Oszilloskop Test setup for output reflection coefficient Test setup 4 Measuring Test receiver equipment table Measuring Equipment and Accessories item 1 Second test transmitter table Measuring Equipment
271. r l por ejemplo al tropezar o por un golpe de corriente Solamente est permitido el funcionamiento en redes de distribuci n TN TT aseguradas con fusibles de como m ximo 16 A utilizaci n de fusibles de mayor amperaje s lo previa consulta con el grupo de empresas Rohde amp Schwarz Nunca conecte el enchufe en tomas de corriente sucias o llenas de polvo Introduzca el enchufe por completo y fuertemente en la toma de corriente Si no tiene en consideraci n estas indicaciones se arriesga a que se originen chispas fuego y o heridas No sobrecargue las tomas de corriente los cables de extensi n o los enchufes de extensi n ya que esto pudiera causar fuego o golpes de corriente En las mediciones en circuitos de corriente con una tensi n de entrada de U r gt 30 V se deber tomar las precauciones debidas para impedir cualquier peligro por ejemplo medios de medici n adecuados seguros limitaci n de tensi n corte protector aislamiento etc En caso de conexi n con aparatos de la t cnica inform tica se deber tener en cuenta que estos cumplan los requisitos de la EC950 EN60950 A menos que est permitido expresamente no retire nunca la tapa ni componentes de la carcasa mientras el producto est en servicio Esto pone a descubierto los cables y componentes el ctricos y puede causar heridas fuego o da os en el producto Si un producto es instalado fijamente en un lugar se deber primero conectar el
272. r Frequency Press SELECT key or rotary knob The menu cursor marks the setting Frequency SELECT value DATA INPUT Enter frequency 1 GHz G bei a dBuV Press BACK key The menu cursor Is set back to Frequency Select parameter Knob Step User using rotary knob Press SELECT key or rotary knob MENU VARIATION MENU VARIATION Knob Step User DATA INPUT Enter step width 12 kHz Jo amp 1090 3123 12 2 4 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Sample Setting for First Users Operating steps Explanations Press BACK key The menu cursor is set back to Knob Step User MENU VARIATION MENU VARIATION Select parameter Knob Step using rotary knob Press SELECT key or rotary knob Knob Step A pop up menu displays the available settings MENU VARIATION MENU VARIATION Select User user defined step width using rotary knob Us This results in step width 12 kHz ES being used in the case of variation l using the rotary knob Press BACK key The menu cursor is set back to Knob Step 1 000 0000000 GHz 10 0 dem Frequency Frequency 1 000 0000000 GHz Offset 0 0 Hz Koob Step User 127 0000 kHz Enob Step Exclude from Recall Back 4 Fig 2 2 Display for pattern setting 1090 3123 12 2 5 E 6 R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Design of the Display 3 Manual Operation This chapter shows the design of the display and describes the manual control of the signal generator
273. r mode Settings on R amp S SML UTILITIES gt REF OSC gt SOURCE EXTERN R amp S SMVOS LEVEL 13 dBm R amp S SML02 03 11 dBm FREQ Test frequencies for spurious 966 052 MHz 927 2776 MHz 945 821 MHz 979 713 MHz 980 729 MHz 987 315 MHz 999 998 MHz 1022 438 MHz 1060 872 MHz 1080 003 MHz 1086 2 MHz 1086 663 MHz 1086 9535 MHz 1090 28 MHz 1095 002 MHz 1098 956 MHz Look in the range 10 kHz to 2MHz Test frequencies for mixer spurious 75 9 MHz Look in the region of 875 9 MHz Settings on the test receiver Start frequency test frequency 5 kHz Reference level test level 3 dB 10 dB div SPAN 100 kHz Resolution bandwidth 1 kHz Switch on average 5 samples Measurement First measure the level of the fundamental as reference then 1090 3123 12 10 9 E 6 Test sequence Analysis R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 measure the level at any visible spurious The spurious suppression ratio is the difference in level between the detected spurious referenced to the output signal from the R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 in dBc referenced to the carrier Spurious suppression subharmonic spurious for R amp S SML02 03 R amp S SMV03 only Test setup oettings on R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 oettings on the test receiver Testsetup 1 spectrum analyzer mode UTILITIES gt REF OSC gt SOURCE EXTERN LEVEL 11 dBm FREQ Test frequencies for subharmonics 1250 MHz 1500 MHz 18
274. requency response Test setup Testsetup 1 demodulator mode oettings on R amp S SML LEVEL 0 dBm R amp S SMV03 FREQ 1 GHz MODULATION gt FM gt FM DEVIATION 100 kHz FM SOURCE LFGen LFGenFreq 10 Hz to 100 kHz Settings on the test receiver Demodulation FM Detector Peak Measurement Determine the modulation frequency response by varying the generator frequency of the built in LF generator in the FM menu from 10 Hz to 100 kHz The modulation frequency response is the difference between the lowest and highest measured deviation Note Since there is no difference between the frequency response in FM and PhiM there is no need to measure the broad FM loop The broad PhiM loop can be measured on the spectrum analyzer and this is in fact easier to do FM total harmonic distortion Test setup Testsetup 1 demodulator mode Settings on R amp S SML LEVEL 0 dBm R amp S SMV03 FREQ 605 5 MHz 650 MHz 700 MHz 750 MHz 807 MHz MODULATION gt FM gt FM DEVIATION see table FM SOURCE LFGen LFGenFreq 1 kHz Settings on the test receiver Demodulation FM Detector Peak Activate THD amp SINAD Measurement Read off the THD value from the test receiver and use the formula 0 k THD e 100 Y 10 20 to convert to the total harmonic distortion Carrier freq MHz FM deviation kHz 1090 3123 12 10 23 E 6 Test sequence Spurious AM in FM Test setup Settings on the R amp
275. rogram on Off Traffic program off IEC Bus Befehl SOUR STER RDS TRAF PROG ON Traffic Announcement owitching on off Traffic announcement On Traffic announcement on Off Traffic announcement off IEC Bus Befehl SOUR STER RDS TRAF ANN ON RDS commands The option R amp S SML B5 supports all important RDS commands in accordance with IEC 62106 1999 The complete RDS command set of the option can be operated over the IEC IEEE bus or the the RS 232 interface Some basic RDS functions can also be found in the Modulation Stereo menu and can manually be operated too RDS settings via remote control SOUR STER DIR command string RDS queries via remote control SOUR STER DIR command string 1090 3123 12 4 20 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Stereo Modulation Option R amp S SML B5 Commands for the Stereo RDS Coder Option SML B5 Commands are sent to the Stereo RDS Coderwith STEReo DIRect command string Information is queried with STEReo DIRect Befehls String All commands are to be terminated with CR Uppercase and lowercase letters are used to identify the long form and short form of the keywords of the commands given in the manual The instrument itself does not distinguish between the two types of characters Commands 1A 3A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A Description Transmits data via free format groups FFGs A free format group can be filled with any desired data 5 bits in blo
276. roup B data may be sent at a time Only groups that contain data are transmitted The groups 4A 14B and 15B are automatically added to the group sequence and must not be added or removed manually 1090 3123 12 4 29 E 6 Stereo Modulation Option R amp S SML B5 IMP Description Command Query Response Value range Example MASK Description Command Query Response Value range Example 1090 3123 12 R amp S SML RESOSMVOS Sets external L R impedances IMP x IMP X 112 1 600 0 2 100k0 Command STEReo DIRect IMP 1 The external impedance is set to 600 Q Query STEReo DIRect IMP Response Ca Sets a bit mask to generate defined bit errors in the RDS data stream MASK xx yy aaaaaaa bbbbbbb ccccccc dddddddd MASK xx yy aaaaaaa bbbbbbb ccccccc dddddddd xx 7 00 to FF hexadecimal values corresponding to number of groups to be masked If xx is set to zero the RDS groups are continuously linked to the error mask If xx is set to a value other than zero this value is decremented after each errored group transmitted When zero count is reached no further errored groups are transmitted and MASK STATE is set to O yy 00 to FF hexadecimal values Number of error free groups to be inserted after each errored group a b cd 0000000 3FFFFFFF Hexadecimal bit mask for blocks A B C and D of the RDS groups For each block 26 bits 16 data bits and 10 CRC
277. s the program type for the EON with PI 1000 to 10 Query STEReo DIRect EON PTY 1000 Reads the program type of the EON with PI 1000 Response 1 0 Enhanced Other Networks sets the TA flag for the EON with Pl yyyy EON TA yyyy xXx EON TA yyyy X x 011 0000 FFFF ASCII codierte Hexadezimalzahlen Command STEReo DIRect EON TA 1000 1 Sets the TA flag for the EON with PI 1000 to 1 Query STEReo DIRect EON TA 1000 Reads the TA flag of the EON with PI 1000 Response 1 4 28 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 EON TP GS Note Description Command Query Response Value range Example Description Command Query Response Value range Example Stereo Modulation Option R amp S SML B5 Enhanced Other Networks sets the TP flag for the EON with Pl yyyy EON TPzyyyy x EON TP yyyy X x 0 1 yyyy 0000 to FFFF ASCII coded hexadecimal numbers Command STEReo DIRect EON TP 1000 1 Sets the TP flag for the EON with PI 1000 to 1 Query STEReo DIRect EON TP 1000 Reads the TP flag of the EON with PI 1000 Response 1 Sets or reads the group sequence GSzxx xx X 1 to 36 groups GS XX XX XX xx 2 or 3 characters 0A 1A 2A to 15B Command STEReo DlRect GS 0A 1B 10A 15A The groups 0A 1B 10A 15A are transmitted Query STEReo DIRect GS Response 0A 1B 10A 15A Only group A or g
278. s with 0 ie No error The error queue should be queried by the controller program after each SRQ as the entries provide a more precise description of the cause of an error than the status registers Especially during the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried regularly since errored commands from the controller to the instrument are also recorded in the error queue 1090 3123 12 9 23 E 6 Status Reporting System R amp S SML R8E SOSMVOS Reset Values of Status Reporting System Table 5 4 lists the commands and events that cause a reset of the status reporting system Except for RST and SYSTem PRESet none of the commands has an effect on the functional settings of the instrument It should be noted in particular that DCL also does not change instrument settings Table 5 4 Resetting of instrument functions Switching on of Event AC supply voltage DCL SDC Power On Status Device Clear STATus PRESet CLS Clear Selected Device SYSTem PRESet Clear Effect o pr Clears EVEN parts of the registers Clears ENABle parts of all OPERation and QUESTionable registers fills ENABle parts of all other registers with 1 Fills PTRansition parts with 1 clears NTRansition parts Clears command processing and input buffer 1 Each command which is the first in a command line ie which directly follows the PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR gt clears the output buffer 1090 3123 12 9 24 E 6 R SOSML
279. se of a query the numerical value is returned Example Setting command SOURce VOLTage MAXimum Query SOURce VOLTage Response 15 MINimum and MAXimum denote the minimum and the maximum value DEFault denotes a preset value stored in an EPROM This value conforms to the default setting as called by the RST command UP DOWN increases or decreases the numerical value by one step The step width can be defined via an allocated step command for each parameter which can be set via UP DOWN see List of Commands chapter 6 INFinity Negative INFinity NINF represent the numerical values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 respectively INF and NINF are only sent as device responses Not A Number NAN represents the value 9 91E37 NAN is only sent as a device response This value is not defined Possible causes are the division of zero by zero the subtraction of infinite from infinite and the representation of missing values Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represented by ON or a numerical value unequal to 0 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numerical value O In the case of a query 0 or 1 is returned Example Setting command SOURce FM STATe ON Query SOURce FM STATe Response 1 Text parameters follow the syntactic rules for key words ie they can be entered using a short or a long form Like any other parameter they must be separated from the header by a white space
280. set IEC IEEE bus command CAL FMOF 1090 3123 12 4 12 E 6 R SOSML R amp S SMVO3 Phase Modulation Phase Modulation Settings for phase modulation can be made in the Modulation OM menu Menu selection Modulation eh 100 0000000 10 0 dem ModulationeM ROM dM Deviation 1 000 rad M Source Ext Coupling LFGen Freq M Bandwidth Standard Back e Fig 4 11 Modulation DM menu preset setting OM Deviation Input value for deviation IEC IEEE bus command SOUR PM 1 RAD OM Source Switching on off PM and selection of modulation source IEC IEEE bus commands SOUR PM SOUR EXT STAT ON Ext Coupling Selection of AC or DC coupling for external input MOD IEC IEEE bus command SOUR PM EXT COUP AC LFGen Freq Selection of frequency of LF generator IEC IEEE bus command SOUR PM INT FREQ 1kHz OM Bandwidth Setting of bandwidth Settings Standard and Wide are available IEC IEEE bus command SOUR PM BAND WIDE 1090 3123 12 4 13 E 6 Pulse Modulation Option R amp S SML B3 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Pulse Modulation Option R amp S SML B3 The pulse modulator can be controlled from an external source or by an internal pulse generator With external control the external source feeds the pulse modulator directly The envelope of the RF is identical to the control signal With control by the internal pulse generator the pulse shape of the pulse generator determines the envelope of the RF The pulse d
281. set setting AM Depth Input value of modulation depth IEC IEEE bus command SOUR AM 30PCT AM Source Selection of modulation source Off Ext Lfgen or Two Tone are available IEC IEEE bus command SOUR AM SOUR EXT STAT ON Ext Coupling Selection of AC or DC coupling with external modulation source IEC IEEE bus command SOUR AM EXT COUP AC LFGen Freq Selection of frequency of LF generator IEC IEEE bus command SOUR AM INT FREQ 1kHz 1090 3123 12 4 11 E 6 Frequency Modulation R amp S SML R8E SOSMVO3 Frequency Modulation Settings for frequency modulation can be made in the Modulation FM menu Menu selection Modulation FM 100 000 0000 mz 0 dem Modulation em ron FM Deviation 10 0000 kHz FM Source CO Ext Coupling AC LFGen Freq 1 00000 kHz FM Bandwidth Standard FM Offset Back 4 Fig 4 10 Modulation FM menu preset setting FM Deviation Input value for deviation IEC IEEE bus command SOUR FM 10kHz FM Source owitching on off FM and selection of modulation source IEC IEEE bus commands SOUR FM SOUR EXT STAT ON Ext Coupling Selection of AC or DC coupling for external input MOD IEC IEEE bus command SOUR FM EXT COUP AC LFGen Freq Selection of frequency of LF generator IEC IEEE bus command SOUR FM INT FREQ 1kHz FM Bandwidth Setting of bandwidth Settings Standard and Wide are available IEC IEEE bus command SOUR FM BAND WIDE FM Offset This function is used to compensate DC off
282. set settings R amp S SMV03 1090 3123 12 4 43 E 6 Vector Modulation R amp S SMVO03 only R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 State Crest Factor Impairment State Leakage Imbalance Quadrature Offset IQ Swap Calibrate Calib once 1090 3123 12 Switches the vector modulation on and off IEC IEEE bus command SOUR DM IQ STAT ON Sets the crest factor IEC IEEE bus command SOUR DM IQ CRES 10DB Switches l Q impairment on and off IEC IEEE bus command SOUR DM IQ IMP STAT ON Value entered for residual carrier IEC IEEE bus command SOUR DM LEAK MAGN 10PCT Value entered for imbalanced modulation of and Q vectors IEC IEEE bus command SOUR DM IQR MAGN 5PCT Value entered for quadrature offset IEC IEEE bus command SOUR DM QUAD ANGL 4DEG Selection between normal and inverted UO modulation Interchanging the and Q signals inverts the modulation sidebands OFF Normal UO modulation ON and Q signals interchanged IEC IEEE bus command OOUR DM IQS CAL STAT ON Triggers a calibration for the I Q modulator for the whole RF frequency range calibration time approximately 4 min IEC IEEE bus command CATE VMOD Triggers a calibration for the I Q modulator at the actual RF frequency calibration time approximately 4 s IEC IEEE bus command CAL VMOD MEAS ONCE 4 44 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Vector Modulation R amp S SMVO03 only UO IMPAIRMENT For simulating an impairmen
283. set the output level the level control and the level correction of the RF signal Other units can be used instead of dBm e by indication directly after the numeric value example POW 0 5V SOURce POWer ALC SEARch Query only STATe ON OFF LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude 140 dBm to Pmax OFFSet 100 to 100 dB LIMit AMPLitude 140 dBm to Pmax MANual 140 dBm to Pmax 29 dBm with R amp S SML B10 MODE CW FIXed SWEep RCL INCLude EXCLude STAR 29 dBm withR amp S SML B10 t 140 dBm to Pmax 29 dBm with R amp S SML B10 STOP 140 dBm to Pray G STEP INCRement 0 1 to10dB SOURce POWer ALC The commands checking the automatic level control are under this node SOURce POWer ALC SEArch This command defines under which conditions the control loop is temporarily closed The command is suitable only if SOUR POW ALC STAT is set to OFF This command is a query and hence has no RST value Example SOUR POW ALC SEAR SOURce POWer ALC STATe ON OFF The command switches the level control on or off ON Level control is permanently switched on OFF Level control is switched on for a short period of time if the level changes Example SOUR POW ALC STAT ON RST value is ON SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate The commands to set the output levels for the CW and SWEEP modes are under this node 1090 3123 12 6 27 E 6 SOURce POWer R amp S SML RESOSMVOS SOU
284. settled The controller can be programmed to wait for the respective action to occur see Table 5 1 Table 5 1 Synchronization by means of OPC OPC and WA Action after the hardware has settled Programming of controller Sets the operation complete bits in the ESR Setting of bit O in the ESE Setting of bit 5 in the SRE Waiting for a service request SRQ oe Writes a 1 into the output buffer Addressing of instrument as a talker WAI Continues the IEC IEEE bus handshake Sending of next command The handshake is not stopped An example of command synchronization will be found in section 7 Programming Examples 1090 3123 12 5 15 E 6 Status Reporting System R amp S SML R8E SOSMVOS Status Reporting System The status reporting system see Fig 5 4 stores all information on the current operating state of the instrument for example on any errors that have occurred This information is stored in status registers and in an error queue The status registers and the error queue can be queried via the IEC IEEE bus The information is of a hierarchical structure The highest level is formed by the status byte STB register defined in IEEE 488 2 and the associated service request enable SRE mask register The STB register receives information from the standard event status register ESR which is also defined in IEEE 488 2 with the associated standard event status enable ESE mask register and from the registers STATus OPE
285. shows the user at which position in the menu he is The position of the menu cursor is evident from the inverse notation of the term white characters on a black background Digit cursor As a bright field the digit cursor marks the position which can be varied by means of the rotary knob in a value indication 1090 3123 12 3 1 E 6 Basic Operating Steps R amp S SML RESOSMVOS Basic Operating Steps To operate the instrument menus are called in the display All setting possibilities and the current setting status are evident from the menus All settings can be made by accessing the menus RF frequency and RF level can also be set without menu operation using keys FREQ and LEVEL RF signal and modulation can also be switched on off without menu operation using keys RF ON OFF and or MOD ON OFF Calling the menus Accessing the menus is effected using rotary knob VARIATION SELECT key and BACK key Rotary knob SELECT key BACK key Rotary knob VARIATION moves the menu cursor over the positions of a menu level to be selected If a scrollbar is visible at the right hand margin of a menu the menu is larger than the screen window If the menu cursor is moved to the margin of the screen window the covered lines become visible If the rotary knob is pressed after a position has been selected the lower menu level or the respective settings are called The rotary knob hence has the same function as the SELECT key
286. sired baud rate and handshake gt Terminate input using the 1x ENTER key Indications during Remote Control The remote control state is indicated by Remote in the STATUS line In the REMOTE state the STATUS page is always displayed Return to Manual Operation Return to manual operation can be made via the front panel Press LOCAL key Note Before switchover command processing must be completed as otherwise switchover to remote control is effected immediately 1090 3123 12 9 4 E 6 R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Messages Messages The messages transferred via the data lines of the IEC IEEE bus can be divided into two groups interfaces messages and device messages No interface messages are defined for the RS 232 C interface Interface Messages Interface messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC IEEE bus the ATN control line being active They are used for communication between the controller and the instrument and can only be sent by a controller which has the IEC IEEE bus control Interface commands can be subdivided into universal commands and addressed commands Universal commands act on all devices connected to the IEC IEEE bus without previous addressing addressed commands only act on devices previously addressed as listeners The interface messages relevant to the instrument are listed in the section Interface Messages below oome control characters are defined for the control o
287. sor BACK Returns the menu cursor to the next higher menu level lt Moves the digit cursor to the left by one position in the marked value indication Moves the menu cursor to the top by one position in a 1 out of n selection Moves the digit cursor to the right by one position in the marked value indication Moves the menu cursor to the bottom by one position in a 1 out of n selection Rotary knob The rotary knob moves the menu cursor over the positions of a menu level to choose from or varies the value of a parameter The variation is either effected in steps of one or in a step width that can be specified at will Furthermore by pressing the rotary knob when the cursor marks a menu position the lower menu level or the setting menu is displayed cf function of SELECT key Cf Chapter 2 Section Sample Setting for First Users and Chapter 3 Section Basic Operating Steps 1 7 E 6 Front panel 1147 7509 13 FUNCTION MENU VARIATION DATA INPUT QUICK SELECT 10 e ROHDE amp SCHWARZ VECTOR SIGNAL GENERATOR 9 kHz 3 3 GHz SMV 03 Fig 1 1 Front panel view 1090 3123 12 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 6 FUNCTION HELP Indicates context sensitive auxiliary text STATUS Indicates the instrument status MOD ON OFF Switches on off the modulat
288. sponding to value set under Frequency Adjustment If option R amp S SML B1 Reference Oscillator OCXO is installed it is affected by these settings IEC IEEE bus command SOUR ROSC ADU STAT ON Frequency Adjustment Input value in the range 0 to 4095 for setting the internal reference frequency IEC IEEE bus command SOUR ROSC ADJ VAL 2047 Calibration Data Display of the calibration value entered in the Utilities Calib RefOsc menu IEC IEEE bus command CAL ROSC 1090 3123 12 4 59 E 6 Utilities R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Phase of the Output Signal The menu Utilities Phase offers access to the phase setting of the RF output signal with respect to a reference signal of the same frequency Activated FM oM or stereo modulation will be switched off if the phase setting will be switched on and vice versa Menu selection Utilities Phase 100 000 0000 10 0 dem UtilitiesPhase ron Off Delta Phase O deg Reset Delta Phase Back 4 Fig 4 29 Menu Utilities Phase State Switching on off phase setting IEC IEEE bus command SOUR PHAS STAT ON Delta Phase Setting value of the phase IEC IEEE bus command SOUR PHAS 30 DEG Reset Delta Phase Sets the display of the Delta Phase to O without the phase of the output signal being influenced IEC IEEE bus command SOUR PHAS REF 1090 3123 12 4 60 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Utilities Passwords for Accessing Protected Functions
289. sponse 20 31 06 01 08 03 The CT data is transmitted in group 4A Setting the real time clock CT command automatically adds group 4A to the group sequence Group 4A must not be manually added to or removed from the group sequence To remove group 4A from the group sequence the CT off command must be used CT off Note Description Command Example Deactivates transmission of the real time clock signal in the RDS signal CT off Command STEReo DlIRect CT off The real time clock signal is no longer transmitted in the RDS signal This command is used to remove group 4A from the group sequence Group 4A must not be manually removed from the group sequence 1090 3123 12 4 24 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 DI DS Description Command Query Response Value range Example Description Command Query Response Value range Example 1090 3123 12 Stereo Modulation Option R amp S SML B5 Sets or reads the decoder information With this command the current decoder operating mode mono stereo etc can be detected and if necessary changed Dl x DI X O F ASCII coded hexadecimal numbers Command STEReo DIRect DI 4 The decoder information is set to 4 Query STEReo DIRect DI Response 4 Selects activates a storage area in the Stereo RDS Coder Upon activation the settings stored in the selected area can be loaded DS x DS X
290. ssages m o Possible source and troubleshooting 313 Calibration Internal calibration data Data loss due to low battery voltage memory lost are missing XXXXXXXXX Data loss due to software update Data loss due to Factory Preset Possible troubleshooting Perform internal calibration see chapter 4 313 Calibration Calibration value is Loss of non volatile EEPROM data memory lost missing T Reference Oscillator Possible troubleshooting Adjustment of 10 MHz reference frequency see R amp S SML R amp S SMVO03 service manual 315 Configuration One or more EEPROM Loss of non volatile EEPROM data memory lost data blocks are missing where XXXXXXX indicates the name of the missing calibration IF Filter Main Loop Harmonic Filter Mult Filter Level Preset Lfgen Level FM Offset 1090 3123 12 9 8 E 6 R amp S SML R amp S SMV03 General 10 Performance Test General e The rated specifications of the signal generator are checked after a warm up time of at least 15 minutes Recalibration of the instrument is not necessary with the exception of the FM offset calibration e A defined default state is set prior to each measurement by pressing the PRESET key e The values in the following sections are not guaranteed Only the specifications in the data sheet are binding e he values in the data sheet are guaranteed limits Due to measurement errors these limits must be extended by the toler
291. st input digit sign or decimal point key BACKSPACE Unit keys with enter function a m d B The unit keys terminate the input of values and specify the multiplication factor for the respective basic unit The basic units are displayed next to the input field while numbers are entered In the case of level settings the unit keys specify the unit G n dBuV Selects giga nano with RF level dBuV Miu uV Selects mega micro with level uV k m MV Selects kilo milli with level mV X1 Enter dB m Terminates entries in the basic unit and value inputs without unit Selects with level dBm oelects with level offset and level step width dB In order to change to another level unit simply press the unit key desired Parameter LEVEL must be activated e g by pressing the LEVEL key gt Cf Chapter 3 Section Change Unit of Level 1 6 E 6 R amp S SML RESOSMVOS 8 s Boa 1147 7509 13 FUNCTION MENU VARIATION DATA INPUT QUICK SELECT 10 gt ROHDE amp SCHWARZ VECTOR SIGNAL GENERATOR 9 kHz 3 3 GHz SMV 03 Fig 1 1 Front panel view 1090 3123 12 Front Panel 5 MENU VARIATION Fi e Lo Lal Menu keys The menu keys access the menus and settings within the menus SELECT Acknowledges the choice marked by the menu cur
292. step width Step widths from 360 to 360 are possible Example SOUR PHAS 40 DEG RST value is 0 DEG SOURce PHASe REFerence The command sets the phase value to 0 The phase of output signal will not be changed Example SOUR PHAS REF RST value is O SOURce PHASe STATe ON OFF Switching on off phase setting Example SOUR PHAS STAT ON RST value is OFF SOURce PHASe STEP 360 to 360 DEG The command sets the step width for SOURce PHASe UP or SOURce PHASe DOWN Step widths from 360 to 360 are possible Preset or RST does not change the step width Example SOUR PHAS STEP 90 DEG 1090 3123 12 6 24 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 SOURce PM SOURce PM Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to control the phase modulation and to set the parameters of the modulation signal MT M aj SOURce PM DEViation RAD EXTernal COUPling AC DC INTernal FREQuency 0 1 Hz to 10 MHz Hz SOURce EXTernal INTernal TTONe STATe ON OFF PANICO STANdard WIDE SOURce PM DEViation O to 10 RAD The command specifies the phase variation caused by the M The maximum possible deviation depends on the selected frequency see Data Sheet Example SOUR PM DEV 2 RAD RST value is 1 RAD SOURce PM EXTernal The commands to set the external M input are under this node The settings under EXTernal for modulations AM FM and M are independent of each other SOURce PM EX
293. storage of data is no longer guaranteed and a message is displayed on the screen The most important instrument functions are automatically monitored during operation If a faulty function is detected in the selftest Err is displayed in the status line To identify the error the ERROR menu in which the error messages are entered can be called by pressing the ERROR key cf Chapter 9 Error Messages The tests can additionally be called via the menu Access to the tests is offered by the Utilities Test menu Menu selection Utilities Test 100 000 0000 mhz bai DO aem Utilities Test RFOn Not tested RAM Not tested RAM Batteru Not tested Back 4 Fig 4 35 X Utilities Test menu EPROM Tests the EPROM The test result is displayed in a window IEC IEEE bus command TEST ROM RAM Tests the RAM The test result is displayed in a window IEC IEEE bus command TEST RAM RAM Battery Tests the RAM battery The test result is displayed in a window IEC IEEE bus command TESTI BATT 1090 3123 12 4 66 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Utilities Assigning Modulations to the MOD ON OFF Key ModKey Modulation types can be switched on off in the modulation menus and with the MOD ON OFF key It can be defined in the Utilities ModKey menu for which modulation types the MOD ON OFF key is to be effective The key is effective either for all types of modulation or only for a selected modulation Function of
294. string Queries are formed as follows SOURce STEReo DlRect string Command Parameters SOURce STEReo ARI BK CODE DEViation STATe TYPE STATe AUDio FREQency MODE PREemphasis STATe EXTernal iIMPedance DEViation DIRect PILot DEViation PHAse STATe RDS DATaset DEViation STATe TRAFfic PROGram STATe ANNouncement STATe SOURce STATe 1090 3123 12 A BI C D E F 0 10 kHz ON OFF DK BK BKDK ON OFF 0 1 Hz 1MHz LEFT RIGHt RELeft REMLeft RNELeft 50 us 75 us ON OFF 600 Ohm 100 kOhm 0 80 kHz String 0 10 kHz 5 5 DEG ON OFF DS1 DS2 DS3 DS4 DS5 0 10 kHz ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF LREXt SPEXt LFGen ON OFF 6 34 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 SOURce STEReo SOURce STEReo ARI The commands to set the ARI functions are under this node SOURce StEReo ARI BK CODE A BI C D E F The command selects the standard traffic area codes A to F Example SOUR STER ARI BK F RST value A SOURce STEReo ARI DEViation 0 to 10 kHz Input value of the frequency deviation of the ARI subcarrier Example SOUR STER ARI 4 kHz RST value is 3 5 kHz SOURce STEReo ARI STATe ON OFF Switching on off ARI subcarrier Example SOUR STER ARI STAT ON RST value is OFF SOURce STEReo TYPE DK BK BKDK Selection of ARI broadcasting code DK and
295. suppression Menu selection Level ALC Fig 4 5 Level ALC menu preset setting State On Level control is switched on permanently IEC IEEE bus command SOUR POW ALC ON Off Level control is switched off No AM is possible in this status IEC IEEE bus command SOUR POW ALC OFF Menu selection Level ALC gg sample amp Hold Fig 4 6 Level ALC State Off ALC Off Mode Sample amp Hold In the SAMPLE amp HOLD mode the level is recalibrated after each level or frequency setting To do this CW is selected for a short period of time level control is switched on and the level control held at the value attained IEC IEEE bus command SOUR POW ALC ON Table In the ALC Off mode correction values are taken from a table IEC IEEE bus command SOUR POW ALC OFF Search Once Lelvel control manually switched on for short time for levelchalibration in ALC State Off mode IEC IEEE bus command SOUR POW ALC ON SOUR POW ALC OFF Learn Table Correction values for the Table mode are regenerated IEC IEEE bus command SOUR POW ALC TABL MEAS 1090 3123 12 4 6 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 RF Level User Correction Ucor The User correction function can be used to create and activate lists in which level correction values are assigned to arbitrary RF frequencies Up to 10 lists with a total of 160 correction values can be compiled For frequencies not included in the list level correction values are det
296. symbols should be located in a square grid gt Select Impairment State On on the R amp S SMVO3 The symbols must no longer be arranged at right angles the Y axis should be inclined towards the left by 10 with a setting of 10 it should be inclined towards the right 10 48 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Performance test report Performance test report Table 10 6 Performance Test Report ROHDE 8 SCHWARZ Ext Perf Test Report Signal generator R amp S SMV03 Stock no _ Model R amp S SMV03 Serial umber Tested by Date Signature Parameter tested Contained in Min value Actual value Max value ra Tolerance limit Frequency Setting time Page 10 41 see data sheet ms Spectral purity Harmonics at level Page 10 41 see data sheet dBc 8 dBm Nonharmonics Page 10 42 see data sheet dBc Broadband noise 1 GHz 2 MHz offset from carrier Page 10 42 see data sheet dBc Hz Level Frequency response Page 10 43 see data sheet dB at 8 dBm 3 1dBm Setting time for f gt 100 kHz Page 10 43 dB Non interrupting level setting Page 10 43 see data sheet ms Vector mdulation Input impedance Page 10 44 see data sheet Maximum output level Page 10 44 see data sheet Error vector Page 10 45 Modulation frequency response Page 10 45 see data sheet Residual carrier and Page 10 46 see data sheet leakage see data sheet UO imbalance Page 10 47 see data sheet 1147 7621 12 10 49 E 6
297. t of the vector modulation a residual carrier LEAKAGE imbalanced and Q modulation IMBALANCE and a quadrature offset can be entered The input values for LEAKAGE and IMBALANCE are with reference to the voltage Table 4 1 Parameter setting ranges Parameter Setting range Resolution LEAKAGE 0 50 96 0 5 IMBALANCE 12 12 96 0 1 QUADRATURE OFFSET 10 10 0 1 The following figure shows the effect of UO impairment LEAKAGE 4Q Carrier Leakage IMBALANCE Q QUADRATURE OFFSET S 1090 3123 12 4 45 E 6 LF Generator R amp S SML RE SOSMVO3 LF Generator The frequency of internal modulation signals can be selected in one of the modulation menus AM FM M or in the LF Output menu cf Chapter 4 Sections Amplitude Modulation Frequency Modulation Phase Modulation and LF Output LF Output The internal LF generator is available as a signal source for the LF output Settings for the LF output can be made in the LF Output menu Note Any change to the frequency of the internal modulation generator in the LF Ou tput menu also affects the modulation for which the generator has been selected as a modulation source The sweep function of the LF generator can be activated in the Sweep Lfgen menu Inputs can only be made in V or mV Menu selection LF Output 100 0000000 mHz 10 0 dem LF Output RFOn State Ort 1 000 Y LFGen Freq 1 00000 k
298. t the group sequence e g STEReo DlIRect gs 0a 1a The defined data is now transmitted in group 1A Max 20 different data sequences can be defined Transparent Mode The transparent mode allows the user to transmit freely definable binary data instead of the standard RDS data Blocks A to D of the RDS groups are used This means that standard RDS data will no longer be transmitted when transparent data is set The binary data will be sent even if it constitutes no valid or meaningful RDS data The transmission of standard RDS data will not be resumed until the transparent data is deleted Delete the transparent data and switch back to standard RDS data transmission with STEReo DlRect TRANS 0 Max 20 different data sequences can be defined 1090 3123 12 4 41 E 6 Stereo Modulation Option R amp S SML B5 R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Sending a RDS dataset to the R amp S SML R amp S SMV03 STER DIR UPISDIAZST SS TEBERSDIR PS TESTL Sol ERS DIR TP 0 STER DIR TA 0 SOJERSDIR UEDPYSOUT Ee et MADIS EE eier STERIDIR STORE 1 After downloading the commands of the above example and selecting RDS dataset 1 the following information is indicated on the display RDS Data Set Program Service Name Program Identifikation Traffic Program Trafic Announcement Important Only after sending the STORE command see last line in the above example the dataset will be stored in the non volatile memmory of the SMV
299. t to ON a second pulse whose width is identical to the first pulse is generated in every period SOURce PULSe DOUBle DELay 60 ns to 1 3 s The command sets the delay time from the start of the pulse period to the first edge of the second pulse Example SOUR PULS DOUB DEL 10us RST value is 1 us SOURce PULSe DOUBle STATe ON OFF The command switches the second pulse on or off ON The second pulse is switched on Parameter SOUR PULS DEL is set to O and cannot be changed WIDTh gt PULS PER PULS DOUB DEL 2 results in error message 221 Settings conflict OFF The second pulse is switched off Example SOUR PULS DOUB STAT OFF RST value is OFF SOURce PULSe PERiod 100 ns to 85s The command sets the pulse period The pulse period is the reciprocal value of the pulse frequency thus this command is coupled to command SOUR PULM INT FREQ Example SOUR PULS PER 2s RST value is 10 us 1090 3123 12 6 31 E 6 SOURce PULSe R amp S SML RESOSMVOS SOURce PULSe WIDTh 20 ns to 1 3 s The command sets the pulse width Example SOUR PULS WIDT 0 1s RST value is 1 us 1090 3123 12 6 32 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 SOURce ROSCillator SOURce ROSCillator Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to set the external and internal reference oscillator nu M ares SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust STATe ON OFF VALue 0 to 4095 SOURce INTernal EXTernal SOURc
300. te signal NORMal Active level HIGH INVerted Active level LOW Example TRIG PULS EGAT POL INV RST value is NORM TRIGger PULSe SOURce AUTO SINGle EXTernal EGATed The command specifies the trigger source AUTO Trigger is free running see above SINGle Triggering is effected by means of IEC bus commands TRIG PULS IMM EXTernal Triggering is effected from outside via the PULSE socket EGATed Triggering is effected when the gate signal is active Example TRIG PULS SOUR AUTO RST value is AUTO TRIGger PULSe SLOPe POSitive NEGative The command defines whether the action triggered is triggered at the positive or the negative edge of the trigger signal Example TRIG PULS SLOP NEG RST value is POS TRIGger PULSe IMMediate TRIGger PULSe IMMediate The command immediately starts a pulse The command corresponds to manual control command Execute Single Pulse This command triggers an event and thus has no RST value Example TRIG PULS IMM 1090 3123 12 6 51 E 6 TRIGger R amp S SML RESOSMVOS UNIT System Using this command the basic unit of the RF level only can be changed and set Simultaneously the displayed unit is changed accordingly anas ar Ea ee UNIT POWer DBM VOLT DBUV V UNIT POWer DBM VOLT DBUV V Using this command the basic unit of the RF level only can be changed and set Simultaneously the displayed unit is changed accordingly Note The LF gen
301. u otra clase de da os No utilice nunca el producto dentro de un veh culo en movimiento si esto pudiera distraer al conductor Siempre queda en la responsabilidad absoluta del conductor la seguridad del veh culo El fabricante no asumir ninguna clase de responsabilidad por accidentes o colisiones Dado el caso de que est integrado un producto de laser en un producto R amp S por ejemplo CD DVD ROM no utilice otras instalaciones o funciones que las descritas en la documentaci n de producto De otra manera pondr en peligro su salud ya que el rayo laser puede da ar irreversiblemente sus ojos Nunca trate de descomponer estos productos Nunca mire dentro del rayo laser Sheet 9 Certified Quality System DIN EN ISO 9001 DIN EN 2000 2003 2004 9100 DIN EN ISO 14001 DOS REG NO 001954 UM UM QUALITATSZERTIFIKAT Sehr geehrter Kunde Sie haben sich fur den Kauf eines Rohde amp Schwarz Produktes entschie den Hiermit erhalten Sie ein nach modernsten Fertigungsmethoden hergestelltes Produkt Es wurde nach den Regeln unseres Management systems entwickelt gefertigt und gepruft Das Rohde amp Schwarz Management system Ist zertifiziert nach DIN EN ISO 9001 2000 DIN EN 9100 2003 DIN EN ISO 14001 2004 CERTIFICATE OF QUALITY Dear Customer you have decided to buy a Rohde amp Schwarz product You are thus as sured of receiving a product that is manufactured using the most modern methods availab
302. ual de producto solamente deber n ser conectados para el funcionamiento a tomas de corriente de contacto de seguridad y con conductor protector conectado Queda prohibida toda clase de interrupci n intencionada del conductor protector tanto en la toma de corriente como en el mismo producto Puede tener como consecuencia el peligro de golpe de corriente por el producto Si se utilizaran cables o enchufes de extensi n se deber poner al seguro que es controlado su estado t cnico de seguridad Si el producto no est equipado con un interruptor para desconectarlo de la red se deber considerar el enchufe del cable de distribuci n como interruptor En estos casos deber asegurar de que el enchufe sea de f cil acceso y nabejo seg n la medida del cable de distribuci n aproximadamente 2 m Los interruptores de funci n o electr nicos no son aptos para el corte de la red el ctrica Si los productos sin interruptor est n integrados en construciones o instalaciones se deber instalar el interruptor al nivel de la instalaci n Sheet 7 12 No utilice nunca el producto si est da ado el 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Informaciones de seguridad cable el ctrico Compruebe regularmente el correcto estado de los cables de conexi n a red Asegure a trav s de las medidas de protecci n y de instalaci n adecuadas de que el cable de el ctrico no pueda ser da ado o de que nadie pueda ser da ado po
303. uest routine is included in chapter 7 Programming Examples Serial Poll In a serial poll just as with command STB the status byte of an instrument is queried However the query is implemented by means of interface messages and is therefore clearly faster The serial poll method has already been defined in IEEE 488 1 and used to be the only standard method for different instruments to query the status byte The method also works with instruments which do not adhere to SCPI nor to IEEE 488 2 The QuickBASIC command for executing a serial poll is IBRSP Serial polling is mainly used to obtain a fast overview of the states of several instruments connected to the IEC IEEE bus 1090 3123 12 0 22 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Status Reporting System Parallel Poll In a parallel poll up to eight instruments are simultaneously requested by the controller by means of a single command to transmit 1 bit of information each on the data lines ie to set the data line allocated to each instrument to logically 0 or 1 Analogously to the SRE register which determines under what conditions an SRQ is generated there is a parallel poll enable PPE register which is likewise ANDed with the STB bit by bit with bit 6 being taken into account The results are ORed and the result of this is sent possibly inverted in response to a parallel poll by the controller The result can also be queried without a parallel poll using the command IST
304. ument CALL IBWRT generator OUTPUT ON SWLECH On RE output REM amp dee koe kk ke KKK KK KK KKK KK KK KKK KK KKK KK KKK KK KKK KK KKK KK KKK KK KKK kk HH HH RRA RA kk ck ko 1090 3123 12 7 1 E 6 Programming Examples R amp S SML R8E SOSMVO3 Transmission of Instrument Setting Commands Output frequency output level and AM modulation are set in this example By analogy to the step width setting of the rotary knob the step width is additionally set for the alteration of the RF frequency in the case of UP and DOWN REM EE Instrument setting Commands SF77 7577 CALL IBWRT generator FREQUENCY 250E6 RF Frequency 250 MHz CALL IBWRT generator AM 80 AM with modulaton index of 80 CALL IBWRT generator AM INTERNAL FREQUENCY 3KHZ Modulation frequency 3kHz CALL IBWRT generators AM SOURCE INT Modulation source LF generator CALL IBWRT generators FREQUENCY STEP 12000 Step width RF frequency 12 kHz REM KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK CALL IBWRT generators POWER 10 Output power 10 dBm Switchover to Manual Control REM gt gt Switch instrument over to manual control CALL IBLOC generators Set instrument to Local state REM KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK Reading out Instrument Settings The settings made in the example above are read out here The abbreviated commands are used R
305. uperposition of the two components The frequency offset gives rise to a beat From the amplitude ratio of this beat conclusions can be drawn with regard to the VSWR oettings on the R amp S FREQ 9 MHz 50 MHz 200 MHz 350 MHz every 20 MHz to 1100 MHz SMLO1 LEVEL 10 dBm 5 dBm 0 dBm 10 dBm 1090 3123 12 10 14 E 6 R amp S SML R S amp GSMV03 Test sequence Settings on the R amp S FREQ SML02 03 R amp S SMV03 9 MHz 50 MHz 200 MHz 350 MHz every 20 MHz to 2200 MHz or 3300 MHz LEVEL 8 dBm 3 dBm 2 dBm 7 dBm Settings on the test receiver Spectrum analyzer mode Center frequency FREQ R amp S SML Span 0 Hz Reference level LEVEL R amp S SML Resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth 10 kHz Linear level scale Sweep time 30 ms Settings on the second test Frequency FREQ R amp S SML 100 Hz transmitter RF OFF first Measurement Bring the line displayed on the test receiver due to changing the reference level to roughly the middle of the screen read off the level as the reference level and make a note of it gt Unscrew the bridge from the R amp S SML R amp S SMVO03 and increase the level on the second test transmitter until the reference level is again being measured on the analyzer gt Screw the bridge or directional coupler back onto the R amp S SML R amp S SMVOS The spectrum analyzer now shows a more or less wavy line which represents the VSWR of the R amp
306. ut switching the attenuator see RF level section Non Interrupting Level Setting Example OUTP AMOD AUTO RST value is AUTO 1090 3123 12 6 11 E 6 OUTPut R amp S SML RESOSMVOS OUTPut3 POLarity PULSe NORMal INVerted The command determines the polarity of the signal at the PULSE VIDEO output Example OUTP3 POL PULS INV RST value is NORM OUTPut3 SOURce OFF PULSegen VIDeo The command selects between pulse generator and video output Example OUTP3 SOUR VID RST value is OFF OUTPut1 2 STATe ON OFF The command switches on or off the RF output output1 or the LF output output2 The RF output can also be switched off by the response of the protective circuit But this has no influence on this parameter Note In contrast to the PRESET key command RST sets the value for output1 to OFF the RF output is deactivated Example OUTP STAT ON RST value is OFF OUTPut1 STATe PON OFF UNCHanged This command selects the state the RF output output1 is to assume after power on of the unit It only exists for the RF output RST does not influence the set value OFF Output is switched off UNCHanged Same state as before switch off Example OUTP PON OFF OUTPut2 VOLTage 0Vto 4 V The command sets the voltage of the LF output output2 The voltage is a characteristic of the output not of the source l e the voltage is maintained even if another generator is connected to the output Exampl
307. weep in the Ext Single and Ext Step modes or stops the sweep in all modes RUN Queries whether a sweep is being performed IEC IEEE bus commands RF sweep LF sweep Level sweep SOUR SWE RUNN SOUR2 SWE RUNN SOUR SWE POW RUNN Note This query may cause distortions in the course of the sweep depending on the frequency of checkimng and dwell time RF Sweep Settings for RF sweeps can be made in the Sweep Freq menu Menu selection Sweep Freq 100 0000000 mHz 10 0 dem Sweepirreg OM 100 0000000 MHz 500 0000000 MHz 300 0000000 MHz 400 0000000 MHz 100 0000000 MHz Lin 1 0000000 MHz 13 0 ms Off Fig 4 19 Sweep Freq menu 1090 3123 12 4 51 E 6 Sweep Start Freq Stop Freq Center Freq Span Current Freq Spacing Spacing Lin Dwell Mode Reset Sweep Exec Single Sweep 1090 3123 12 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Input value of start frequency IEC IEEE bus command SOUR FREQ STAR 100MHz Input value of stop frequency IEC IEEE bus command SOUR FREQ STOP 500MHz Input value of center frequency IEC IEEE bus command SOUR FREQ CENT 300MHz Input value of span IEC IEEE bus command SOUR FREQ SPAN 400MHz Display of current frequency value In Step mode input value of frequency Selection of linear or logarithmic sweep IEC IEEE bus command SOUR SWE SPAC LIN Input value of step size Depending on whether Spacing Lin or Log is selected Step
308. wer to be filled This menu option is not offered if a list contains only elements with one parameter Start Frequency Input of start value for the selected parameter This option is offered only if Frequency is selected as a parameter Increment Frequency Input of increment between two successive values If O is entered as an increment the list will be filled with identical values This option is offered only if Frequency is selected as a parameter Power Input of start value for the selected parameter This option is offered only if Power is selected as a parameter Increment Power Input of increment between two successive values lf O is entered as an increment the list will be filled with identical values This option is offered only if Power is selected as a parameter Execute Starts the filling procedure After the execution of the function the menu cursor goes back to Edit List 1090 3123 12 3 11 E 6 List Editor R amp S SML RESOSMVOS Edit View editing function see Fig 3 8 The Edit View function allows viewing of a complete list or editing individual values of a list If the cursor is on a value in the left column of the list the Edit View mode can be exited by pressing the BACK key The menu cursor goes back to Edit List There is no storage function for the list This means that any modification of the list will be transferred to the internal data set and will be effective on exiting the Edit View function
309. x too long The suffix contains more than 12 characters Suffix not allowed A suffix is not allowed for this command or at this position of the command Example The command RCL does not allow for a suffix to be entered Invalid character data The text parameter either contains an invalid character or it is invalid for this command Example spelling mistake in parameter entry SOURce FREQuency MODE FIKSed Character data too long The text parameter contains more than 12 characters Character data not allowed The text parameter is not allowed for this command or at this position of the command Example The command RCL requires the entry of a number String data not allowed The command contains a valid character string at a position which is not allowed Example A text parameter is entered in inverted commas eg SOURce FREQuency MODE FIXed Invalid block data The command contains errored block data Example An END message was received before the expected number of data was received Block data not allowed The command contains valid block data at a position which is not allowed Example The command RCL requires the entry of a number Expression data not allowed The command contains a mathematical expression at a position which is not allowed 9 3 List of Error Messages E 6 List of Error Messages R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Execution Error error in the execution of a command sets bit 4 in the ESR register
310. xample STORE TA Description Command Value range Example Description Command Query Response Value range Example 1090 3123 12 R amp S SML RESOSMVOS Status request as to whether the encoder or the update loader program is being executed Status XXX ENC encoder program is running UPL update loader program is running Query STEReo DlRect STATUS Response ENC Stores data in the flash memory All RDS specific settings are stored in data set x of the flash memory STORE x 1to5 Command STEReo DlRect STORE 1 The current settings are stored in data set 1 Sets or reads the traffic announcement flag This flag signals whether traffic information is currently being broadcast TA x TA X OI Command STEReo DIRect TA 1 The traffic announcement flag is set to 1 Query STEReo DIRect TA Response St 4 38 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 TP Description Command Query Response Value range Example TRANS Note Description Command Query Response Value range Example Stereo Modulation Option R amp S SML B5 Sets or reads the traffic program flag This flag signals whether traffic information is generally transmitted TP x TP X 0 1 Command STEReo DIRect TP 1 The traffic program flag is set to 1 Query STEReo DlRect TP Response ed Transparent mo
311. y all information which does not require hardware measurement are under this node DIAGnostic INFO CCOunt POWer The command queries the number of switch on processes Example DIAG INFO CCO POW Response 258 DIAGnostic INFO MODules The command queries the modules existing in the instrument with their model and state of modification numbers The response supplied is a list in which the different entries are separated by commas The length of the list is variable and depends on the equipment of the instrument Each entry consists of three parts which are separated by means of blanks 1 Name of module 2 Variant of module in the form VarXX XX 2 digits 3 Revision of module in the form RevXX XX 2 digits Example DIAG INFO MOD Response ROSC VARO1 REVOO DIAGnostic INFO OTIMe The command reads out the internal operating time counter The response supplies the number of hours the instrument has been in operation Example DIAG INFO OTIM Response 19 1090 3123 12 6 8 E 6 R amp S SML RESOSMVOS DIAGnostic DIAGnostic INFO SDATe The command queries the date of software creation The response is returned in the form year month day Example DIAG INFO SDAT Response 1999 12 19 DIAGnostic MEASure The commands which trigger a measurement in the instrument and return the measured value are under this node DIAGnostic MEASure POINt The command triggers a measurement at a measuring poi
312. yzer Analyzer in 1 2 L R out RDS decoder Mod analyzer MPX in oleozedoo le mi V7 RF out RF in 1090 3123 12 10 5 AF out E 6 Test sequence Test sequence R amp S SML RESEOSMVOS Display and keyboard Checking the display Checking the keyboard Frequency Frequency setting Test setup Settings on R S SML R amp S SMVO3 Settings on the test receiver Measurement Setting time Test setup Measurement principle Preparing the measurement 1090 3123 12 gt gt gt gt gt Switch on instrument gt The basic menu appears after a few seconds In menu item UTILITIES gt DISPLAY CONTRAST use the rotary knob to change the setting value gt The contrast changes from dark to light Actuate keys and check the reaction on the display Test setup 1 spectrum analyzer mode UTILITIES gt REF OSC gt SOURCE EXT LEVEL 0 dBm FREQ Test frequencies 60 MHz 100 MHz 250 MHz 600 MHz 1000 MHz With Ext Divider Range 10 MHz 50 MHz For R amp S SML02 03 R amp S SMVO3 also 2200 MHz 3300 MHz CF test frequency SPAN 20 Hz Resolution bandwidth 10 Hz oet marker on peak and read off frequency Test setup 2 spectrum analyzer mode The spectrum analyzer is operated as an FM demodulator A process controller transmits the start frequency and target frequency via the IEC IEEE bus The spectrum ana
313. z XXX X XXX X or if list z xxx x 87 6 to 107 9 ASCII coded decimal numbers yyyy 0000 to FFFF ASCII coded hexadecimal numbers A N new AF list or AF list to be added z 1 to 5 AF list to be read Command STEReo DIRect EON AFB 1000 N 97 4 98 3 Creates a new type B alternative frequency list for the EON with PI 1000 The list contains the alternative frequencies 97 4 MHz and 98 3 MHz Query STEReo DIRect EON AFB 1000 1 Reads the first type B alternative frequency list of the EON with PI 1000 Response 97 4 98 3 is not available ist Note For each Enhanced Other Network EON a maximum of five type B alternative frequency lists can be created each list containing max five frequencies A minimum of two frequencies per EON is required 1090 3123 12 4 26 E 6 R amp S SML R amp ES SMVO3 Stereo Modulation Option R amp S SML B5 EON DEL Description Enhanced Other Networks deletes the complete EON with Pl xxxx Command EON DEL xxxx Value range xxxx 0000 to FFFF ASCII coded hexadecimal numbers Example STEReo DIRect EON DEL 1000 Deletes the EON with PI 1000 EON PI Description Enhanced Other Networks creates a new EON or reads the list of the program identification PI codes of all EONS created so far Command EON Pl xxxx Query EON PI Response XXXX Value range 0000 to FFFF ASCII coded hexadecimal numbers Example Command STEReo DIRect EON
314. z 76 MHz 1090 3123 12 10 7 E 6 Test sequence R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Reference frequency Internal reference output Note Let the R amp S SML R amp S SMVO03 warm up for at least 2 hours before starting a measurement Test setup gt Connect test receiver spectrum analyzer mode to REF EXT output on rear panel of R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Settings on the test receiver Center frequency 10 MHz Span 20 Hz Resolution bandwidth 10 Hz Measurement gt Set marker on peak and read off frequency Analysis The frequency deviation must not exceed the sum of the deviations resulting from the frequency error in the rated temperature range and from aging External reference input Test setup gt Connect test receiver spectrum analyzer mode to RF connector on R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 gt Connect signal generator to REF IN connector on rear panel of R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 gt Connect references of test receiver and signal generator Settings on the test receiver Center frequency test frequency of R amp S SML R amp S SMVO3 Span 100 Hz Resolution bandwidth 10 Hz Settings on R amp S SML Switch reference oscillator to external R amp S SMVO3 Settings on the signal Frequency 10 MHz generator Level 7 dBm Measurement gt Set marker on peak and read off frequency Analysis The frequency deviation must not exceed the sum of the deviations resulting from the frequency error in the r

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

Installing Ocularis Base  Manuel d`utilisation - français Gamme des VIDEO AV300 ARCHOS  Instrucciones de manejo Impulsor vibratorio  STEUERGERÄT FÜR RGB-LED-SCHEINWERFER  Pioneer PureVision PDP-424MV 42 in. Plasma HDTV  GEBRAUCHSANLEITUNG MODE D`EMPLOI ! !  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file